wyatis tbe Wr

ve

ie tee ey ’ Lene aren any :

ude ee me 5 9

OE ibs tit 1 hi SPT te Ar ERS ’ ? , ON ee a ees

} Nets t Rite Setaice i ¢ ; ' . Me ; : enn :

wd vs ; , ; ; M ish ¢ A)

rerara tas

ie To tts alban

“sien

y ‘ Gh cer ee veee®, i?

‘ ere ; ; : MMe hetenp eh, Catiok 6? Hae vate eeecneres

sar tt , . ; vast ee : : 11% Ao syn ah 4 oP ; : he Rn

; : abet : ad vs Sh vis tect i . : ort tes ie Ranh Wists Se Sree

- 7 p - = .* er aye Py me th r a cs

ee ’ pia eee ead ersepe Target oh a

eet ee > gpa are. ‘7 haps . .

Sf FOES EE. " f ‘ ; . fe eta one

! oe Fi a eT TS

es ga

ore

vee

re Sp apshawate

Seaweed EVE

PERE i test sor

eet = m

sneieih ee alee og ®

Sanat ea inds

a

Se ES

gin GAS PaO

ae Re eee

—_

FO RS ELE wee, © Pier

FOR EDVCATION

FOR S@TEINIGE

LIBRARY

OF

THE AMERICAN MUSEUM

OF

NATURAL HISTORY

£

J 0 UFR NAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

VOL. XLIV.

PART II. (NATURAL HISTORY, &C.)

(Nos. I ro III.—1875.)

EDITED BY

JHE Naturar ftisTORY PECRETARY,

¢¢ Tt will flourish, if naturalists, chemists, antiquaries, philologers, and men of science

in different parts of Asza, will commit their observations to writing, and send them to

the Asiatic Society at Calcutta. It will languish, if such communications shall be long

intermitted ; and it will die away, if they shall entirely cease.” SIR WM. JONES.

CALCUTTA :

PRINTED BY f. Pp. ;ewts, PaPtistT MISSION PRESS,

1875.

petits’ BM

NSO

ahi

Ve

LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS.

=O SO

Page

Buanrorp, H. F. ;—On some recent Evidence of the Variation of the

Sye's JFaTe OQ WOOCOTID)S Rec notec GRABER oc one Bae aan cese pcr eenE = aa 21

Branrorp, W. T. ;—On the scientific names of the Sind “ Ibex,” the

Markchorvand the indian Antelope, :...:: eps. snes. .rscecks- sone 12

;—LVote on the Molluscan genera Ceelostele, Benson

and Francesia, Paladilhe, and on some species of Landshells from

PC CRORE Ra Re NMSA GRO NAN: . .. 5 . MPM ne icienol obo ath aan beck 41.

;—List of Mammalia collected by the late Dr. Sxo-

LICZKA, when attached to the embassy under Sir D. ForsytH

in Kashmir, Ladak, Hastern Turkestan, and Wakhdan, with de-

SCHUELOM SO) MALEWsSPECUCS awa cs als ae <..« + «MEER ERE Snes elses Pesycie a: day. oa LOS

;—On the species of Marmot imhabiting the Hima-

laya, Tibet, and the adjoining Beqions, ..........6e.eccce vee een scenes 114 ( (\>)

;—Lust of Reptilia and Amphibia collected by the

late Dr. StoticzKa in Kashmir, Ladak, Eastern Turkestan, and

Wakhan, with descriptions of New SPeCtes, 22.6... i cee cece nese vent 191

;—Wote on G) Hlachistodon Westermanni, (ii) Pla-

tyceps semifasciatus, and (iii) Ablepharus pusillus and Ble-

FOMAOSbeTeS ACTS WW satectea iat. ni ss OMB u et Cas Jeo nebo ash 207

;—Note on a large Hare inhabiting high elevations

ET VALESLERIU MULDEE UCN REN oc, NMEA TEN HALLE UIN TSR, 214

Fraser, O. L. ;—Wote on the occurrence of a partially ossified Nasal

Septum in Rhinoceros Sondaicus (Plate V), ...........sceceeseeees ~ 10

Gopwin-Austen, H. H. ;—Descriptions of New Species of Mollusca

of the genera Helix and Glessula from the Khasi Hills and Mant-

Beira cite AD) eres ce cts Ri emeie G ajc ss APM rc ROLL SALA eR ores i

;— Descriptions of new species of Mollusca

belonging to the family Zonitide from the N. EH. Frontier of

Bengal, with drawings of UHelicarion gigas, Benson, and of a

emmcrpojine same, (tlates IES TIN), cee sl. e i.e lee eee eee eon 4:

;— Descriptions of new operculated Landshells

belonging to the Genera Crapedotropis, Alyczus, and Diplom-

matina, from the Naga Hills and Assam (Plate IV),............... 7

iv List of Contributors.

Page

Gopwin-Avsten, H. H. ;—Wotes on the Geology of part of the Dafla és

Hills, Assam ; lately visited by the Force under Brigadier-

General Sta¥rorn, C. B., (Plates VI & IX), ..............0-00006 35

—————_______—— _ ;—The Evidence of past Glacial Action in

the Nago Halls, Assam (PlapesXe— Xe) ere ee eee eee 209

Kurz, 8. ;—Contributions towards a Knowledge of the Burmese Flora

(Part DD fe. coe..i1.. 00... 0 RRB E ee eer eee ono oer oe ae eee 128

;—Notes on a few new Oaks from India (Pl. XIV),............ 196

—— ;— Description of a new species of 'Tupistra from Tenasserim, 198

Nevin, G. & H. ;—Descriptions of new marine Mollusca from the

;—Descriptions of new Indian Plants (Pl. XV), .........00208 199

Indian ‘Oceanis: VIL &. Vela es ee ee 83

ScHwenpier. L. ;—On the General Theory of Duplex Telegraphy

(Woodcut) > .......... SReeeneeetees eeecee eee 2 ae rr 47

Warernouse, J. ;—Photography in connection with the observations

of the Transit of Venus at Roorkee, December 9th (Civil),

gC 2 Te ACER 3 0 300 ost tt REPRE E UREN oA oc. - 64

Woop-Mason, J. ;—On new or little-known species of Phasmide,

with a brief preliminary Notice of the Occurrence of a Clasping

Apparatus in the Males throughout the Family (Pls. XVI &

2-0 D) 5 cha nbo non compobonticd os ORME eee Sele ditv us hun oe tagcloge eee 215

Dates of issue of the different numbers of Journal, Part Lf, 1875.

No. I,—containing pp. 1—46, with pls. I—VI,—was issued on July 24th,

1875.

No. IJ,—containing pp. 47—112, with pls. VIL & VIII,—was issued

October 26th, 1875.

No. I11,—containing pp. 114—206, with pls. XIV & XV,—was issued

January 13th, 1876.

on

on

No. II (Continuation), containing pp. 207—220 and index, with pls. IX,

X, XI, XII, XIII, XVI & XVIT,—was issued on March 81st, 1876.

JOURNAL

OF THE

moe CS OCLETY.

—o—

.

Part II.—PHYSICAL SCIENCE.

No. I.—1878.

Oe eee»

I.—Descriptions of New Species of Mollusca of the genera Helix and

Glessula from the Khasi Hills and Munipur.-By Major H. H.

Gopvwry-Avstaen, &. &. G.S., F. Z. 8., Se.—Deputy Supt. Topgl.

Survey of India.

(Received Sept. ;—Read Nov. 4th, 1874.)

(With Plate I.)

The following shells were obtained in the above hills between the years

1868 and 1873, when I was employed in the survey of that tract of country ;

the work afforded opportunities of visiting almost every part and of bring-

ing together a very large collection of the land and freshwater shells, a

complete list of which I hope some day to draw up.

HELIX DELIBRATA, Bs., var. FascraTa, Plate I, Fig. 1.

Shell openly umbilicated, depressedly globose, rather solid, pale ochras

ceous epidermis ; spire slightly raised, in some specimens quite flat, very

prettily striped with brown concentric bands, one or two of which are

broader and more pronounced than the rest, especially on the base of shell ;

some specimens are ornamented with a single band only, last whorl

expanding towards aperture andslightly descending ; aperture sub-oblique,

circular, peristome thick, white, and reflected,

Major diam. 0°82, minor 0°67, alt. 0.38 in.

Hab.—On the high open grassy country of the West Khasi Hills.

True delibrata, Bs. unbanded, with flat spire, and a larger shell, is

also found in the Khasi Hills.

1

i)

H. H. Godwin-Austen—Desecriptions of New [eras

Hetix (NANINA) ATRICOLOR, n. sp., Plate I, Fig. 2.

Shell imperforate, depressedly conoid, very strong, colour varying from

rich bright brown to greenish ochre, pure brown or ochre near aperture, with

a glassy surface finely striated; spire flatly conoid, whorls 63, periphery

rounded, flat at base; aperture sub-oblique, broadly lunate, peristome

well thickened and slightly reflected near the columella.

Major diam. 0:93, minor 0°85, alt. 0°45 in.

Animal quite black throughout, tentacles long with the extremities

paler, extremity of foot short and glandular, as in Wanina decussata, Bs.

Hab.—On the higher parts of the North Cachar Hills, never seen to the

westward of that portion of the range, and tolerably abundant in certain

spots. ‘The colour of the animal is its most distinctive character, shells of

this group of Helices being very similar, and the characters of the animals

of great importance; I may mention as an instance LV. petrosa, Hutton,

found in damp ravines on limestone at Mussoorie, which has been con-

founded with other species and the animal of which is almost black; by this

character it is identified at once and is rendered a very good species.

Hetrx (Nantna) Suiswa, n. sp., Plate I, Fig. 3.

Shell depressedly turbinate, imperforate, exceedingly thin, brittle,

transparent, pale greenish horny, sharply keeled; whorls 5, ornamented

above with fine and even ribbing, quite smooth at base; aperture oblique,

semicircular, lip thin.

Major diam. 0°6, minor 0°51], alt. 0°3 in.

Hab.—Two specimens were found, the one at Moyong, north side of

the Khasi Hills, and the other at Nenglo, Naga Hills, in damp forest, but

such a fragile form would be probably abundant during the rainy season,

and like so many others only then to be seen.

Animal not seen, but in all probability is naninoid. In the plication of the

upper surface it is like WV. plicatula, W. Blf. (J. A.S. B., 1870, Vol. XXIX.)

a species the animal of which had not been observed at the time when the

shell was described. I now givea short description of it:—pale brown,

mottled very evenly with umber over the head and sides, a distinct line

of darker colour down the centre of back; tentacles rather thick at base,

moderately long gland at extremity of foot, which is rather truncate ;

length 1°25 inch.

GLESSULA ORTHOCERAS, n. sp., Plate I, Fig. 4.

Shell very slender and elongate, pale grey or white, very finely and

regularly ribbed throughout, very solid, apex blunt; whorls 13 to 14,

slightly rounded, suture well impressed ; aperture oblique, rounded below,

outer lip sharply edged and continued as a well developed callus upon the

strong thickened columellar margin.

Length 2°32, major diam. 0-4 in.

1875.] Species of Helix and Glessula. 3

Hab.—Abundant on the nummulitic limestone of the West Khasi

Hills, particularly near Nongumlai, where the finest specimens were

collected ; a smaller variety occurred on the peak of Laudomodo on gneiss,

and was not so solid. This species can be at once distinguished from

G. Casiaca, Bs. by its white colour and by the absence of the dark brown

epidermis that covers the latter ; the whorls also are much more rounded,

whereas in Casiaca they are nearly flat. It is very close to G. obtusa, W.

Blf., brought from Yunan by Dr. J. Anderson, but is altogether a larger

shell and differs in its general form.

Fine Glessula Casiaca, I only found to the eastward in the Naga Hills,

whence, I suspect, Griffith’s specimens were obtained and sent to Benson,

who imagined they were from the Khasi Hills.

GLESSULA ILLUSTRIS, n. sp., Plate I, Fig. 5.

Figured in ‘ Conchologia Indica’, Pl. 102, Fig. 9.

Shell elongately oval, greenish horny, finely striated longitudinally ;

_ whorls 7, very slightly rounded, suture moderately impressed, the lip

thickened, columellar margin slightly curved and strong, apex blunt.

Length 0°75, major diam. 0°3, length of aperture 0°3 in.

Hab.—Hengdan Peak, North Cachar Hills, at 7000 feet, in forest,

also near Nenglo at 6000 feet and in the Lukah Valley, Jaintia Hills, at

1000 feet.

This species is an elongate and larger form of Glessula eras-

silabris, Bs., of which G. pyramis is a closer variety ; but its much more

elongate form and stronger striation make it a good connecting species with

G. Butlert described further on. The form from the Lukah Valley is a

tumid departure from the type figured.

One specimen—alt. 0°75, major diam. 0°38 in.

Another ,, » 0°65 _ 0°35 a,

I look on all these species as properly varieties, and G. crassilabris,

very abundant in all the grass country of the Khasi Hills, may be taken

as the type; a difference in elevation and condition of habitat, from damp

dark forest to hot grassy slopes, having produced modifications of form.

GLESSULA BURRAILENSIS, n. sp., Plate I, Fig. 6.

Shell turreted, elongate, solid, in fresh state brown and lustrous, finely

longitudinally striated ; whorls 10, rather flat, suture shallow, apex blunt;

aperture sub-vertical, fusiform, angular above, peristome very thick, paler

brown on margin, columella strong.

Alt. 1°37, major diam, 0°4 in.

Hab.—The finest specimens were collected under the Peak of Khun-

ho, Hastern Burrail Range; they were also abundant under Japvo at about

7000 feet.

4 H. H. Godwin-Austen— Descriptions of [No. 1,

This species is an extremely elongate, solid form of the crassilabris

section of Glessula—and one of the most distinct.

GLEssuLA ButTiErt, n. sp., Plate I, Fig. 7.

Shell elongately turreted, very thin and brittle, tumid, pale corneous,

glassy, very minutely striated, apex very blunt; whorls 8, rather rounded,

suture deep, body whorl much swollen and capacious; aperture vertical,

pear-shaped, lip rather thin.

Alt. 1:18, major diam. 0°45 in.

Hab.— “astern Burrail Range at 6000 feet—not a common form.

I name this shell after Captain J. Butler, Political Agent in the Naga

Hills, with whom I had the pleasure of being associated when mapping

that very interesting and beautiful district.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE T.

Fig. 1. Helix delibrata, var. fasciata.

» 2 HH. (Nanina) atricolor.

oy Bo op 0 Shisha.

5» 4. Glessula orthoceras.

op) Bp " illustris.

5 & 0 Burrailensis.

sith ‘p Butleri.

I1.—Descriptions of four New Species of Mollusca belonging to the family

Zonitide from the N. HE. Frontier of Bengal, with drawings of Heli-

carion gigas, Benson and of a variety of the same-——By Major H. H.

Gopwin-Ausren, F. hk. G.S., F. Z. S., Sc., Deputy Superintendent

of the Topographical Survey of India.

(Received Sept. 1874,—Read January 6th, 1875.)

(With Plates II—III.)

HELICARION SHILLONGENSE, n. sp.

Animal ochre colour, the mantle being slightly paler than the rest of

the body, there is no longitudinal streaking on the side of the foot, which,

viewed under a lens, is covered with minute protuberances evenly distributed ;

foot beneath dull ochre brown.

Shell horny, thin, long and narrow, pale green in colour. (Plate IT,

Fig. 1a).

Length 0:9”, diam. 0°28.”

The dimensions of these creatures are not so easily taken, the different

parts expanding and contracting alternately.

= »

1875.] New Species of Zonitide. 5

Extremity of foot to posterior end of the mantle,.... 1:9 inch.

Wooo eaeee eee ee nice semecceece sche ieesee css vo sMedbonnsssseces 15

Anterior end of mantle to head,.......... seccsseee.., O'9FD

Total, 4:3

[TURES Ao Abanesccdoenoncncogneaes on ere creee sects Ora

HELIcARION SHILLONGENSE, var., Plate II, Fig. 1.

Animal dark umber brown, body concolorous, the mantle a shade light-

er, nearly covering the shell in both varieties, the foot beneath is ash-colour-

ed; when taken fresh there is a slight indentation at the anterior edge of

the mantle (vide fig.). Shell as in fig. 1 a.

Extremity of foot to posterior edge of mantle, ... 1:70 inch.

IW LTINEIO» tenes end aga EEE MAReon oA uec nem ccc oie eemmemmame ark 0)

Anterior end of mantle to head, ..... oogeetenecses 0:95

Total, 4°35

Bye benbacless\ weesessc- nose Suid cod boddoe sovooneDcooO0Gd 0°45

Hab.—Shillong and North Khasi Hills. Both these forms are near

H. Theobaldi, but may be distinguished at once by the absence of the

white stripe on the edge of the left lobe of the mantle, and by the longer

form of the shell. The tentacles are longer than in H. brunnewm.

HELICARION BRUNNEUM, n. sp., Plate II, Fig. 2.

Animal a rich brown, mottled on the mantle with dark sepia, dis-

tinctly marked with parallel streaks, that extend from a zigzag line run-

ning along the side of foot, the margin of which is edged below with a series

of short parallel markings ; foot beneath dark ochre. Large portion of shell

exposed, which is of same form as that of H. Shillongense.

Dimensions when fully extended :

Extremity of foot to posterior end of mantle,...... 15 inch.

Uhr bles pre ereicti cece cutels siistatsiaiscic es daio.e.«'» gmMbeRe nea uise eis 1°6

Anterior end of mantle to head, ..........2..csse0eee 0:47

Total, 3:57

TDA TREIMURICIER,, “orn cho boopeaccocne LOnPAMeD cavococonacubediy «Ons

BSE AMG EO MD OU Va iierclcccioscs 2 ceieisiete« «ote eonieel oe. 0°56

Hab.—Shillong, Khasi Hills, in grassy localities.

HELICARION NAGAENSE, n. sp., Plate II, Fig. 3.

Animal ochre colour, prettily mottled and dotted with a darker shade

of the same, the mantle covers nearly the whole shell ; a narrow white line,

commencing near the posterior margin of the slit disclosing the shell, ex-

tends round towards the respiratory orifice on the right hand side, and in

s

6 H. H. Godwin-Austen—Descriptions of New [No. 1,

front another line curves round to the left anterior side (fig. 3b). Mucous

gland as in H. gigas. Length about 3 inches.

Shell ovate, exceedingly thin and brittle (fig. 3).

Major diam. 0°90, minor 0°55 in,

PARMARION ? RUBRUM, n. sp., Plate II, Fig. 4.

Animal of a fine orange pink, grey on under side of the foot; tenta-

cles short, mantle entirely covering the shell, with only a slight trace of a

longitudinal opening running back from the anterior left side, three paral-

lel bands of greenish grey along the back of the neck, the eye-tentacles

being of thesame colour. The gland at extremity of foot with a long, over-

hanging lobe,

Extremity of foot to posterior end of mantle, ...... 0.9 inch.

Miamitles \occchctcecattie ey oo:0 6 > aR ER REC EER eae en none ermal) es

Anteriorside mantle to: headteasses.- oes ee oe eeeeeeeeee 6 Os

Motalleng th when) moving: | Meeeeernss senor esse sees 18

Shell quite rudimentary, minute, granular (fig. 40).

Major diam. 0°14 in.

Hab.—Kohima, Naga Hills, in brushwood.

The mucous gland in this species differs considerably from that of

Helicarion gigas and its allies, the upper lobe projecting and hanging over

so as to present, when viewed sideways, a narrow horizontal slit.

HELICARION soLIDUM, Godwin-Austen, Plate II, Fig. 5.

When this species was first brought to notice by me in the P. Z. &.,

1872, Plate XXX, the animal had never been observed. It has the form

of Shillongense, &c., and a specimen from Kohima was dark umber, pinker

below, with no mottling on the body ; tentacles dark.

In another specimen from the Dunsiri valley, Assam, the animal was

pinkish grey with dark mottling, the mantle covered the whole shell and had a

slight indentation on the extreme anterior margin ; the mucous gland with

small lobe above, the extremity of foot cut off rather square.

Total length 2°70, mantle 1-3, mantle to head 0°5 in.

Shell—major diam. 0°44 in. (fig. 5).

The specimen from this locality may be young, but the shell is so

similar in form to H. solidum, first observed on the peak of Hengdan, Muni-

pur frontier, that I have not separated it.

HELICARION GIGAS, Benson, small var.

I found that typical gigas, originally described from Teria Ghat at

base of the Khasi Hills, was replaced on the Burrail Range, by the

form a drawing of which, together with one of H. gigas, I give on Plate IIT.

Dese.—Animal dark ochre brown with very dark mottlings, particularly

distinct upon the margin of the foot,

1875.] Species of Operculated Land-Shells. 7

Shell—major diam. 0°85, minor 0°56 in.

Helicarion gigas was described by Benson as Vetrina in J. A. S. B.,

Vol. V, p. 850.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Prate II.

Fig. 1. Helicarion Shillongense, var. 1a. Shell of ditto.

2. > brunneum.

3.

5 Nagaense. 3a. Animal: mantle, side view. 30. Mantle from

above. 3c. Mucous gland.

4, 4a. Parmarion ? rubrum. 4b. Shell of ditto. 4c. Extremity of foot. 4d.

Head withdrawn below mantle. 4e. Mantle from above.

5. Helicarion solidum, G-A., shell. 5a. Mantle from above. 55. Mantle,

side view. 5c. Mucous gland. 5d. Extremity of foot.

Proate III,

1. Helicarion gigas, Bs., nat. size.

¢ small var. oF

SO OSES EES

III.—Deseriptions of New Operculated Landshells belonging to the genera

Craspedotropis, Alyceeus, and Diplommatina, from the Naga Hills and

Assam.— By Major YH. H. Gopwin-Avsten, #. Rk. G.S., &. Z. 8., Se.

(Received Sept. 1874 ;—Read February 3rd, 1875).

(With Plate IV).

CRASPEDOTROPIS FIMBRIATUS, n. sp.. Plate IV, Fig. 1.

Shell conoidly turbinate, closely umbilicated, thin, covered with a rough

dark brown epidermis, longitudinally striate, a leaf-like fringe adorns the

periphery of the last whorl, spire conoid, its side concave, apex attenuate,

blunt, suture deep; whorls 5, flat above, aperture diagonal, circular,

the lip slightly reflected, peristome thin. Operculum multispiral, flat,

smooth on outer surface. Animal not seen.

Major diam. 0°19, alt. 0°15 in.

Hab.—Hengdan Peak, Naga Hills, at 7,000 ft., in forest.

Only one specimen was obtained. This is a very interesting shell, as

‘being the first of the genus from this part of India; Craspedotropis, esta-

8 H. H. Godwin-Austen—Descriptions of New [No. 1,

blished by Mr. W. T. Blanford, having been hitherto only known from the

hills of Southern India and represented by C. cuspidatus, Bs., the fringe on

the keel of which is however hairy. Colonel Beddome has, I believe, dis-

covered one or two other new forms.

ALYCHUS SCULPTURUS, n. sp.. Plate IV, Fig. 2.

Shell closely umbilicated, turbinate, horny or grey, with distant well-

marked costulation on the upper whorls, smooth below, finely ribbed on

swollen part of whorl, still more finely on the constricted portion, spire sub-

conoid ; whorls 4, the last slightly swollen, then constricted and slightly

swelling again towards the peristome, which is longitudinally undulated;

sutural tube moderate, aperture oblique, waved, peristome thickened,

expanded a little, double, with four deep undulationson the outer margin

and one less developed on the lower, the first undulation forming a deep

notch in the peristome near its junction with the last whorl. Operculum as

in A. crispatus, mihi.

Major diam. 0-14, minor diam. 0°10, alt. 0°08, diam. of aper. 0-06,

sutural tube, 0°55 in.

Hab.—Obtained by me on the hill ranges from near Tellizo Peak

to the eastward, and on Mungching Hillin Munipur. Abundant.

This species is very close to A. erispatus, G-A. from the Khasi and

Jaintia Hills (J. A.S. B., Vol. XL, Pl. IV, fig. 1), but is a much more closely

wound shell—a character which, when a large series of the two were placed

side by side, was found to be constant, and this, with the absence of the

ridge on the constriction, marks it as distinct. A. sewlptilis, Bs., origi-

nally described from Burmah, and of which I collected identical specimens in

Munipur, is another form near to sculpturus, but has no crenulation of

the peristome and is plain and ridgeless on the constriction; the three

forms pass into one another.

DiptomMatTina Burtit, n. sp., Plate IV, Fig. 4.

Shell dextral, tumidly and ovately fusiform, colour pale umber or sienna-

brown, very finely and closely costulated under lens, almost smooth to the

naked eye, spire rapidly attenuate, apex sharp, suture well impressed

below; whorls 8, the three last swollen and rounded, those near apex

flat, penuitimate the largest, the last rising slightly towards the aperture,

which is vertical, broad, and well rounded below, peristome double, very

thick, continuous, columellar tooth strong.

Hab.—Base of the Eastern Himalaya, at the debouchement of the Bur-

rowli River, Assam, where it was collected by Mr. J. Burt, after whom I have

named it, and who kindly collected some other interesting shells in the

same locality.

It is a form of the type D. diplocheilus, Bs., but the peculiar attenuate

spire and tumid shape below are very distinctive.

1875. ] Species of Operculated Land- Shells. 9

DIPLOMMATINA SHERFAIENSIS, var., Plate IV, Fig. 5.

A form similar to that from the Peak of Sherfaisip, North Cachar |

Hills, described in J. A. S. B., Vol. XX XTX, 1870, p. 3, and differing from it

only in its much more tumidly fusiform shape and larger size.

Alt. 0°14, diam. 0:09 in.

It was very abundant on the Peak of Japvo at 10,000 ft., and shews an

interesting divergence from the form found at the highest elevation of the

same range further west. On the Peak of Shiroifurar at an equal altitude

but 40 miles to the south-east, the form, with the same essential characters,

had again changed into a still larger and more solid shell with a more acu-

minate spire, yet the differences from the original type are not sufficient

on which to found a new species.

DIPLOMMATINA TUMIDA, var., Plate IV, Fig. 7.

Shell elongately fusiform, thin, pale yellowish green, sculpture very

faint above, quite smooth on the 3 last whorls, spire attenuate, sides flat,

suture moderate; whorls 85 to 9, the antepenultimate the largest, con-

striction in front, above the aperture, last whorl ascends slightly ; aper-

ture oval, vertical, peristome double, thickened, slightly reflected, columellar

tooth small and remote.

Alt..0°22, diam. 013 in.

Hab.—Kézakenomih, Naga Hills. This shell is a better type of

this form of Diplommatina than the very tumid shell first described from

_ Asalu; the form changes much in different localities, in some being much

more solid and more distinctly and distantly sculptured near the apex; a

_ variety from the Hastern Burrailis 0°20” in alt., rich dark amber coloured,

has the 3 lower whorls smooth and glassy, the columellar tooth still more

remote, and the constriction just behind the peristome; it departs so

widely from the original type that it might almost be separated. Accurate

drawings ofa series of specimens are requisite to shew these gradual changes,

and these I hope to be able to give hereafter.

DIPLOMMATINA CONVOLUTA, n. sp., Plate IV, Fig. 8.

Shell dextral, elongately fusiform, solid, pale yellowish or greenish

horny, very finely costulated towards the apex, 2 last whorls smooth,

striated near the aperture, spire with rather flattened sides, suture im-

pressed; whorls 8, antepenultimate the largest, the penultimate constricted

at = turn behind the peristome, the last ascends very sharply, contracting

the breadth of the penultimate very considerably ; aperture sub-vertical,

lying to the right of the axis, peristome circular, solid, double, the tooth

small and situated far within the columellar margin, lip scarcely reflected,

Animal not seen.

Alt. 0°25, diam, 0°15 in,

2

10 Fraser—On a partially ossified Nasal Septum [No. 1,

Hab.—Slopes of the Eastern Burrail at about 6,000 ft., tolerably

abundant.

A very near ally of D. Jatingana, G-A., from which it is readily dis-

tinguishable by the situation and reduced size of the columellar process,

its elongate flat-sided form, and very different sculpture.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE TY.

Craspedotropis fimbriata, With magnified drawing of the leaf-like fringe.

Alyceus sculpturus.

5, erispatus (basal side).

Diplommatina Burti.

0 Sherfaiensis, var.

~) twmida, type form.

” oy) var.

” convoluta.

OrvaToDar © NH eH

acids puulletoa oud cima inate aiite

IV.—Wote on a partially ossified Nasal Septwm in Rhinoceros Sondaicus.

By O. L. FRASER.

(Received 1874 ;—Read March 3rd, 18735.)

(With Plate V.)

Whilst cleaning the skull of a Rhinoceros Sondaicus lately obtained by

me in the Sunderbuns, I was much surprised to find a partially ossified

septum nariwm—a structure which I had hitherto looked upon as solely

characteristic of the fossil Rhinoceros and for any mention of which in a

recent species I have looked in vain ; indeed Cuvier (Oss. foss. Vol. 2, p. 26,)

distinctly states that no such thing occurs in the recent ones.

The specimen in question was a female 5 feet 6 in. high and, though a

fully adult one (as the size of a foetus she was carrying proved), from the

unworn condition of her teeth she certainly was not old, so that the ossi«

fication could not be merely the result of age, as is so very often the case

with the cartilages and even the tendons of mammals, birds, &e,

On looking at some other skulls, I found in two old specimens (one from

Java, and the other the locality of which is unknown) traces of where such

a structure might have been but had been destroyed either in cleaning or

in some other way. In a third (not so old as the two preceding but still

an older one than mine) there is distinct evidence of an exactly similar

formation to that I am about to describe, though the anterior bone has

been lost and part of the posterior portion broken away ; this specimen

was also from the Sunderbuns.

In some 6 or 7 skulls of R. indicus that I examined there was not the

slightest indication of it, the vomer being quite distinct, and there being no

roughened articulating surface on the inner side of the nasals.

1875.] mm Rhinoceros Sondaicus. 11

In the first mentioned ¢ specimen, the septum, commencing from the

ethmoid, is ossified for about 3 inches ; it then divides, the lower portion

running to within 5} in. of the maxillo-premaxillary articulation and being

intimately connected with the vomer, along whose channel it runs, the

upper portion forming a fringe about an inch deep along the inner surface

of the conjoined nasal bones (to which it is ankylosed) to within 52 in. of

their tip (the curved upper walls of the nasal cartilages being also com-

pletely ossifed and ankylosed to the inner surface of the nasals and

maxillaries for the same distance); here there is a break and the bone is

perfectly smooth for a space of 2 inches, when there commences a diamond

shaped roughened surface, which occupies the whole of the remaining 33 in. of

the inner side of the nasals, and on this was articulated the ossified ter=

mination of the nasal cartilaze. This is of subtriangular form and

consists of a plate of bone 3% in. long, about 13 deep, and 4 thick. . Its upper

edge is expanded laterally to a width (in its greatest measurement) of 17 in.,

and forms a deep sulcus, into which the tip of the nasals and the roughened

articular surface of their underside fit. The anterior edge of this bone

is slightly in advance of the tip of the nasals and is 1} in. in advance of the

anterior point of the premaxille, between which point and the lower edge

of the septal bone there is a distance of one inch.

I have since seen the skulls of two other specimens shot at the same place,

the one an adult and the other a younger g This structure was present

in both.

As can be seen from the accompanying drawing, it bears a strong resem-

blance to the figure given by Prof. Owen (in his Hist. of Brit. Foss. Mamm.)

of R. leptorhinus. There is this difference that in &. leptorhinus the

ossified terminal portion of the septum is ankylosed to the nasals, whilst

in &. Sondaicus it is not. This, however, might take place at a more

advanced age, as, in a foot-note to p. 867, he mentions that the bony septum

of Ff. ticorhinus is free until the animal has quite attained maturity.

Judging, however, from the old skulls of Sondaicus before mentioned, I should

not think that it would do so, or it would still remain 2m situ in those

skulls. Again, Prof. Owen speaks of the edges of the septum of leptorhinus

as being complete, whereas in sondaicus they are not. They bear distinct

marks of the insertion of the posterior cartilage, thus leading one to think

that, even if it did not ankylose to the nasals, it might in a very old ani-

mal become a completely ossified septum.

Prof. Owen also (Anat. of Vertebrates, Vol. III, p. 356) regards the cloison

in Rh. tichorinus as indicative of the great development of the horns

in that species, but in Rh. sondaicus the horn is small (5 or 6 iuches as a

rule and never exceeding a foot or 18 inches) in the male, and what is very

peculiar, the female has no horn whatever. I do not know of any other

12 W. T. Blanford—On the Scientific Names of [No. 1,

Rhinoceros in which this is the case; asin Rh. indicus, as well as the double-

horned species with which I am acquainted, the female carries a horn

or horns, though they are generally smaller than in the male.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE J.

Fig. 1. Side view of the skull with the terminal ossification (*) i situ.

» 2+ Section of the skull showing the posterior ossification (**)

» 98. Inner or under view of the conjoined nasal bones showing (a) the

anterior. termination of the upper fringe with the ossified nasal cartilages (b. c.) and

(d) the roughened articular surface for the terminal bone.

» 4. Front view of the tip of the nasals with the terminal bone 7 situ.

» 0. Front view of the bone disconnected.

», 6. Upper or articular surface of ditto.

V.—On the Scientific Names of the Sind “ Ibex,” the Markhor, and the

Indian Antelope.—By W. T. Branrorp, &. &. S., & GS.

(Received 27th May,—Read June 2nd, 1875.)

In the Proceedings of the Asiatic Society for December last, p. 240,

Mr. Hume proposed the names of Capra Blythi for the Sind wild goat or

ibex, and Capra Jerdoni for the Suliman variety of the Markhor. The

former animal is only incidentally mentioned in Jerdon’s Mammals of In-

dia, p. 293, and then it is called Capra Caucasica.* The two forms of Mar-

khor inhabiting Kashmir and Afghanistan are mentioned by Jerdon, but

very briefly. As the idea is prevalent in India that neither the Sind

goat nor the Suliman Markhor are known to naturalists, I think it may be

useful to shew that this view is erroneous, and that neither animal requires

a new scientific name.

To take the Sind “ibex”’ first. This animal is, I think, clearly identi-

eal with the wild goat of Persia, Armenia and the Caucasus, and probably

of Crete. There is another wild caprine animal in the Caucasus, more near-

ly allied to the Alpine and Central Asian species of ibex, and this animal

is the true Capra Caucasica. The wild goat of Persia and Sind has long

been known throughout the civilized world as the source of the genuine

bezoar,t so greatly famed in former times for its supposed virtue as an

antidote to poison.

* Tt should be borne in mind that the Sind goat does not occur east of the river

Indus, which was adopted by Dr. Jerdon, in the Prospectus published at the commence-

ment of his “ Birds of India,’”’ as the western boundary of the Indian fauna.

+ This word is Persian, or rather, a corruption of the Persian pdzahr, which again

is derived from fd-zahr, useful or profitable (against) poison.

ei.) or

1875. ] some Indian Ruminants. 13

By many old writers, however, it was supposed that the bezoar was

procured from a kind of antelope, and Linnzus confounded the wild goat

of Persia, the Pd-sang (rock-footed), with the Persian gazelle, the horns

of which apparently were described by him as those of his Capra bezoartica.

The first author who gave a clear account of the bezoar goat was S. G.

Gmelin, frequently called the younger Gmelin, who obtained a specimen ~

in the Elburz mountains of Northern Persia close to the southern coast of

the Caspian Sea. He, however, erroneously stated that the females have

no horns. A head and horns procured by Gmelin were sent to St. Peters-

burg and carefully described and figured under the name of Aigagrus by

Pallas in his Spicilegia Zoologica, Fasc. xi, pp. 43-49, tab. v, fig. 2, 3,

published in 1776. In this paper, which contains a description of Capra

Sibirica (or as Pallas terms it Ibex alpium Sibiricarum), Pallas points out

that the Agagrus is the apparent progenitor, in part at least, of the domestic

goat, a view which has been generally admitted. Indeed Gmelin in the 13th

edition of the Systema Nature united the tame goat, Capra hircus, L., with

the 4yagrus of Pallas, under the name of Capra egagrus.

Schreber and other writers did little more than adopt the name Capra

egagrus and copy Pallas’s description and figures, which were repeated with

an additional representation of the skull and horn-cores in Pallas’s Zoogra-

phia Rosso-Asiatica. The only difference shewn by these figures from the

ordinary horns of the Sind ibex is that, in the head figured by Pallas, the

horns are slightly curved towards each other near the tips, which is not

the case in most Sind specimens. But any one who has studied ruminants

knows that trifling variations of this kind occur, and that the difference is

of no importance is shewn by Hutton’s remarking* that, out of five pairs

of horns in his possession, three were curved towards each other near the

tips, and two were not. He also says} that some horns (of C. egagrus) are

turned inwards, others outwards, at the extremities. I think there can be

no reasonable doubt but that the Sind ibex is identical with C. egagrus.

It is quite unnecessary to enter further into the accounts of the animal

in various Huropean works beyond pointing out the confusion which has

arisen about its name, and which has doubtless been the cause of its now

receiving an additional synonym.

In the first Mammalian Catalogue published by the British Museum,

the ‘List of the specimens of Mammalia’ issued in 1842, the name Capra

e@gagrus does not appear, but certain specimens, which are referred to Capra

Caucasica, are said to be those described by Col. Hamilton Smith, who was

one of the editors of Griffith’s translation of Cuvier’s ‘ Animal Kingdom’.

The references in the British Museum list under C. Cawcasica are; first :

* Calcutta Jour. Nat. Hist. IL., p, 541, + Ibid. p. 528,

14 W. T. Blanford—On the Scientific Names of [No. 1,

Gildenstadt, Act. Petrop. 1779, t. 16-17; second: H. Smith, Griffith, A.

K. V. 871. The first is the original description of Capra Caucasica, an

animal differing widely from C. egagrus, and having massive horns not

aneulate in front. ‘To the second I shall refer immediately.

In the next British Museum Catalogue, that of the Ungulata Furci-

peda published in 1852, p. 153, the Capra Caucasica of the former catalogue

is placed as a synonym under Hircus egagrus, under which name both the

egagrus of Pallas and the tame goat, Capra lircus of Linnzus, are included,

as they were by Gmelin, and again reference is made to Col. Hamilton

Smith’s description in Griffith’s Animal Kingdom. It thus appears that

Dr. Gray, the author of both British Museum catalogues, attributes the

mistake about the name to Col. Hamilton Smith. But on turning to

Griffith’s Animal Kingdom, V, p. 357, I find No. 870, Capra Caucasica de-

seribed as having “the horns triangular, the anterior edge obtuse, irregularly -

marked with transverse knots and uniform wrinkles,” while C- agagrus is

quite correctly said to have the “ horns forming an acute angle to the front,

rounded at the back, transversely ribbed, forming an undulating anterior

edge.”’ It appears to me that the species were correctly discriminated by

the older writer, and that the mistake of confounding them is Dr. Gray’s.

Dr. Adams obtained the name C. Caucasica from the British Museum,

and thus misled Jerdon, who, it may be seen, mentions in his Mammals, p.

292, that Capra egagrus is found in Persia and other parts of Central and

Western Asia; whilst on Adams’s authority, though evidently with some

doubt, he refers the wild goat of Sind and Baluchistan to C. Caueasica.

The synonymy given below will shew the confusion which has existed

at the British Museum as to the name of this species. It figures by

turns as Capra Caucasica, C. hircus, Hircus egagrus, and if I am not mis-

taken Hircus gazella. Part of this confusion is I think due to the cireum-

stance that Dr. Gray apparently looked upon the horns of C. egagrus as

those of a tame or feral race, and consequently united them with various

tame goats. I have shewn that the wild C. egagrus was united to the

tame C. hircus by Gmelin, and the same author apparently mixed up half

a dozen animals, one of which was the bezoar goat of Persia, in his Antilope

gazella.*

Indian naturalists of a former generation were better acquainted with

the wild goat of Western Asia than Dr. Gray appears to have been. The first

mention that I can find of the existence of Capra egagrus in the neighbour-

hood of India is in a paper by Captain Hutton published in the Caleutta

Journal of Natural History for 1842, where the animal is correctly named,

and an excellent description given of its colour at different seasons, its

appearance and habits. The accompanying figure is not good, Captain

* Capra gazella of Linneeus is, I believe, the Cape Oryx.

g D ? I )

1875.] some Indian Ruminants. 15

Hutton also relates the success of some experiments made by him as to the

effect of crossing the wild Capra egagrus with tame goats, but he is dis-

inclined to believe that the former is really identical in species with the

latter. In Hutton’s ‘ Rough notes on the Mammals of Candahar’ in the

Journal of the Society for 1846, he only refers to his previous description,

and mentions the final result of his experiments in breeding between

C. egagrus and tame goats. The same animal apparently was obtained

by Sir A. Burnes in Cabool, and was described by Dr. Lord in Appendix V

to Burnes’s work on that country, p. 386. He speaks of it as the Markhor-

Pazuhu; the (latter word being perhaps a corruption of Pasang,) and notices

that itis probably Capra egagrus. A pair of horns obtained by Sir A,

Burnes and named C. egagrus by Blyth is in the Asiatic Society’s collection,

now the Indian Museum.

The following synonymy will enable any one to examine the history

of the animal more fully: other references might be given, but the greater

portion of them will be found quoted by the authors named. A most

elaborate account of the habits of this animal in the Caucasus is given by

Kotschy (1. c.).

Capra moacRus.—Zhe Pdsang or Persian wild goat.

S. G. Gmelin, Reise. IIT., p. 493.

Aigagrus, Pallas, Spic. Zool. Fasc. XI, p. 48, Tab. V. fig. 2, 3, (1776).

Caucasan, Pennant, hist. quad. No. 14, p. 61.

Antilope gazella, Gmel., Syst. Nat. I, p. 190, partim, nec Capra gazella, L.

Oapra egagrus, Gmel., Syst. Nat. I, p. 193, partim.

Aigoceros egagrus, Pall. Zool. Ros. As. I, p. 226, Tab. XVI, fig. 3, 4, 5.

Capra egagrus, Schreb. Saugth. V, p. 1266, Pl. CCLX XXII.

igoceros egagrus, Wagner, in Schreb. Saugth. V, 1, p. 1315.—Ib. Suppl. Pt. IV,

p. 502.

Markhor-Pazuhu, Burnes, Cabool, p. 386, (1842).

Capra egagrus, Hutton, Calcutta Jour. Nat. Hist. 1842, II, p. 521, Pl. XTX, (a poor

figure of the whole animal).—J. A. 8. B., XV, p. 161.

Capra Caucasica, Gray, List. Mam. Brit. Mus. (1843) p. 167.—Adams P. Z. 8S. 1858,

p. 525; Wanderings of a naturalist, p. 36.

Hircus egagrus, Gray, Cat. Ungulata Furcipeda Brit. Mus. (1852), p. 153, partim.—

Cat. Rum. Mam. (1872), p. 538, partim.

Capra hircus, Gray, Cat. Ungulata Fure. Pl. XX, fig. 1, 2, (horns).

Capra egagrus, Kotschy, Verh. Zool. Bot. Ver. Wien, IV, 1854, p. 201.—Blasius,

Saugth. Deutschl. p. 485, fig. 264, (skull and horns).

2 Hircus gazella, Gray, Cat. Rum. Mam. p. 53, partim.

Capra egagrus, Blyth, Cat. Mam. Mus. As. Soc., p. 176. No. 544, (1868).

Capra Blythi, Hume, Proc. As. Soc. 1874, p. 240.

Pasang, male, Boz, female, Persian; Borz, Afghan; Zer (male) and Sera, Sindhi;

Phashin, Baluchi,

16 W. T. Blanford—On the Scientific Names of [ Notas

I now turn to the Markhor. ‘The first description of this animal was

given by Wagner, under the name of Aigoceros (Capra) Kalconeri, Hiigel,

and I may here remark that this name, given in honour of one of the most

eminent of Indian naturalists, must be adopted for this wild goat, as it has

priority by 8 years over Hutton’s name Capra megaceros ; Wagner's descrip-

tion having appeared in 1839 in the ‘* Gelehrte Anzeigen’ of Munich. The

skin and horns described were obtained by Freiherr v, Hiigel from Kashmir.

The animal was figured and again described in Wagner’s appendix to

Hiigel’s Kashmir, and both figure and description were repeated in the

snpplement to Schreber’s Siugethiere by the same author. The references

are given at full in the synonymy below. ‘The horns of the typical specimen

have an unusually open spiral curve.* ,

Captain Hutton in 1842, described the ‘Markhore’ or the ‘ Snake-

eater’ of the Afghans, under the name of Capra megaceros, in the Calcutta

Journal of Natural History, and gave a figure of the skull and horns. ‘The

form here figured is the Afghan variety, in which the spiral is so slight

that the horns approach a straight line. This is the race for which Mr.

Hume has proposed the name of C. Jerdoni,t but it is clear that if this

animal be considered specifically distinct from the Kashmir C. Fulconeri,

Hutton’s name must be retained for it. The same name C. megaceros was

subsequently given by Cunningham in 1854, (Ladak p. 200), to the

Kashmir form, but the author was under the impression. that the animal

was undescribed, and was unacquainted with either Hiigel’s or Hutton’s

name. :

The most important question, however, is whether the Kashmir and

Suliman forms of the Markhor are specifically distinct. At first it appears

difficult to believe that animals belonging to the same species have in some

instances horns with the open spiral of a corkscrew, and in others straight

horns with only a deep spiral groove. As Mr. Blyth justly says{, the horns

vary in curve as much as those of the Koodoo do from those of the Impoofo

(or Eland). But on the other hand it should be remembered not only that

both forms of horns have long been perfectly well known to naturalists, but

* So different are these horns from those of most Markhor, that some naturalists

have “supposed them to have been obtaimed from a tame goat. But as has been shewn

by Blyth, the spiral in tame goats is always reversed, the anterior ridge just above the

forehead turning inwards or towards the other horn at first. Im the Markhor this

ridge turns outwards. Judged by this test Wagner’s figure represents a wild Markhor

and not a game goat. I have never myself seen Markhor horns with so open a spizal

as those of Hugel’s type of C. Falconert.

+ It is probable that Mr. Hume’s specimens may have been less spiral in form than

Hutton’s type, for the former are described as resembling an ordinary screw. But as

I shall shew, the precise form of the horns varies greatly.

¢ P. Z. 8. 1840, p. 80.

1875.] some Indian Ruminants. £7

that there are large numbers of them in Europe. Blyth, who was certainly

not disposed to unite distinguishable forms, was well acquainted with both

races, so were Gray, Jerdon, and Adams, yet every one of these naturalists

looked upon the different forms of horn as of no specific importance, no

other difference having been shewn to exist in the animal, and the form of

the horns varying in each locality. There was a living male from near

Peshawar recently (and there may be still) in the gardens of the Zoological

Society of London with very straight horns, differing, if my recollection

is correct, from the type of C. megaceros of Hutton, almost as much as this

does from the Kashmir race, and on a photograph published by Mr. E.

Ward, four distinct forms of Markhor horns are represented. Hutton in

his original description of C. megaceros says, ‘‘ They (the horns) are spiral-

ly twisted but differ much in the closeness of the volutions, some turning

round a straight and direct axis from the base to the apex, others taking

a wider or more circular sweep.’’ Indeed so notorious is the fact that

these horns vary in curvature, that Blyth for a long time looked upon the

animal as a feral race of tame goat and not a truly wild animal*, and Vigne,

who met with the Markhor both in Afghanistan and Kashmir, and who

noticed the difference in the horns, pointed out that no other distinction

existed in the animal.

Asin the ease of Capra egagrus I give the synonymy below. In this

‘I do not separate the two forms, because, so far as I am aware, no sufficient

evidence has yet been adduced to shew that they deserve separation. But

should such evidence hereafter be brought forward, I may repeat that the

name Capra Falconeri will stand for the Kashmir form with openly spiral

horns, and that of C. megaceros for the Suliman race with the horns more

nearly approaching a straight line; it being remembered that much

variation exists in both cases.

Capra Fatconert.—The Markhor.

Warkhor goat, Vigne, Personal Narrative of a visit to Ghuzni, Cabul, &c. p. 86, and

vignette, p. 67.—Travels in Kashmir, &c., II., p. 279.

Aigoceros (Capra) Falconeri, Hiigel: Wagner, Miinch. Gel. Anz. IX, p. 430 (1839).

Warkbur, Blyth P. Z. S. 1840, p. 80.—Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. VII. 1841, p. 196,

note.

2 Rass, Wood, Journey to source of the Oxus, p. 369 (1841).

Markhor, Burnes, Cabool, p. 387 (1842).

Capra megaceros, Hutton, Calcutta Jour. Nat. Hist. II, p. 535, Pl. XX, (horns), (1842).

JeA Ss. Be XV. p. 161.

Capra Falconeri, Higel; Wagner, Beitrage zur Saugeth. Faun. in Hiigel’s Kaschmir,

p- 579, (with a lithograph of the animal), (1844).

Aigoceros Falconerit, Wagner, Schreber’s Saugethiere, Suppl. IV, p. 499, Tab.

CCLXXXVII E,—I». V, p. 466.

* P, ZS, 1840, p. 80.

18 W. T. Blanford—On the Scientific Names of [No. 1,

Hircus egagrus, var. 1. Gray, Cat. Ung. Fure. B. M. (1852), p 159.

Capra megaceyos, Rapho-chhe, (Markhor) or large wild goat. Cunningham’s Ladak,

p. 199, Pl. 17, (1854).

Hircus megaceros, Adams, P. Z. 8., 1858, p. 525.

Capra megaceros, Blyth, Cat. Mam. Mus. A. S., p. 176 (1863).—Jerdon, Mammals of

India, p. 291 (1867). *

Hircus Falconeri, Gray, Cat. Rum. Mam. B. M. 1872, p. 53.

Capra Jerdoni, Hume, Proc. A. 8. B. 1874, p. 240.

Markhor, Afghan: Ra-che, (Rawa-che and Rapho-che ¢ and 9), Ladak.

I have already referred to the Capra bezoartica of Linnzus. ‘This

was founded on the various accounts of the bezoar goat given by older

writers, amongst whom was Aldrovandi. Blyth has derived the specific

name bezoartica, which he adopts* for the common Indian antelope, from

Aldrovandi, and Jerdony has followed Blyth in this as in most questions of

mammalian nomenclature, so that in both lists this animal stands as Anfi-

lope bezoartica, Aldrovandi.

Now there is no rule more generally admitted, amongst English zoologists

at least, than that specific names given before the publication of the 12th

edition of Linneeus’s Systema Nature in 1766 are inyalid.{ Aldrovandi§

dates from 1621.

* Cat. Mam. Mus. As. Soc. p. 171, No. 528.

t+ Mam. Ind. p. 275, No. 228.

{ Unless there is agreement amongst naturalists as to the adoption of rules for

nomenclature, it is evident that the sole object of a scientific terminology, that all peo-

ple of whatever race, despite difference of language, should employ the same term for

the same animal, plant, mineral, &c., would not be gained. Any one would suppose

that this is a self-evident proposition and that it is to the advantage of all naturalists to

agree to fixed rules of nomenclature, but, strange to say, it is incredibly difficult to

induce many to consent to any rules. So long as the absurd idea exists that species

and genus-makers have rights which require protection, so long will anarchy prevail.

The law of priority is established for general convenience and to enforce a fixed

nomenclature, not to commemorate the makers of species.

The rules drawn up by a Committee of the British Association in 1842 (Rept. Brit.

As. 1842, p. 106) and approved, with slight alterations, by another Committee of the

same body in 1865 (Rept. B. As. 1865, p. 25) are the fairest yet proposed for regulating

scientific nomenclature, and they should be adopted until other rules are established by

general consent. To many naturalists in India these rules do not appear to be known,

and I may therefore be excused for referring to them. ‘The rules of Linneus are

republished at the commencement of the “‘ Nomenclator Zoologicus” of Agassiz, but so

many of them have been broken habitually for years, that they have become obsolete.

Had they been enforced, zoological nomenclature would never haye become the chaos

it now is, and much advantage would I think be gained if they were better known than

they are, and their general spirit at least adopted.

§ Aldrovandi, Quad. Bis. p. 256, under Capra bezoartica, gives a figure probably

meant for the Indian antelope, but in the text he describes several species, one of them

1875.] some Indian Ruminants. 19

The Capra bezoartica of Linneeus is thus described “ Capra bezoartica

cornibus teretibus arcuatis totis annulatis, gula barbata.” The bearded

chin, and the description of the animal’s habits refer, I think, to the bezoar

goat of Persia, Capra egagrus, whilst the round arcuate horns are probably

those of a Gazelle, and very possibly those of Gazella subgutturosa, the

species found in Persia. The description cannot possibly be made to agree

with the Indian antelope.

The first description of the Indian antelope published after the appear-

ance of the 12th edition of Linneeus is that of Pallas, whose first fasciculus

of the Spicilegia Zoologica, published in 1767, contains a monograph of the

genus Antilope. The Indian antelope is there described as A. cervicapra,

p. 18, No. 16, and figured in Tab. I. and II. The bezoartica of the same

monograph No. II., p. 14, is apparently an oryx.

Gmelin, Schreber, Wagner, and almost all continental writers have

adopted Pallas’s name for the species, and it has undoubted priority over

all others. The same name appears to have been used by most English

writers until lately. Error in this case, as in that of Capra egagrus, is to

be traced apparently to the British Museum Catalogues,* in whfch the

species was named Cervicapra bezoartica upon a well known principle,

which although admissible, is extremely objectionable, that of converting

the specific name into a generic term and coining a new specific term. ‘This

was in the catalogue of 1843, in which the only species retained under the

genus Antilope was dA. melampus. In both the subsequent catalogues,

those of 1852 and 1872, the Indian antelope is made the sole member of the

genus Antilope, Sundevail’s genus 4ipyceros being employed for A. melam-

pus, but instead of restoring Pallas’s specific name, Dr. Gray has in violation

of all rule retained his own (or Aldrovandi’s ) most objectionable appellation

bezoartica. It is a question whether this name should be preserved at all,

in the first place it is misleading, as the Indian antelope is not the bezoar

goat, and in the second place it leads to confusion because the animal is not

the Capra bezoartica of Linnzus ; but if the antelope be placed in the genus

Antilope, there can be no question that its proper name is A. cervicapra.

There remains, however, one question to be decided, and that is, whether

A. cervicapra is correctly made the type of the genus Antilope. This

genus was not employed by Linnzus, who placed the species of antelope

known to him, with the goats, under Capra. The modern genus must

therefore be derived from Pallas, who, as already mentioned, published a

probably the wild goat of Persia. It is evident that he meant to give the name to

the animal from which bezoar was obtained, and he figured the Indian antelope under

the mistaken idea that it was the real bezoar-producing animal.

* List Sp. Mam. B. M., 1843, p. 159.—Cat. Mam. Ungulata Furcipeda, 1852,

p. 66.—Cat. Rum. Mam. 1872, p. 40.

20 W. T. Blanford—On the Scientific Names, Sc. [No. 1,

monograph of Antilope in 1767, (Spic. Zool. No. I.) This monograph

includes 16 species, the last of which is A. cervicapra.

The old Linnean rule is that when a genus is divided, the majority of

the species shall be retained under the old generic name, and a new name

be given to the smaller section. There is another rule adopted by some

naturalists, viz., to keep the generic name for the species first placed in the

list by the original author of the genus. This last rule has led to absurdi-

ties, and, as Dr. Giinther has shewn, it would render the common crocodile

the type of the genus Lacerta. Practically it has been usual to allow any

one dividing one of the old genera into several to retain the original name

for whichever section he thought best, and the old generic name has usually

been preserved for the best known species and its affines.

The first naturalist who divided the old genus Antilope was Blainville,*

who in 1816 broke it up into 9 generic groups. In the first of these, Anfi-

lope, he retained 3 species, A. cervicapra, A. saiga, and A. gutturosa. ‘The

next author who divided the genus, Hamilton Smith, retained the same

species with some additions, but this is of small importance. Blainville

also established a genus Cervicapra containing a very miscellaneous collec-

tion of species; A. dama, A. redunca, A. oreotragus, A. saltiana, A. suma-

trensis, A. quadricornis, and several others.

Of the three species left in the genus Antilope by Blainville, A. saiga

was made into a distinct genus by Gray in 1843, and A. guttwrosa appears

to belong to Gazella and not to restricted Antilope. It is placed in

Gazella by Sundevall and Sir V. Brooke, whilst Gray in his later catalogues

associates it with Procapra picticauda of Hodgson, a form which must I

think also be referred to the gazelles. The sole remaining representative

of the genus Antilope is consequently the Indian antelope, which cannot be

assigned to the genus Cervicapra, because it was not placed in that genus

by Blainville, who first used the name, nor is it congeneric with any of the

species assigned to Cervicapra by Blainville. Gray’s genus Cervicapra falls

to the ground, because if the name be used at all, it can only be employed

for Blainville’s genus or part of Blainville’s genus. On all grounds, there-

fore, ib appears that the correct generic and specific name of the Indian

antelope is Antilope cervicapra.

* Bul. Soc. Phil. 1816, p. 74. I have not access to this work and quote from

Wagner and Fitzinger.

1875.] 21

VI.—On some recent Hvidence of the Variation of the Suns Heat.—By

Henry F. Buanrorp, Meteorologist to the Government of India.

(Received June Ist ;—Read June 2nd, 1875.)

Since the British Ass6ciation meeting at Brighton in 1872, at which

Mr. Meldrum brought to notice the fact that the Cyclones of the Indian

ocean vary in frequency with the period of sun-spot frequency, several at-

tempts have been made to trace out the evidence of a similar periodicity in

other meteorological phenomena. Mr. Meldrum and Mr. Norman Lockyer

have done this in the case of the rainfall, with the result of shewing that in

the Mauritius, Australia, South Africa and some other parts of the world

such a variation is to be detected more or less distinctly in the registers.

And Professor Koppen has arrived at a similar conclusion in the case of

air temperature, a result on which I shall have again to offer some remarks

in the sequel. All these results point to the conclusion that the radiation

of the sun is not appreciably constant from year to year,* but varies with

the appearance and physical state of his surface.

Long prior to any of these discoveries, the possible variation of the

sun’s heat and of its influence on the earth had been the subject of specula-

tion among solar physicists. According to Professor Wolf, (as quoted by

Professor Képpen,) Riccioli, in 1651, shortly after the first discovery of sun-

spots, surmised that some coincidence might exist between them and terres-

trial weather changes. Sir William Herschell endeavoured to establish such

a connexion by discussing one of their remote effects, viz., the rise and fall

~ in the price of wheat in past years. Sabine established a connexion betweén

the solar-spot period and that of magnetic storms; Fritz between the former

and the frequency of auroras ; and finally, in 1867, Mr. Joseph Baxendell of

Manchester succeeded in tracing out a distinct and very striking relation

between the number of the sun spots, and the ratio that exists between the

difference of the mean maximum temperature of solar radiation and the

mean maximum air temperature on the one hand, and that of the mean

temperatures of the air and of evaporation on the other.

All these investigations, it will be noticed, have dealt with the problem

in an indirect form: that of Mr. Baxendell being, however, the most direct,

and perhaps as direct as the data at his command (six years observations

of the Radcliffe observatory, and five years of Mr. Mackereth’s register at

Kecles near Manchester) would admit of. The causes that interfere with the

direct transmission of the sun’s heat to the earth’s surface are so powerful and

at the same time so variable, that even with more perfect instruments than

* As was assumed by Mr. Meech in his elaborate treatise on Solar heat in the

TXth Volume of the “Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge.”

22 H. F. Blanford—On some recent Evidence of the [No. 1,

we possess at present, it is not to be expected that in English latitudes and

under her variable and cloudy skies, the temperature of the solar heat in-

cident on the earth’s surface, recorded at two stations only, should coincide

at all distinctly in variation with that of the heat emitted from the sun.

Still, by a very ingenious treatment of the data, Mr. Baxendell succeeded

in shewing, with great probability, that the sun’s radiation varied in inten-

sity directly with the observed number of the spots during the years 1859

to 1866.

It was still desirable, however, that further and more direct proof should

be obtained, and it is obvious that for such a purpose, no country offers more

favourable conditions than India; and fortunately, owing in no small degree

to the urgent representations of this Society in past years, the means pro-

vided by the Government of Bengal, in the establishment of systematic

observations throughout its provinces, have put it in my power to bring

before the Society this evening, evidence, which if not absolutely conclusive,

at least leaves, I think, but little room for doubt, that the old speculations

are true; and that the sun’s heat varies from year to year, to such an

extent as must appreciably affect terrestrial phenomena.

Registers of the readings of a maximum thermometer, the bulb of

which is coated with lamp-black and which is enclosed in an exhausted

tube,* were commenced at a few stations in Bengal in the latter part of

1867 or the beginning of 1868; at others the observations were begun in

subsequent years. ‘he instruments are freely exposed to the sun’s rays,

supported on forked sticks at a height of one foot above the groundt and

their readings have been recorded on all days, whether clear or cloudy.

Béing very fragile, and exposed without protection, they are unfortunately

very subject to breakage, and although therefore their registers extend in

most cases over a period of six or seven years, I can find but one station on

my list at which the register has been kept continuously for more than five

years with one and the same instrument. ‘This fact very much reduces the

quantity of data available for discussion. It appears that, from some cause

at present unexplained, these thermometers, made by the best London makers,

sometimes differ in their readings to the extent of several degrees (I have

known differences of 10° and 15°) when exposed under apparently identical

circumstances; and there have been hitherto no means of comparing them

together in Calcutta in the only effectual way, viz., by exposing them side

by side to the solar radiation, and correcting all to some one instrument,

arbitrarily selected as a standard. In dealing with the registers then, I

* In one of these tubes which I opened, (that of a thermometer by Messrs.

Negretti and Zambra,) I found the residual air to have a pressure at the freezing point

of 1:26 ins. about equal to a vacuum of 34.

+ At Roorkee the instrument is about 4 feet above the ground,

1875.] Variation of the Sun’s Heat. 23

have been obliged to restrict my comparison to those of consecutive years

that have been recorded with the same instrument, and wherever an instru-

ment has lasted over a single twelvemonth only or less, its register has

been totally set aside.

The next precaution necessary is to eliminate as far as possible from

the individual registers, those irregularities which are due to variations in

the state of the sky. This, however, can be done but very imperfectly,

otherwise than on the mean of avery large number of observations. It

results from the actinometric observations of Pouillet, Kamtz, Quetelet and

Althaus, that with a vertical sun, and a sky free from all visible cloud or

haze, the proportion of solar heat that penetrates the whole thickness of

the atmosphere, and is therefore effective at sea-level, does not amount to

more than two-thirds or at the utmost three-fourths of that which reaches

the exterior of our atmosphere. Herschell estimates it at the former quan-

tity. But in India, the atmosphere, when cloudless to the eye, is by no

means so diathermanous as is here assumed. Sometimes for many days

together, with settled weather and a cloudless sky, the sun: thermometer

gives steady maximum readings, not differing more than one or two degrees.

A day follows on which there is a good deal of cloud, and perhaps some rain,

and the diathermancy of the atmosphere is so increased in the intervals of

the clouds, that the sun-thermometer registers 10° or 15° above any of its

previous readings. Such cases occur frequently in all the registers. It is

probable therefore that on days registered as cloudless, not less than half

the solar radiation and frequently much more is absorbed by the atmo-

sphere. In order to obtain data that shall be fairly comparable, I have in

“most cases selected those days on which the sky was either cloudless at 10

A. M. and 4 Pp. M., or had on the average not more than one-fifth of cloud.

In the case of the two comparatively cloudy stations Silchar and Port

Blair, I have been obliged to extend these limits; in the former case to three

tenths, in the latter to one-half. ‘The monsoon months, June to September,

are omitted in these tables.

Another method of proceeding which I have adopted in order to verify

these results is to take the two highest readings recorded in each month

(including the monsoon months) as the data for comparison.

The four following tables give the results. In Tables I. and II. the

comparison is restricted to the registers of those stations and years in

which the same instrument has been read continuously for at least two

consecutive calendar years. ‘The differences of each pair of years are given

separately for each station, and the means of the whole. This method of

comparison, however, admits of a very small portion only of the data being

utilized, since it excludes all broken years, and therefore in Tables III. and

IV. I have adopted a modified course of proceeding, which admits these.

H. F. Blanford— On some recent Evidence of the [No. 1,

I have taken first for each station separately the temperature differences of

each pair of homonymous months in consecutive years, rejecting as before

all those in which the instrument has been changed in the interval; and

next the mean of all the differences thus obtained for the same pair of

A rise of temperature is indicated by + , a fall by —.

24

months.

Taste I.—Differences of annual means of black-bulb temperatures with a

clear sky (as above defined).

STATIONS. 1868-9 | 1869-70 | 1870-1 | 1871-2 | 1872-3 | 1873-4

Port Blair. ...... o0d0000 + 2:2 EEE NO7/

Cuitaelis; ~-coonocoo cocncc00 +1°8 +174 0

Chittagong, 0090 950908 —08} —1:9 0

AD ACCA ainlelevereassieles ores se +2°6 —2-2 — 0-4

Slava, 556000 000006 +2°9 +1:9 — 4-4

Berhampore, ...........+ — 2-4

Patnas eve aeeca tects es +77

Whom, Goonon coo00000 +2°9 | —0O-1

Silom, no00000a 20090000 —21 0 —1°8 6°3

TROOURGS, nin0d0000 noo00Gn0 +2°3 56

Sums, +10°6 +7:0 +01 +3°6 — 4-9 Oe

Means,} +9°3 +2°3 0 +0°9 —I11 —10

Taste I].— Differences of annual means of two highest black bulb tem-

peratures monthly.

STATIONS. 1868-9 | 1869-70} 1870-1 | 1871-2 | 1872-3 | 1873-4

iPro IBlewe, 45506000 000000 + 2°9 —13

Chikinls, sisain dee bo nbO soe +26| 42:5] —28

Chittagong, =... ........ a1 || = Ors +13

IDAGORhS Sols RiolecooL oaotaD +17 | —1:2 +1:2

Ielavanel SI bonged cooo00 +2°8 +3°7 —39

Berhampore, ........+++. —1:2

SALT Annies sieves ralsveisj'e sik 616706 + 6:0

Monghyr, ...... 90000000 +03 1:0

SHIR, Koos00 96 be owoaee +18 | —2:3, —0:3 +77

TOOMBS, onooad 1600 G00n00 0-9 — 3-9

Sums, +8°8 + 6:9 — 01 +0°3 +0°6 —24

Means,) +4°4 +2°3 0 +01 +071 | —03

Variation of the Sun's Heat. 25

Tasie Ill. A.— Differences of monthly means of black-bulb temperatures

with clear sky,

JANUARY.

STATIONS. 1868-9 | 1869-70| 1870-1 | 1871-2 | 1872-3 | 1873-4

Tape IBGE, Gnq56a05 Hodode —13 +3°3 — 82

Wuitack. ss. S90 addoo0uc — 50 +83 | —0°6

Chittagong,........ Sooo at — 2°5 —30| —15

RIGSOOEG MEIC a cceiccs ci ieis ic eiev0 +17

TDG Gans Gee ORC Cree —10 — 2°6 —32

[iene aianeonoo modo — 30 +59 | —10 —59d

BEEMAN POLERE <heleia's|s/'s\s cic. 3 — 2:9 — 34 —11°8

Silane”) Sadedeaaspanece +23 | —d1 —1°0 0

MVitori yi at as wiers esol leisisi vies +1°5 +38 | —4:7

TET ain GeO CREE RRC OC IIE +6°7 +86

HYOOLK CO Wialsielsolsieie’ asi cle oe —31|)| —52 — 12:0

Means, +16 +24} 41:3 —3'8 + 0°4 —53

FEBRUARY.

Fras bn Gaenooe oocaood —27 +49 —2°5

Cuttack es... averse ehaieiars — 5:0 +72 —14

CHIT SONE a Sos coqeooeonc Ari | 057 +0°3

RNCSSOLG IFoo ons: si crasie's)« Beane +1°6

LD EXO Os pec lemmeeaee Boielscetereie —17 —0°5 — 33

HET AZATTD ASE sista'eis/sicle«lois0 +2°2 +2°5 +3°9 —0°8

Berhampore, yale s/eile (a/siersis,s — 4:2 —51 —11°3

Silane, p socndsecoonueDe +05 | —ds51 + 2°4 0

IGIISIN ES -so5ogoumlogGubOU +3°2 +15) —48

zea iat etreraicislarev rie eisie svese ove +20°2) —3 3:4

INDGHAEE, ogontooo acoo00N0C —68 | —0O2 —97

Means, + 8:0 —09 +0°8 —s38 +21 —36

Marcu.

FO GP DALES savcias a(o'a\ o/aisisie +54 +2°8 —71

CHITTY kee A RC ae 56 — 48 +4:0 +02

(Clint reo Reena omeno : +0° | —0O4}] —15

JESSOTE, ..eaee Batata stone : +2°7

ID RYE ip CaS caer are 3000 0600 +4°3 | —2:1 + 0:2

AAT IDAS HT esen)s «sie : +50 | —2°3 +82 —34| —4.7

IBELHATOPOLC, <secjose «0. « +1°6 —3'l +131

Silchar sets. 50 daodoo0dn —155 —1:9 —14 +1:9

Miqamelthae 2 Ap onecocaanone — 0:4 +3°6 |. —1°4

BEAM oer lereic\e ics sis "ees +19°2

HEABEKE Rogie s cise h 6 0 cieieiee +09 | —9:3 —15:3

Means, +9:0 +11 +28 leg 3 | —O7) —17

26

H. F. Blanford—On some recent Evidence of the

[Nos ae

APRIL.

STATIONS. 1868-9 | 1869-76 | 1870-1 | 1871-2 | 1872-3 |1873-4

Ikea) Jeeta Gognog, wouued +3°8 | —3°2 19

Cinthia, 5500000 Foe ere —06 +2°7 | —3-9 +2°3

(Chittagong, .c2..+s wee e oe — 02 +18) —20/] —17

VERO, pronodoe vonpo00c +42

IDRC. oosoAc 5900 C0008 206 — 4:0 +651 —29 0

Hazaribagh, ......+0 eee +10:0} —2-1 +1°7 —63 | —62

Berd VOR, 505000 ooon0G +3°6 —7'3 +57

psullelagne, sp00d000 00000000 — 35 +14] —60 +5°3

Wiomeliag 55000005 duo006 —0°3 +19 | —2:6

IPM, ogo7000000 0000000 0 + 8:4

INO, Gonono00 ano00adc +6:1 +56 | —81

May.

a ee

Port Blair, eoeeeo oe e908 —07 — 39 —7T7

CMOS soonod0d 00 q000 ae —59 +97) —55}] —1:9

Chittagong, ....... 0 000 +37 | —d6| —18] —0O2

VOILE, sa00n000 asd0n000 ;

IDRC, odoncdbo Bo000 BAG : —67 +54 | —37 +071

lskvenal OVEN, 4900 p00000 6 +14:2) —6°6 + 2°6 —26| —44

Berhampore, ...+0+0+ ss: +9°9 tO) ates

SW Goo00n 99 00000000 —1:9 +10; —382 +49

Mlomenne “4. 5pn0000n ad00 spiby | =e)

IPA, 99000000 00000000 +3°9

TE OWSS, Goandd0g Noonoo0N — tly +67 | —49

Means, +91 +11); —22 +2.6 | —O7 | —25

{

OCTOBER,

Port Blair, eoeoeee ©0009 000 — 17 — 80 — 88 + 4:0

Cintas Gucocdc0 40600000 —38/] + 40] + 02] + 25

@hittagons, ...... assesses — 6d| + 41) —43] + 24

VOISHD, 000 00000000 a0n06 + 6:0

IDBOG, 56 oo00G0 0an0 a6 n00C — 06/ + 25] — 2:3) + 4:7

Hazaribagh, oeee0poee cee Gard 7:0 +10°6 oo 6°9 boas 4:1

_BieraeenMyNOK, Gosoodd0 co06 + 0°3 —127 | — 19

Silchar, eeenee cee OFeee8 — 4:0 + 4°6 — 1°3 + 6°4

Monghyr, eocoeeve goeoeee0ene — 4-4 + 9:0 — 2:9

IPAINT, goono900 90 goonu0G00 ||) == Pl)

UO OLKCC alee Melatelevelenalersieliels + 46 — 13] + 38

Means, | — 45] + 84| —17] + 40! —47] + 27

1875.] Variation of the Sun's Heat. 28

NOVEMBER.

STATIONS. 1868-9. | 1869-70.| 1870-1. | 1871-2. | 1872-8. | 1873-4.

BerBlairy godsesesessses | — 64 | + 0°8 9p |) Ga

Esinde eee es) + 4-6 | 4 1-2 | — ks

CIDER AES LO 4 ag gcoo nO Odo — 23) — 06 | —18] + dl

RB OLE Ne reisigre oy s Selo sicis'ss'« + 57

WACGCARY Giles’ ates dt is cvae + O1 | + 46} —19}| — 08

Hazaribagh,....... eae ear leek. 48 — 36} — 79

RCE AMIPOLEs) Unis) ciccle cee 6 cs — 05 + 19 —13:4] — 43

HEHE spew tices: caek oe e's — 59 + 54] —40; +10°4

iUinnelnae Gageooonoooe0uc eS) | Se 859) 80S

WTA eke: cise e's se SAUCES — 03

Ea On == 9:6 | camel = ses) 2 Oe

Means, | — 2:2 | + 1:3] —06| + 35 | — 36) + 08

DECEMBER.

ee ee eee ee EE

Bary ibm G6Go soudadoono 4 |tes—alle/o| Pea! Keane — 48} + 46

Cuma wes coup antossacciee $ —— DH | 45 Be |) ge alee, |p Iles

CINE BeAgap sage Gono =— 9G | 25 OS || —= Ory |] —— Ue

RCSHOLG a Roioioie sicierci cielo) Sele : + 2°8

MBACCH Se care vs icleisiee as ele es : +02] + 20) — 23] — 04

Hazaribagh,......... Soe || ae Chen lpac aa — 04] — 457

Berhampore, ......see0656 | — 48 — 07 1059) Ome

Sliding s Sho cond Guo uM ODUDOL — 34] + 02) —03 | +158

Iuigmedna® Gobo goo0 6000 d000 + 05] + 4:3 |) — 35 :

Pate. S554 ooag 0600 Ged0oO + 85

ISG OMEEEH GoGo Gobo G00 doc ; — 26) + 1:3 — 53] + 13

Means, | + 1:2] + 23] —16/ + 22) — 29] + 09

Taste III. Bi— Mean monthly and annual differences of black-bulb

temperatures with a clear sky.

Montus. 1868-9. | 1869-70.} 1870-1. | 1871-2. | 1872-3. | 1873-4.

JANUATY, wee. eeseeeseeees | + 16] + 274] + 13] — 3:8] + 04 | — 53

February, ..... : + 80} — 09] + 08 | — 38 | + 21 |) — 36

March,.... Sooo bode G00000C + 9:0 + 11 + 258) | = 2:3) 1) — 0:7 | — 17

cil SS es 25. |) aS ele PD | Uo OHA) SS Oe

Wee ee Pier.) |e OsL | + 1-1 | ih se 2-6 = 0-7 |

WeETopermeiocied- +) eciieele | —— 4:0) ) - 8:4 | = ale7al 4h AQ == a7 OO

November, .............. | — 22 | + 1:33] — 06] + 3:5 | — 3°6 + 08

IDCCEMDCT Ness csiss aye pues + 12] + 23) —16/)] + 22) —29/] + 09

Sums, +297 | +168} — 14) + 26 | —12°7 | — 89

Means, | + 37 | + 2:1) —02) + 03] —16/ —1

28 H. F. Blanford—On some recent Evidence of the

[No. 1,

Tarte IV. A.— Differences of monthly means of two highest black-bulb tem=

peratures Mm consecutive yeurs.

JANUARY.

STATIONS. 1868-9 | 1869-70 | 1870-1 | 1871-2 | 1872-3 | 1873-4

|

iPowy IBbiie Gooonn 00004000 0 — 10 |; — 13:0

Gaiti@G', 50009000 40000000 — 35 | + 78) —O1

ClarngRVeione?, “555500 ad0n00 — 20/ — 13] + 14

IEIORD,) cdodobosd con SOOO + 1:0

IDEXOORS daadad 6000 00.00.0000 + 06| —09| — 47

lakeyvanaloevela, 505006900000 — 30} + 9:0 | — 2° — 40

Sed MAMM NOES, Goanodaa oo0n = Of — 32 — 89

. (SHONaTE, Bo 55 obd0.H00000 30 —30| —30| + 45] + 10

Witoarslinag, 560060 00000000 ap 25) || = AA | ea

Tei nav oka Gee AIP TIO SORA + 17:0) — 7-0

BOOKED) 50000600 on00000 5 + 2:0 | — 4:0 | — 101

Sums, + 15:0} — 1:2 | — 65 | — 16:1} + 101; — 38-0

Means, | + 5:0 | — 0:2 | — 1:3 | — 273 + 23) — 47

FEBRUARY.

1Poray IBkwe, gao5 6000 voa000 — 30] — 1:0 — 5:0

(CiROK cosgo000 0000 0000 — 72) + 74] — 23

Chittagong, .........- a6 : — 86) — 14] + 46

JESSOLE, ...0 50000 000000 + 34

IDG, s000 500000 00 000000 00 Sor ne + 06 | + 0°6

islevanalloeyele, oan0 0000 0000 +90) — 26) + 35 — 30

Berhampore, .....+++ see — 67 — 02 | — 1077

SUM, 59650000 00000000 — (075) | — 350) |) 2:05 |e

Wiomalinne, jun odn000 6900 + 05] + 35 | — 10

IPA, 4500 oh000000 000000 + 20:0

INQOWEGE, 500000000000 0000 — 9.5 | + 4:5 — 10°8

Sums, + 32°44 — 11°77) — 4:0 , — 261} + 86 | — 246

Means, | + 108) — 2:9] —08|]—87}] + 21} — 31

Marcu

IPyan 1BbWe, 5a600000 n00006 + 65] + 1:0 — 55

CAGE, soouotoo opb00000 + 05 | + 02) — 2:3

Chittagong, 1.5... «..... + 20] —12) + 02

VOIIOHD, anocco00 60000000 — 275

HDAC CA wycretateteseiecteveie:sis.saiere sc 41 | — 3:5 | — 06

lameraloneln, “ny 550q000 anc +20] + 75] + L0 — 3:/ | —— G0

Led MNOS, G50050 000000 + 57 — 2:5 — 67

Silchar everest ciereceielec a'e — 10) —60} — 30) + 445

Monghyr, 114000 000004 + 10] + 2°55 | — 3°

PALM As persis ce. Meuekoutsteteieae + 12°5

HVOOLECO Masta s (otele joie rouusin cs ars + 05} + 4:2 | — 96

Sums, + 1070) E25 -7|/ 0) |S Sa SG

Means, + 33 + 64 + 08 | —0O2) — 2:2] — 32

1875.] Variation of the Sun’s Heat. 29

APRIL.

SrTarions. 1868-9 | 1869-70 | 1870-1 | 1871-2 | 1872-3 | 1873-4

PERGRGED ATU yetolereieh ele vies © aie + 50} — 30 — 25

AO bACKA tl ctajele’ « oscevatie.s us + 10) — 32) —04)] + 3:0

WhibbasON Eases sees : + 566) — 35 |) — 2:0 esa ley/

Jessore, Meoce sis Sodoaday |) = OS

DACCa, cares SHO Gee a fj + 1:4 + 32 | — 4:2 + 1:4

PM aM cies el aieie's wees | LOCO 0 + 2:0 — 75| — 40

ERGENAMIP OLE lee seis a sie + 2°2 — 67 — 67

STIGINE 2. © Fp Oc OROI EIS eR —od5| — 45] — 45] + 10:0

EVV Gn OsTaiya Mele yorcwiclels 6! sare’ tai — 3d | + 16 0

EERUMS EER er cijeivsiecsicisieves well) ot 20

HROOEK CO Melesislaeisiers cis swine + 15 | — 3°7 — 71

Simm, | = es es os | Se ea =

Means| + 42) 0:9 | eeO6 | — 9-6 | — 3-7] = 0-5

May.

Teo Teme, Soguno conobo0G + 3:5 | — 25 — 50

CuliG g5c000 n600!d0na00 — 70 40) —15| + 19

CIMROMES Gaopdpo0 GoodDO — 10) — 42) + 66| — 6:9

JESSOLE,.. 144 3000000 :

IDRGEE, Seoboo Ooo000G0 DD00 —31/ + 16; + 04} — 19

Hazaribagh,........25.-.. | + Jo | + 1:5 | — 6:0 — §0| — 12

Berhampore, ........«.. : +. 765 + 12] + $0] — 2:0

Char ss ae 6 Goold odo CeO & + 8d | — 20] —65] + 86

MIOMelAe, | dogooa0 000 50 D0 + 30] — 70

iPRihazl, Aiso0 o000 0b00 COODdO + 0°5

IN@OUREE, Go00 0000 0000 0000 — 2:0 = 1%) || ce 2:

Sums, + 8:0 +15°5 | —20°1 + 06} — 2:0 | — 42

Means,| + 40] + 39} — 25] + O01] — 03] — 0°56

JUNE. »

6 I I EES)

Moone Baie ss o.05 ais dent wie +140 + 65

Ciitma@s ~“sgogggion0 canbe ; =A se GRD ae MeO] lee

ClanineOIN Gaogoo 6400 600c — 25) + 21) — 23] + o4

JSTOHE, cob oBGO BoOODO n

BREHC CAUSA aiiorclcy<iaie. ais oie aie « ap 2B) | re Uy cece (Daly ce | eee

iElaaiellopedhheog woos Ha onee + 35) + 75 | — 45 — 4:5 | —12:°0

Berhampore, ....... : + 30; + 4:0 + 42) — 06

Suldnere. coaueoueaaeee +1795 | —15] — 75) +145

Wiomelnzg « chbbo00 0000 o00C + 50) + 50} — 3%

ZAM MU PT aes sore: evevoie coos ale + 4:0

POE KCO Ua aeelssdle bees oe os iene fe UR ee OS

Sums, | +155 | +305] —85| +107| + 65 | — 9-0

Means, | + 39) + 76) — 12) + 27) + 09} — 11

30 H. F. Blanford—On some recent Evidence of the [No. 1,

‘JULY.

STATIONS. 1868-9 | 1869-70] 1870-1 | 1871-2 | 1872-3 | 1873-4

Port Blair, ....50 vevsceee + 30 + 11°0

(CUUHICNS 540500 aou0d 5 000 +15) — 35) —02) + 49

Chittagong, ....0- eseess —14| — 46) — 34) 4+ of

Jessore, 5000 0000006006

IDEAS, ~~ od 00D 010000000000 + 31) + OL | —67) + 41

IELaANe RAN, “Gooqc0n0 0000 [pee Y )) ar CD || = BY — 42) — 22

ISSN, oo503000 0000 |) ar OO — 35 + 17| — 46

SUMMA, Goo06c00 Good00NG +95) —35| —10) + 75

Wigaedinn?, soobdo ao0d0000 (ae er || = 2D) sp RS

IPNRA, Hocosoddc0000d00 || =>

IR@Ova EE GH0000 Gd0000 0500 — 3:0 vel +111 | — 121

Sums, — 11:0) + 80; — 1:3; — 11:4, — 1.7 + 12°4

Means, | — 2°8 | + 2°7| — 0:2 | — 2:8 | — 02) eae

Avaust.

Dos WIE, so50G0G0000000 + 3:0 9.5

Cuttack, sss. see ==) eee Oe) || eg) |) =e Te

Chittagong, .c..es...50 —09 |} —386}] + 36] + 13

J essore, 60000000 000000

DBO, oou055 650000 090000 0 + 70]—09!|] + 24

Hazaribagh) 02.6. «0+... + 05 | — 2:0] + 0°5 — 95) + 2.2

Berhampore, ...... er ataners + 10°0 — 27 — 70} + 35

Silchar ie esasstewe sens — 20) —30}] + 70] + 55

Nl@malmhes oo09000 aodoas + 50] —50] + 1:0

JPA 660000 00000 6 C0 anOG + 16°5

Roorkee, ..... 604100 do do% — 06 + 28] —12

Sums, + 32:0} — 40 | — 69 + 26} — 31 + 48

Means, | + 80} — 13] —09|] + 06] — 04] + 06

SEPTEMBER.

IPexa Jette, Gago a50000 Dood — 35 — 20] + 3:0

(Cab ba eee aii tele ote 5 — 57) +144] —109} + 3-7

Chittagong, ......... a — 30] + 04] + 17) —14

SIESSOLE) je sis): sjeree ors-s ; — 5:0

IDEYOC on00 00 00 6000 60000 c — 49) + 20) — 16 + 8.1

Hazaribagh,....... oo | + 15] + 6:5 —10°5 | + 05

Berhampore, ............ | — 1° — 10 — 97] + 595

SHIeWe. As S65o G000 005 0 + 80/—30! 4+ 65); + 2:0

WMiGaI 55 G000 0500000000 + 65|— 5651 — 10

VaLLIAs Me becsteree viet ere:s ex aa ae + 6°5

Roorkee, coe. eseeee oe + 1:5 + 31) + 1:0

Sums, | +13:0|— 75 | — 61] +138 | —23-4| 499-4

Means, | + 3:3 | —1:9 | —09]| + 34] —29] + 9:8

1875.]

STATIONS. &

Port Blair, ......

Gummadi, Be n6 daca nous aode

Chittagong, ...+.

Jessore,

Dacca,

Hazaribagh,

Berhampore, .....

Silchar,

Monghyr,

Patna,

ee

seen eere ere acee ee ee

Roorkee, .ses esse ceeeeees

Sums,

Means,

Variation of the Sun’s Heat.

31

OcTOBER.

1868-9 |1869-70 | 1870-1 | 1871-2 | 1872-3 | 1873-4

— 10] + 6:0 + 05 (6)

— 4:0 + 75 | — Og + O1

—— (25 | 5 OR ye Zico)

==> Mil

— 34 + 04] — O1 + 29

— 55 + 7:0 +15) — 75

+ 80 — 1:0 — 11:2} + 40

+ 80} — 11:0) + 2:5] + 15°5

+ 05] + 3:0] — 3:0

+ 1°5

— 05 +07) + 27

+ 3:5 | + 13:9) —— 2-3) |) — 38:6 | — 8:7 | 4 Qs7

+ 07| + 3:5 | — 0:3 | — 0:9 | —11) + 2:7

i2tis BEA Geagdddomodood

Cminima@, Sos00550 05059000

Chittagong, ......0e ssss0e

aBERORE, 440060 Gobbo0 oBb00K

Dacca,

lElazenelogvedn $566 on0000dob0

Berhampore,...-

Sulelmee, Ghan osoon

Monghyr,....

Patna, ....

e2oe se eeoe

eeoee

“Roorkee, .....+0+-.... : +

Sums, —12°5 +144 | —27-3 +19°5 | —26°8 + 25°4

Means, | —- 255 | + 29 | —39| + 49] — 33] + 3:2

DECEMBER.

IGETPIAIES isccsvsecccces | + 2:0 | + 4:0 +25] + 15

Cuttack, @eeoeeeoseseoeeene@ + 1°5 + 6:2 (0) ——— 4:4

Clirinizeonres 5 550qq00 000000 — 42) — 48 (0) — 13

TBISORE, 5 oooocub CODD DONOOD + 2:7

Dacca, eeeeeesoeeees OG eevee — 06 +0°9 + 0-4 — 5:9

Hazaribaore, ....eesceeee + 1:5 + 0:5 — 20] — 05

Berhamp Peyecavoneinisvaneroteievelajes + 1:2 — 3°5 —12°5 | — 9:0

“Silica, 9556 Sp00000n|Nb0000 — 2:5 0 — 30 +14:0

Miomeinyae, Gogg coon dsccc000 || os G0) |) salty as 2355

HALMatscieisiciee ecisietess clels) || == 3°()

Roorkee, eevee e 28888 e Ceo = 6:0 + 3°5 aeen 8:9 + 0:7

Sums, + 67| —03/] — 83] + 1:3 | —23°5 | — 4:9

Means, | + 1:3) —0O1/| — 10} + 03] — 2:9 | — 06

32 H. F. Blanford—On some recent Evidence of the [No. 1,

Taste LV. B—WMean monthly and annual differences of maximum black-

bulb temperatures.

Monts. 1868-9. | 1869-70.) 1870-1. | 1871-2. | 1872-3. | 1873-4.

Ya, oo00c000 co00000 : + 50 | — 02] —13 | — 23) + 25) —47

Hepruary wee oho ea re 4+10:8)|) == 2:9 | — 0:8 | — 3:7 | er 0, 1e ene

INRA, 5oc000 ana000 n00000 + 57] + 64] — 08 | — 02) — 22 | — 32

Iasi posaac Soca + 4-202 0-9 114 0-6 | 12-6 | nn soy es

INTE coo 0090-09000 5 00000000 + 4:0 | + 3:9 + 2:3)! —0O1| — 03) — 05

JUNE, 500000000000 dact0000 + 39 + 76) —12!] + 27] +.0:9 | —11

ily ween ee: seo ee | = Ber) OB | Pd Le

ATES, 650500 000000 000000 + 8:05/5—— 1:3), — 0:9 |) .-b 10:6515 — O45 |e eeOce

Septembersee- ee ce ese: ve | + Some O == 0-9) 4 3-4) oes

OCHO, o50000 00000000 . | + O07] + 385] — 03} —09}| —11)| 4+ 27

INVOYEMAIDE®, non000 G0000000 — 25) — 2:9 | — 39] + 49 | — 3:33 | 32

IDAGEANIS, 500000 av000000 + 13) —0O1}) —10/] + 03] — 2:99 | — 06

Yearly sums, +41°6 +215 | —116| — 05 | —11 | — 2-9

Means, | + 3:5} + 16| — 09 0} — 09} — 0-2

The results obtained by these four different methods, resting on two

distinct kinds of data, agree then, in shewing a very decided variation

of the incident solar heat ; a variation which, in the epoch of its maximum

approximately, its rapid rise before that maximum and slower decline

after it, agrees with the variation curve of the solar spots. Table III being

based on a far larger quantity of data than either of the others, probably

gives the most trustworthy results. The curve obtained from this table is

given in the adjoining figure.

ice) op) i=) ei i ise) =

<=) Wo) Y I > > Pao

ee) @ (ee) ice) ee) ee) (ee)

et re rei re ei re re

1875. ] Variation of the Sun’s Heat. 33

What proportion the variation may bear to the total incident heat, the

present data of course cannot show ; and in order to know this, we must

await the regular actinometric observations which it is to be hoped may be

undertaken at the new Solar Observatory under Col. Tennant at Simla.

But judging from the present results, it would certainly appear probable

that the variation is such as must exercise a very appreciable influence on

the Meteorology of our earth. “It is a dynamical law absolutely universal

and one which extends beyond the domain of mere dynamics, that all

periodicity in the action of a cause, propagates itself into every, even the

remotest effect of that cause, through whatever chain of intermediate arrange-

ments the action is carried out.’’*

If then the sun’s radiation vary directly with the number of the spots

and prominences, every other meteorological phenomenon must likewise so

vary, rainfall and temperature included, and we have therefore a prioré

grounds for the validity of Meldrum, Lockyer, and K6ppen’s discoveries.

With regard to the rainfall, the coincidence of its variation with that of the

sun spots has been only partially verified by the data; but seeing that the

rainfall of the larger part of the world has not been taken into considera-

tion in the comparison, this is no more than we should expect. In India,

for instance, the registers of most of the few stations that have been com-

pared, fail to conform to the supposed law, but India is but a small part of

the region on which precipitation takes place during the SW. monsoon, and

I have shewn in a former volume of this Journal, that there are independent

erounds for believing, that owing to protracted variations in the distribution

of atmospheric pressure in different years, (from what causes arising we are

at present unable to determine, ) deficient rainfall in one part of the monsoon

area is probably compensated in great part by an excessive rainfall elsewhere.

As far as the coincidence has been established, the quantity of rain that falls,

varies directly with the intensity of the sun’s radiation; in other words, with

the quantity of energy received from the sun, which of course determines the

quantity of water evaporated and afterwards condensed.

This consideration appears to me to throw some light on the apparent-

ly anomalous variation of temperature detected by Professor Koppen.f

He finds that, in the tropics, the maximum temperature coincides, not with

the maximum of the sun-spots, but more nearly with their minimum ; which,

however, it precedes by } to 13 years. His inference, partly based on this

fact, and partly on his erroneous idea of the nature of the spots, is the

reverse of that which follows from the facts now adduced. He concludes

that the spots are an indication of the diminished radiation of the sun,

* Herschel’s ‘Meteorology,’ p. 137.

+ Zeitsch. d. Oesterr, Gesellschaft fiir Meteorologie, Vol. VIII, pp. 241 and 257.

5

Bd: H F. Blanford—On some recent Evidence of the [No. 1,

and adopts the earlier hypothesis of Dela Lande and of Zollner that they are

solidified scoriaceous masses floating on the glowing fluid surface [‘‘ Schollen

fest-gewordener Stoffe auf der glihendfliissigen Sonnenkugel”]. The great

discovery of Chacornac and Lockyer in 1865, that the spots are produced by

a down-rush of the cooled external atmosphere of the sun, would seem to be

unknown to him.

The spots being then, in all probability, an indication of increased ra-

diation, how is this to be reconciled with the facts ascertained by Professor

Koppen. Possibly, I think, in this way. The temperatures dealt with by

Professor Képpen are of course those of the lowest stratum of the atmo-

sphere at land stations ; and must be determined, not by the quantity of heat

that falls on the exterior of the planet, but on that which penetrates to the

earth’s surface, chiefly to the land surface of the globe. The greater part

of the earth’s surface being, however, one of water, the principal immediate

effect of the increased heat must be to increase the evaporation, and there-

fore, as a subsequent process, the cloud and the rainfall. Now a cloudy

atmosphere intercepts the greater part of the solar heat ; and the re-evapora-

tion of the fallen rain lowers the temperature of the surface from which it

evaporates and that of the stratum of the air in contact with it. The heat

liberated by cloud condensation doubtless raises the temperature of the air

at the altitude of the cloudy stratum; but, at the same time, we have two

causes at work, equally tending to depress that of the lowest stratum. As

a consequence, an increased formation of vapour, and therefore of rain, fol-

lowing on an increase of radiation, might be expected to coincide with a

low air-temperature on the surface of the land.

It is needless to point out that a vast train of enquiry is opened up by

the fact, once established, that the solar heat undergoes a periodical varia-

tion. It is I believe of high importance to Meteorology, or will be so when the

amount of the variation shall have been ascertained in terms of absolute mea-

surement, and it affords a strong additional incentive to the establishment

of an observatory in India, such as have already been founded under the

less favoured skies of Germany and on the Rocky mountains, for observing -

and measuring the variations of the sun. These and their immediate effects

are, by prerogative, the study of the tropics.

P.S. July 12th.—Since the foregoing paper was read, I have examined

the register of Darjiling ; a station which, although frequently obscured by

cloud, has the advantage over stations on the plains, that it is above the

level of the dust haze that absorbs so much of the solar heat over the latter.

I have discussed the registers by a method somewhat different from either

of those followed in the body of the paper, viz., by selecting the three high-

est recorded sun temperatures in each half month, deducting from each the

maximum temperature of the air in the shade on the same days, and taking

1875.] Variation of the Sun’s Heat. 85

the mean of the six differences to represent the solar intensity of the month.

The result, as will be seen from the following table, is in complete accord-

ance with that previously arrived at from other data. The same thermo-

meter has been in use throughout.

TaBLe V.—Solar intensity at Darjiling.

STATIONS. 1870. 1871. 1872. 1873. 1874. 1875.

January, fe x 878 67-7 59°2 578 62°3

February, ue a 62°2 62°8 62°3 56°5 60°3

March, 63°3 63°5 62° 58°2 578

April, 64°2 63:2 62°8 55'°7 60°2

May, “se #2 62:2 67°8 66°8 63°8 59°8

June, ae ee 67° 68° 67:3 62°5 59°2

July, We wi 63°3 66°2 65°7 60°8 56°3

August, it ei 70°8 65°7 66°38 60: 57'8

September, ae ree 71:5 69°3 63°7 62:3 59°3

October, a: ae 65°5 68:2 70: 63:3 60°8

November, te res 62°5 67:3 62°5 - 57:3 63°3

December, ue Be, 59° 66°3 69° 53°8 60°5

Year, ea 65°5 64:9 60°8 58°6

VII.— Notes on the Geology of part of the Dafla Hills, Assam ; lately visited

bythe Force under Brigadier-General Starrorp, C. B.—By Major

H. H. Gopwiy-Austrn, #. &. G.S., FZ. S., &e., Deputy Superin-

tendent Topographical Survey of India.

(Received June 18th,—Read July 7th, 1875.)

(With Plate VI.)

My survey duties with the late expedition into the portion of the

Eastern Himalaya known as the Dafla Hills gave me an opportunity of

making a few notes on the geology of this portion of the North-eastern fron-

tier, of which so little is known up to the present time.

From the Brahmaputra near Bishnath and Dunsiri Mukh, the outer

range of the Tertiary sandstones is well seen, the steep scarps shewing white

against the dense forest with which they are covered. I first entered this

outer range by a route up the bed of the Darpang stream, a tributary of

the Pichola, when proceeding to clear the hill Dihirhi Parbat for a Trig-

onometrical station. After leaving Borpathar, the road leads over the plain

ina direction WNW., and after 5 miles the shallow bed of the Darpang is

followed up and leads directly by a narrow gorge into the hills: these rise

suddenly from the level plain of recent detritus, no outlying beds of later

age being seen here.

86 Godwin-Austen—On the Geology of [No. 1,

The strata dip about 20° NW., and consist of thick-bedded fine sand-

stones with strings of water-worn pebbles here and there, but no conglo-

merate was seen ; they weather on the higher ridges into spheroidal masses

indented with small holes, in a precisely similar manner to the upper sand-

stones of the Burrail range. The most conspicuous beds are of a very pale

grey colour with black grains. Pieces of lignite are commonly found im situ

and lying in the beds of the water-courses. The ravines are bounded by

very steep sides, and are deep and gloomy. Looking from Dihirhi Parbat

westward, the fringing range of the sandstones is well seen, rising at Goru-

sutia or Peak 1 of the G. T.S. into a sharp scarped point 3,319 feet high,

but the ridge descends here and there on the line of strike to below 1000

feet. It presents the same feature all along of a steep scarp towards the

plains, and of a slope dipping 20°—25° NNW. towards the main mass of the

mountains on the north, from which it is separated by a broad valley or

“dhtin’” drained by the Pomah. This dhtn is cut up by numerous ravines

and low ridges all buried in dense forest.

To the eastward, 3 miles from Dihirhi Parbat, the sandstone ridge is

much subdued. A change takes place in the strike of the mountain mass,

and a broad forest-clad plateau, much intersected by ravines and about 200

feet above the plains, extends as far as the gorges of the Dikrang at Har-

matti. On this side, the Borpani and Dikrang on their SW.—NE. courses

represent and take up the continuation of the Pomah Dhun. At Harmatti

is seen another quite recent deposit, in an alluvial plateau of sand, clay, and

boulders, on which land for a tea-garden has been taken up. It corre-

sponds to similar terraces in the Western Bhutan Duars, as those on the

Jholdaka, &c., but is nowhere more than 30 to 40 feet above the river bed,

and is found fringing the older rock slopes for some distance up the valley

and to the eastward. It lies against a broad extent of very low intricate

hills, which, from this towards the east, are a conspicuous feature. The

very hurried examination I was able to make of these beds near Harmatti

shewed them to be ferruginous-coloured sandstones and thick conglo-

merate beds resting on fine blue grey sandy beds dipping 5° to South-east-

ward. No lignite was seen 7m situ, but rolled pieces were common in the

bed of the stream, evidently brought down some distance. At Harmatti

similar beds dip 15° SE. ; they appear to me to represent the newest beds

of this Tertiary series, here extending out into the plains beyond the strike

of the Ist or Dihirhi Parbat line of elevation. ‘This line is taken up again

east of the Dikrang by alow ridge which bounds the river on the SE. as far

as the great bend it takes 10 miles above the junction of the Borpani.

Leaving the stockade at this junction, the winding bed of the Sibjali

is followed, and this 13 miles farther is joined by the Niosi, a much larger

stream. In the bed of the last, the gravels are found to bea great mixture

1875.] part of the Dafla Hills, Assam. 37

of gneiss, clay shales, and dark-coloured sandstones belonging to a diffe-

rent series of rocks, with a few pebbles from Tertiary sandstones, shewing

that the river must cut through the whole series of stratified rocks up to

the metamorphics. This I afterwards found to be the fact. I found here.

several pieces of silicified wood (a large grass) 8 inches in diameter. The

first exposed section, seen about four miles further up the Sibjuli, presented

the Tertiary sandstones with a high dip, 75° SEH by S.: these are here very

dark and hard, thick-bedded, with a slight violet tint. They contain no

pebbles, and are of a different character from the outer or Dihirhi group

of beds. At the low pass over into the Harjuli they are thin-bedded, softer,

and vertical. Passing on northward, on the SH. spur from Tanir Peak,

the sandstones are horizontal, and evidently roll over at the Peak to 35°

NW., which is the dip all along the crest of this second ridge. Crossing it

and proceeding down the spur to the Dikrang, at the few places where the

sandstone is uncovered, the dip has become high to the North-west-ward.

But it was on the Dikrang itself that the most interesting section

was obtained. On following up the first and eastern stream on the right

bank of that river near Camp No. 6, below the village of Shikhi (Phekfis),

the first trace ofan older series of rocks was found, about a quarter of

a mile up the bed, where a dark, hard, heavy sandstone occurs, vertical

with a NE.—SW. strike. The soft Tertiary sandstones immediately suc-

ceed, having a local dip H. by S. 75°: they are much crushed, very thick.

bedded and micaceous, with scattered small pebbles, and they appear the

equivalents of the sandstones of Dihirhi. Proceeding up the bed of the

next stream (the largest, which I shall, for the sake of distinction, call the

Tanir jali,became it drains the northern face of the Tanir ridge), we first

come upon the Tertiary sandstones nearly perpendicular, strike SW.—NE. ;

a very few yards further on are clay shales, very dark and carbonaceous,

dip 70° high, NW. Some 50 yards further up the stream, the dip was

reversed to 75° ESH., with considerable crushing, and here occurred a

thick seam of black carbonaceous shale 5 to 6 feet thick, interstratified with

dark close-grained sandstones ; this can be traced along the strike NNH.—

SSW. for 200 yards, as it crosses the bed of the stream three times, It

is rather a crushed splintery coal than a shale, and no doubt would

prove better below the surface. Where now exposed it is either in the water

or just out of it, in fact, to see it at all one has to wade up the bed of the

stream, the jungle on the banks being too thick to move about in.

It was most interesting to come on these rocks in this position, as they

are no doubt the representatives of the Damitda Series lately examined and

worked out along the base of the Darjeeling and Western Bhutan mountains

by Mr. F. R. Mallet,* and first noticed by Dr, J. D. Hooker in 1849, near

* Memoirs of the Geological Survey of India, Vol. XI, Pt. I.

38 Godwin-Austen—On the Geology of [No. 1,

Pankabari. The coal seam has exactly the flaky structure described by

Mr. Mallet. The crushing to which it has been exposed has apparently

altered its original and probably even thickness, both the upper and lower

surfaces being waved irregularly, so that it never retains the same thickness

for many yards together along the strike. I could not find time to follow

the ravine further, but, at the head of the valley, a full section of these beds

would be found along the low ridge connecting the Tanir Lampah with the

Misa Parbat ridge. The boulders and gravel consisted principally of (1)

the hard sandstone of a pale blue slaty colour, the darkest often speckled

with minute grains of quartz (?); (2) a few of the soft Tertiary sandstones,

but these apparently soon get ground away; (8) a very hard lighter coloured

rock of the Damida Series; (4) some hard conglomerate; and (5) a few of

gneiss from the ridge on the north side of this valley, on which is the little

hamlet of Dapu.

I am inclined to think there is unconformity between this Damida

series and the sandstones, but the crushing is great and renders it very

difficult to make out clearly ; exposed sections being so very scarce. There

cannot, however, be here a greater thickness of Damudas than 1000 feet in

the area intervening between the sandstones and the quartzites and gneiss.

Overlying the denuded outcrop of the Damutdas, in this lateral valley, is

amass of sandy clay and large sub-angular blocks (some 15 feet long) of

the harder strata and quartzitic sandstones, &c. ; this, combined with the

dense forest, affords a geologist few opportunities of seeing much. The

Tanir jali marks the junction of the stratified rocks and the metamorphic

series, for some distance, by its wide open valley, the breadth correspond-

ing with the outcrop of the whole Damuda series. The valley of the

Dikrang corresponds with the continuation of this outcrop for a long dis-

tance to the NE.; its very probable extension westward is marked on the

map by several streams excavated on the main line of strike, alone the

base of the gneissic rocks.

Having once found this thick carbonaceous seam,* it was very easy to

follow it up. It crosses the Dikrang in a NH. direction and shews on

the left bank close to the suspension bridge, beyond which it leaves the

river and becomes covered up with alluvial deposits. Down the Dikrang

from this spot, a set of very hard compact sandstone strata, perpendi-

cular and shewing metamorphism, is exposed along the bed of the river,

and, about half a mile down, their junction with the unaltered soft Tertiary

sandstones is capitally displayed on the right bank. The latter rocks

have a high southerly dip, and although having the same strike, gave me a

still stronger impression of their unconformity.

* This coal would have to be worked up into an artificial Bac such as is described

by Mx. Mallet at page 60 of his memoir,

875. ] part of the Dafla Hills, Assam. 39

To the Damidas, quartzitic beds succeed, some very white, but I no-

where found an actual contact. On the road to the bridge built by the force

above Camp No. 6, a dark green rock is conspicuous by its very trappean

appearance: atthe bridge a very white quartzite underlies it, dipping 55° SE.

These metamorphic rocks have a regular strike SW.—N4EH., nowhere bet-

ter seen than from Zortputu ; that peak with the peaks of Dorkorpita and

Shengorh lymg in the main axis of elevation in a true NE.—SW. line.

The metamorphics seem to pass by degrees into micaceous schists and horn-

blendic gneiss (which was noticed 3 miles above the bridge), and then into

true granite with large feldspathic crystals, very similar to that of the North

Khasi Hills, at the Kollong rock, &. The peaks of Misa Parbat and

Shengorh are of this granite. Near Camp 9, under Nanang’s village, the

eneiss was very talcose, tale occurring in pieces of an inch square or more.

The quartzites, mica schists, &c., probably represent Mallet’s ‘“ Daling

Series.”

River-terraces of Recent Age.—Near the junction of the Tanir jili

with the Dikrang, a higher and a lower terrace are well-marked features :

they are composed of sand, clay, and large transported blocks, more or

less rounded. The lowest is well seen on the left bank about 20 feet

above the river bed at Camp6. The highest, between that and the

bridge about one mile above, has a thickness of some 125 feet. Their

deposition here no doubt occurred during the period of glacial exten-

sion throughout the Himalayan Range, and they would naturally have

accumulated more at the junctions of large lateral valleys than elsewhere.

The remains of these terraces are to be traced at intervals up the valley,

notably at Pachitah, but the highest is not seen in the valley below Na-

| nang’s village and above the junction of the Nitmtay.

The Burroi Gorge.—At the deep pool where the Tertiary sandstones

are first seen on the left bank there is an interesting section. ‘The beds

are dipping about 50° towards the plains; the denuded surface is smooth

and undulating, and here not more than 8 to 10 feet above the water level

(March). Proceeding up the river about a quarter of a mile to the next large .

pool, the same section is again seen, but the upper surface of denuded sand-

stone is there quite 15 to 20 feet above the river, shewing a very consider-

able slope of the old earth-surface from the hills. On this surface rests a

very recent series of iron-coloured sands and gravels, quite 60 or 70 feet

thick, nearly horizontal, but the very slight incline is towards the South-

ward. These beds abut against the older rocks, which soon commence to

’ rise into well-marked spurs from the outermost range.

These comparatively recent deposits are no doubt the same as those

composing the plateau at Behali Tea-garden, miles out in the plain towards

the Bramaputra, and also of the Bishnath plain, About 300 yards below

40 Godwin-Austen—On the Geology of [No. 1,

the first deep pool (where our camp was pitched), near the head of the

next rapid, the last of the Tertiary rocks is exposed in the water and about

a foot out of it, and dips south about 70°, the strata apparently

falling over into a sharp uniclinal. This feature I have introduced into

the section from Harmatti to the Tanir Ridge as it probably extends along

the whole base of the hills, but is covered with the more recent alluvial

deposits.

To the west of the Burroi, the sandstone range has a general dip

NE., but avery conspicuous longitudinal roll occurs at the second large

ravine west of the main gorge. The strata immediately east of this ravine

dip 50° W., while in the main gorge of the Burroi they have a general

easterly underlie, but are a good deal crushed and exhibit high dips. To

the west the beds are much less disturbed and again assume regular dips of

30° to 40° northerly, the whole series gradually ascending towards Gorusut-

tia to the main longitudinal axis of elevation. Looking at the hills 20

miles to the west of the Burroi, the dip of the lowest outer range appeared

20° southerly, producing a long even slope towards the plains.

The Bisnath Plain.—I first came on this remarkable portion of the

country, on the road between Rangsali and Burigaon, just after crossing the

Borgang, which has a wide sandy bed, but a volume of water not more than

half that of the Burroi. The rise is sudden out of the “ kadir’”’ land of the

former river, and about 20 to 25 feet, succeeded at from 200 to 300 yards

by another of perhaps 3 feet, but very distinctly marked. The surface is

perfectly flat, covered with a thin growth of grass, a few of the highest

stalks of which may be about 6 or 7 feet high, but it isa short grass for

Assam. Patches of forest of a few acres in extent are dotted about here

and there, their limits very defined and generally round or oval in shape.

The plateau ends abruptly on its southern side, towards the Brahmaputra,

but its edge is irregular in outline, having been scooped into by the river in

its wanderings from side to side. Traces of the former channel occur in the

re-entering angles, in long crescentic pieces of water fringed with marsh

and high reeds and grasses; these extend mile after mile to the main

river. The view from the plateau, especially off the back of an elephant,

is very fine, the dead level surface stretching afar, the line of horizon only

broken here and there by a solitary tree or by the embankment of some old

tank, for the day has been when all this area was thickly studded with villages.

The low scarps of the dry nulla east of Burigang rest-house shew that

there the plateau is sandy, and small rounded pebbles, mostly of quartz,

occur quite near the top of the section. On the Sudoro, however, away

from the influence of the ancient Borgang, red clay predominates, as well

as in the scarp to the west of Partabghar, where the plain of Bisnath ends.

The thickness of the alluvium here appears much greater, but there is no

1875.] part of the Dafla Hilis, Assam. 41

real increase ; the Giladeri nulla has cut into the alluvium and flows at its

very base, and, instead of the usual gradation of fall from terrace to terrace,

the whole thickness is seen at once and amounts to some 40 feet. The

high level of the Bisnath Plain is seen from here to extend on the north and

north-west by the tea-gardens of Diplonga and Dikro, and an isolated high

patch of alluvium occurs about 4 miles west of Sutia, gradually falling by

steps at long intervals into the present level of the land on both banks of the

Barowli. A series of accurate levels taken over this country would be most

interesting, but that it is of the same age as the clay plateau at Tezpur and

many other places in the Assam valley as far down as Gwalpara is certain.

It could only have been formed under very peculiar conditions,—in still water,

with the surface higher than it now is towards the delta, and with a far

larger water supply from the mountains; gradual subsidence in the direc-

tion of the delta to the extent of a few feet and change of climate would

soon model such outliers of an alluvium probably coeval with the extension

of the Himalayan glaciers, the fine mud and sand from which would form

just such clays and sands as the plateaus are composed of.

VIII.—WNote on the molluscan Genera Ceelostele, Benson and Francesia,

Paladithe, and on some species of Land-shells from Aden.— By W.

T. Buanrorp, Ff. #. S., F. GS.

(Received June 24th ;—Read July 7th, 1875.)

In the ‘ Annali del Museo Civico di Storia naturale di Genova’ for 1872,

Vol. III, p. 5, is a description by Dr. A. Paladilhe of Francesia, a sup-

posed new genus of Asiatic mollusks. As the typical form of the genus

was found in India by Benson, a short notice of this paper may be useful

to Indian naturalists, the more so as there is, I think, good reason for

doubting whether the genus is really undescribed, and there are some

details in the paper in question, and in a subsequent one, containing de-

scriptions of some mollusea from Aden, which require correction.

The genus Francesia was proposed by Dr. Paladilhe for a small species

found by M. Issel close to Aden, and recognised by its describer as

identical with a specimen from the banks of the Jumna sent to him by

Prof. Mousson. This Indian shell was received by Mousson from Benson

under the name of Carychiwm scalare. M. Paladilhe relates at length the

enquiries which he undertook in order to ascertain if this Carychiwm scalare

was described, and after consulting various authorities, amongst whom were

Messrs. Gwyn Jeffreys ana Hanley, he concluded that it was not; Myr.

6

42 - W. T. Blanford—On the Identity of the [No. I,

Hanley assuring him that the name could not even be found in Benson’s ma-

nuscripts.

It is quite true that no such species as Carychiwm scalare was ever

described, but I cannot help feeling some surprise that none of the natural-

ists consulted should have noticed that a description of the shell was pub-

lished by Benson in 1864 as the type of a new genus under the name of

Coilostele (more correctly Celostele) scalaris.* There cannot, 1 think, be

any hesitation in identifying the species ; the types were procured from the

banks of the Jumna and Betwa, and the new genus Coilostele is, though with

some little doubt, ascribed to the Awriculacea and compared with Cary-

chium. ‘The description agrees in all the external characters of the shell

with that given by Dr. Paladilhe ; in the latter, it is true, no mention is made

of the absorption of the axis in the apical whorls, from which character the

name Ce@lostele is derived, but this might be easily overlooked, and there

cannot, I think, be much doubt as to the identity of the two genera Celos-

tele and Francesia, the former name having priority by 8 years.

There appears, however, to be a specific distinction between the Indian

and Arabian forms which has escaped the notice of Dr. Paladilhe. The

Indian C. scalaris is described by Mr. Benson as smooth (éesta levi hyalina

nitida), whilst the Aden Francesia scalaris is said to be finely and very

regularly marked with very elegant rather flexuous costulations. I have

recently procured specimens of the Indian form from the neighbourhood

of Karachi in Sind, which agree with Mr. Benson’s description and are

entirely destitute of costulation.

As has already been mentiored, the genus Celostele was referred by

Benson, though not with great certainty, to the Awriculide, his principal

reason being that he found the axis of the spire to be obsolete or absorbed

as in Awricula, Pythia,and several other genera of Auwriculide.t Paladilhe

looked upon his Francesia scalaris as probably a fresh water mollusk, and

he proposed to attach it provisionally to the family of the Lymneide.t

His principal reason, as he states, for believing it to be of aquatic origin,

was that the numerous specimens examined by him had the whole shell and

especially the aperture free from clay or mud, whereas he had noticed that

small terrestrial mollusca, such as Pupa, Vertigo, &c. when left on the banks

of torrents or rivers by floods (the position in which alone C. scalaris has

* Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 8, XIII, p. 186. See also Zool. Record, 1864,

p. 285 under Auriculacea.

+ I find that the axis is equally wanting in the upper part of the spire in Sind spe-

cimens.

{ He subsequently explained that in his opinion it was allied to the singular little

genus Moitesseria, which is said to be aquatic, and on this account he had believed it

allied to the freshwater pulmobranchs (Issel. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen. IV, p. 525).

1875.] molluscan Genera Celostele and Francesia, fe. 43

hitherto been found), have their surface more or less dirty and their orifice

filled with detritus, the reverse being the case with fluviatile species.

Issel, who collected the Aden specimens, in a paper published* soon

after that by Paladilhe, gives his reasons for disputing the systematic posi-

tion assigned to Francesia by its author, and for considering it a terrestrial

and not a fluviatile mollusk, In his opinion it belongs to the Helicida,

and is allied to Bulimus. He points out certain characters which it has

in common with Stenogyra, Cecilianella and Hnnea.~ I think that there

ean be very little doubt as to the correctness of Issel’s view so far as the

terrestrial nature of the mollusk is concerned, and that his opinion of its

affinities to the Helicide are more probable than Benson’s supposition that

the genus belongs to the Awriculide, or Paladilhe’s that it should be as-

signed to the neighbourhood of the Lymneide. I cannot see that the

absorption of the spiral axis, the character upon which alone Benson appears

to have relied, is sufficient evidence of affinity, because it is found in gaste-

ropodous genera belonging to widely different families, e. g., in Nerita,

and there is no other character in which the shell of Czlostele scalaris

is shewn to have any close resemblance to dAuricuwla; whilst the reason

assigned by Paladilhe for supposing his genus Francesia fluviatile, the com-

plete freedom of the shell, and especially of the orifice, from clay or sand

is certainly an insufficient argument, at all events in those countries in

which Celostele has hitherto been found. I have just examined a small

collection of minute shells, picked out from flood deposits in Sind, and

amongst them I have found several specimens of Planorbis and Bythinia

with their aperture filled with sand, whilst this appears to be very rarely

indeed the case with the minute <Achatina balanus of Benson, a species

which Paladilhe assigns to Francesia, but evidently without having a clear

idea of the species, for he, immediately afterwards, unless I am greatly

mistaken, redescribes it as a new species under the name of Cecilianella

Isseli.

It is very singular that the animal of 4. dalanus should never have

been observed and that we should be as much in doubt about its real

affinities as we are about those of Calostele. I amstrongly disposed to believe

that it is very closely allied to a shell described by Crosse from New Cale-

donia under the name of Greostilbia Caledonica.t The figure representing this

form might almost be mistaken for that of Achatina balanus, but the geogra-

phical position of Geostilbia Caledonica is unfavorable to its identification with

* Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen. IV, p. 521.

+ This genus does not belong to the Helicide but to a distinct family. Conf. Dohrn,

Malakoz. Blatt. XIII, p. 129; and Stoliczka J. A. 8. B., 1871, XL, pt. 2, p. 159.

{ M. Crosse very kindly gave me a specimen of this shell, but I have unfortunates

ly left it in England and am unable to compare it with Achatina balanus.

44 W. T. Blanford—On the Identity of the [No. 1,

the Indian species, which is found in the drier parts of India and apparently in

other parts of South-western Asia where the fauna has Arabian and African

affinities. The animal of Gleostilbia has not been examined, but it is said to

live underground. It is far from improbable that both Cewlostele sealaris

and Achatina balanus have a similar habitat, and this would account for

their not having hitherto been observed living.

I think that there is some possibility too that these forms may be

allied to Hnnea, Streptaxis, and Streptostele. All have the very peculiar

glassy structure characteristic of the Streptaride. If this be the case, the

animal will probably be brightly coloured, yellow or scarlet, or both. It

is to be hoped that some Indian naturalist may succeed in obtaining these

species alive and determining their affinities.

If the opinions above expressed be correct, the synonymy of the two

forms of Celostele will be the following :

1. C@LOSTELE SCALARIS.

Ooilostele scalaris, Benson, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., 1864, Ser. 3, XIII, p. 136.

Hab.—Western and North-western India.

2, C@LOSTELE sp.

Francesia scalaris, Paladilhe, Ann. Mus. Civ. St. Nat. Gen., 1872, III, p. 10, Pl. T

fig. 1-4.—Issel, ib, IV, p. 521, 580.

Hab.—Aden in Arabia and Sek Said Island, Dahalac Archipelago,

Red Sea.

I do not propose anew name for the second species, although I think

it requires one, because I have a great dislike to giving names to species

which I have not seen, because there is still a possibility that the genus

Francesia may not be identical with Celostele, as the peculiar character of

the latter, the absorption of the axis in the upper whorls, has not been ob-

served in the former, and thirdly because I consider the practice so prevalent

amongst some naturalists of giving new names to everything they are unable

to identify extremely objectionable and lable to cause confusion. I trust,

however, that either M. Issel or M. Paladilhe will re-examine the Aden shell,

and, if, as I anticipate, it proves to belong to the genus Celostele, re-name it.

Besides Francesia scalaris, the following species are described from

Aden by M. Paladilhe :

1. Bulimus Yemenensis. 6. Limicolaria Bourgignati.

2, B. Samavaensis, Mousson MS. 7. Ennea Isseli.

3. B. vermiforius. 8. Pupa Antinori.

4. B. cerealis. 9. Cecilianella Isseli.

5. B. lucidissimus. 10. Physa Beccariw.

1875.] mollusean Genera Coelostele and Francesia, fe. 45

Of these, Cecilianella Isseli* I believe, as I have already stated, to be

identical with Achatina balanus of Benson. Bulimus Samavaensis, B.

cerealis and B. vermiformis appear all to be varieties of the widely spread

and variable Pupa cenopicta, Hutton. This has already been indicated

in the ease of B. cerealis and B. vermiformis by Morelet (Ann. Mus. Civ.

III, p. 201.) and Issel states that B. Samavaensis has also been identified

with B. cenopictus by the same naturalist.| It is quite true that the

shells named by M. Paladilhe present well marked differences, and that the

circumstance of all being found in one place is opposed to the idea of their

being races of one species. At the same time it does not follow that all

these forms inhabit the same spot because their shells are carried down by

the same torrent and mingled in the flood deposits, and I have similarly

found two or three varieties together in various parts of India. I have

examined a large number of specimens from the drier parts of India, from

Upper Burma, Persia, and Abyssinia, and although there are several well

marked forms deserving distinctive names, I am inclined to believe that all

pass into each other. At the same time I am not prepared to admit with

M. Jickeli, as quoted by Issel,(Ann. Mus. Civ. IV, p. 528, note), that these

tropical shells are identical with the North American Pupa fallax of Say.

T have not access to Jickeli’s original paper, and cannot say on what his

opinion is founded. Puwpa fallax is found in various parts of the United

States, and the peristome is edentulous, and entirely destitute of the parietal

tooth which is found more or less developed close to the posterior angle of

the aperture in all forms of B. eenopictus. Even should some shells of B.

cenopictus be undistinguishable from some of P. fallax it would, I think

be well to compare the animals before uniting the two.

Issel has pointed out that Limicolaria Bourgignati belongs rather to

Stenogyra than to the genus to which M. Paladilhe assigned it. I am un-

able to distinguish it from a very common variety of Stenogyra (Opeas)

gracilis (Bulimus gracilis, Hutton). M. Paladilhe considers it a peculiarly

African form, but Stenogyra gracilis is found not only in India proper but

in the Malay region.

It is remarkable that amongst the shells found near Aden, no form of

Bulimus insularis (B. pullus, Gray) should have been comprised. One has

* My attention was called to this and some of the other identifications given be-

low by my friend Mr. G. Nevill.

+ Ann. Mus. Civ. IV, p. 527. I cannot however find the species mentioned by

Morelet; can M. Issel has mistaken Sennaarensis which Morelet does identify with P.

cenopicta tor Samavaensis 2

{ Ann, Mus. Civ. IV, p. 523, note.

46 W. T. Blanford—On the Identity, Se. [No. 1,

been described by Pfeiffer under the name of B. Adenensis. The species is

at least as variable and nearly as widely spread as B. canopictus.*

P. S.—Whilst the preceding paper was passing through the press, I

received a letter from Colonel R. H. Beddome, in which he told me that he

had compared, under the microscope, a specimen of G‘eostilbia Caledonica

with a shell which he found in north Canara, and that they were identical.

Now the north Canara shell was in all probability Achatina balanus, and

if this be the case, it follows that the identity of that form with G. caledo-

nica which I have long suspected, and to which I have referred at p. 43, is

not merely generic, but specific.

* Tn an excellent account of the land and freshwater shells of Borneo by Issel, also

published in the Annali del Museo Civico, Vol. VI, p. 366, I am credited with the

authorship of the genus Optediceros. This is a mistake. I never invented the genus, but

I shewed (Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 3, XIX, p. 381) that Optediceros of Leith,

described in the Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, Vol. V,

p. 145, is identical with Asstminea. I think, too, it is to be regretted that a shell like

Assiminea cornea, Pfeiffer nec Leith, should still be referred to Hydrocena, and Assimi-

nea carinata, Lea to Omphalotropis. Martens long since pointed out (Malakoz. Blatt.

1864, p. 142,) that the type of Hydrocena belongs to a very different family, (Georissa is

very close to it if not identical,) whilst I have shewn (Ann. and Mag. N. H. 4, III, p.

340) that Omphalotropis belongs to the Cyclostomide. Assiminea on the other hand is a

Rissoid.

JOURNAL

OF THE

PerATIC SOCIETY:

— a

Part II.—PHYSICAL SCIENCE.

No. II].—1875.

ON OO eee

IX.—On the General Theory of Duplex Teleqraphy.

By Louis SCHWENDLER.

(Continued from Vol. XLIII, Part II, 1874.)

In the two preceding investigations* I have given the solution of the

Jirst problem for the bridge method. ‘This solution established the general

result of the double balance being the best possible arrangement for the

bridge method. In the present paper I shall endeavour to find the solution

of the first problem for the differential method, which in practical impor-

tance ranges second to the bridge-method.

II. Differential method.+

This arrangement for duplex working is based on the well-known me-

thod, of comparing electrical resistances ‘‘ differential method,’ and Fig. 2

gives the general diagram when this method is applied for duplex working.

* J. A. S. B., Vol. XLIII, Part II, 1874, pp. 1 and 218; Phil. Mage., Vol. 48,

1874, p. 117 and Vol. 49, 1875, p. 108; Journal Telegraphique, Vol. II, p. 580.

+ The differential method was originally invented, as stated before, by Mr. Frischen,

and Messrs. Siemens and Halske. A particular case of this method was patented by

them in England in 1854.

7

48 Louis Schwendler—On the General [No. 2,

Fig. 2.

Explanation of the Diagram.

E, electromotive force of the signalling battery.

B, internal resistance of the signalling battery.

k, a constant resistance key.

aand b, the coils of the receiving instrument. These coils, for any sent currert,

have opposite magnetic effects with respect to any given magnetic pole external to

the coils; while for any received current, these coils add their effects with respect

to that same magnetic pole. By a and 6 shall also be designated the resistances of

the coils. :<

d,w, f, and h are certain resistanees, the necessity of which will become clear

hereafter.

i, the resistance of the resultant fault of the line, acting at a distance 7 from Sta-

tion I, and at a distance 7” from Station II, (both 7? and /” expressed im resistances,

so that ? + /”== TL equal the “real conduction resistance” of the line).

The other terms, viz. L’, L”, p’, p”, c’, ce”, &c., which will necessarily be of frequent

occurrence also in this paper, will bear the same physical meaning here as before.

The practical inferiority of the differential method, when compared with

the bridge method, it will be clear at once, is that specially constructed

receiving instruments on the differential principle are required. That, there-

fore, the introduction of Duplex Telegraphy based on the differential method

would at once involve also a total change of the receiving imstruments

hitherto used. This is clearly a serious disadvantage from an administra-

1875.] Theory of Duplex Telegraphy. 49

tive and financial point of view. But besides this, without going into de-

tails, the differential method has also a very serious objection from a techni-

eal point of view. While in the bridge method the balance is obviously

independent of the resistance of the receiving instrument, in the differential

method the balance is clearly a function of the resistances of the two coils of

which the receiving instrument consists, and as these two coils may alter

their resistances independently, and not in proportion as indicated by the

balance equation, a new element of disturbance is introduced, which the

bridge method does not possess.

Besides this, differential instruments are necessarily mechanically more

complicated than others, and require therefore superior workmanship, en-

tailing greater expense to arrive at working efficiency.

General expressions for the two functions ‘‘ D” and “8.”

In order to obtain the two functions D and S, we have to develop the

general expressions for p, P, and Q ; say for Station I.

p in our particular case is the force exerted by the two coils a’ and 0’

on one and the same magnetic pole when Station I is sending and Station IT

is at rest. This force is clearly the difference of the two forces exerted by the

‘coils a’ and 0’.

Thus we have

p =A wn —Bwv

where A’ and B’ are the currents which pass through the two coils a’ and 0’

respectively, when Station I is sending and Station II is at rest, while m/’

and 7’ are the forces exerted by these coils when the unit current passes

through them. At baldnce in Station I, p’ =o

Further P= A’ m +B’ n’

where @ and 38’ are the currents which pass through the coils @ and 0’ re«

spectively, when Station IL is sending and Station I is at rest (single

signals).

Further = PF! um + gn

where y’ and qg’ are the currents which pass through a’ and 8’ respectively

_ when both stations are sending simultaneously (duplex signals).

To get the most general expressions for these three forces p, P, and Q,

we have to fix the signs of the two terms of which they consist. This is

best done by considering the forces m and 7 as absolute numbers, and deter-

mining the direction in which they act with respect to one and the same

magnetic pole by the direction of the currents passing through the coils

a and 0.

To fix the signs of the currents, we shall call, arbitrarily, that current

positive which passes through the coil @ in the sending station, when the

negative pole of the signalling battery is joined to earth.

50 Louis Schwendler—On the General [No. 2,

Further, if we suppose at the outset, that the movement of the key &

does not alter the complex resistance p of its own station, z. e., the fulfil-

ment of the key equation

Ww if.

a condition which is essential, it is clear that the currents y’ and g’ are the

algebraical sums of the currents A’, @’ and SB’, 33’ respectively, whence it

follows that

QO = (A + AD) a’ + (BD + BD)’

where the currents contain the signs.

Now, with respect to the manner of connecting up the two signalling

batteries H’ and HL”, we have the following two different cases :

1st. The same pole of the signalling battery is connected to earth in

each station, thus :

pHtAw tw’

P=—+AAm + Br

V=(4 HFN w+ GPE)

where the upper signs are to be used when the negative poles of the signal-

ling batteries are connected to earth in both stations, and the lower signs

when the positive poles of the signalling batteries are connected to earth in,

both stations.

2nd. Opposite poles of the signalling batteries are connected to earth

in the two stations, thus:

WS aewie =. IB

Po se A) aioe

Q(t AEH) wi + EB LBW

where the upper-signs are to be used when the negative pole in Station I

and the positive pole in Station II are connected to earth, and the lower

signs when the reverse is the case.

Subtracting in either of these two eases P’ from Q’, it will be seen that

invariably

SS Yl

or that, on account of having fulfilled the key equation w + 6B = f the

difference of force by which single and duplex signals are produced is equal

in magnitude and sign to the force by which balance is disturbed. Further,

that it is perfectly immaterial whether the same or opposite poles of the

signalling batteries are put to earth. For reasons already explained I pre=

fer to use the negative poles of the signalling batteries to earth in both

stations, and this alternative we will suppose is adopted.

Thus we have:

p=Am—Br

P’ = — (A a’ + Bn)

Y= (L— A) im’ — (BP + Be’

1875.] Theory of Duplex Telegraphy. 51

If we now substitute for 4’, B’, A’, %’ their values, we get :

ro,

P ay >

RR’ bY + dl” we

—— i mr

EB” (b” aE d’ aa KE }

eee +

the sign of p’ being contained in A’, and

where

N=fU+dtd4+V+e4+ Utd) Wth +e)

N’=f' Ot d’pa’ th’ +e) + +a) ath’ +e’)

7 9 ead aie

BK eer] == iP ae p

VY=—(0U4+d)m—@W+h+e)n

Xr S= 1) + ee nr

Thus the general expressions for the two functions D and S are:

ee |

‘< aa en oe for Station I.

PLS ia el

7 ig A J

4} 7} WN’ INV

and .D” — Be z£ : }

Pp” = x’ NW’ b’ Ll’ ; A nN!

” Coa rfor Station IT.

uy) u" E ,

Rigid fulfilment of the two functions D = 0 and S =o.

D can only become zero, for finite resistances of the branches, if

a0

a, @. ib py == V)

Now, to keep A = 0 we may adopt two essentially different modes of

re-adjustment, namely :—

Either leave the coils and their armatures stationary, and adjust ba-

lance by altering the resistances of the branches (a + /) and (0 + d) sepa-

rately or simultaneously, or leave the resistances of these branches constant,

and move the coils or their armatures. These two cases are to be consi-

dered separately.

(a.) Re-adjustment of balance by altering the resistances of the

branches.

Asaand 6 are resistances which in the form of coils have to exert

magnetic force, it is impracticable to suppose them variable. If they have

been once selected, they must necessarily be kept constant, whence it follows

52 Louis Schwendler—On the General [No. 2,

that the re-adjustment of balance is restricted to a variation of the resis-

tances h and d.

But as p is a function of % and d, to establish balance by altering one

of them only, would invariably result in an alteration of p, and consequently

immediate balance would become an impossibility.

Thus in order to readjust balance, and at the same time to keep p

constant,* we must vary / and d simultaneously.

Now, it can be proved in exactly the same manner for the differential

method as it was for the bridge, that in order to make the disturbance

of balance for any given variation in the system as smallas possible we must

make p as large as possible, whence it follows from the form of p that

f=b+d

the “ regularity condition” for the differential method.

But since

f=wtp

it follows that to re-establish balance by an alteration of the resistances h

and d while a, b, B, and p keep constant, we have to vary ali the four bran-

ches h, d, w and f simultaneously, in such a manner that their variations

fulfil the following condition:

of = dd = dw = — (2 bh)

which is simple enough to allow of its practical application ; but which

nevertheless shows again the inferiority of the differential method as com-

pared with the dowble balance, i. e., in order to fulfil immediate balance, the

key equation, and the regularity condition for the differential method, we

have to make the four branches of the system simultaneously variable, while

in the double balance the same effect can be obtained by having one branch

only variable (the 6 branch).

It is worth while to mention here that there is a special case of obtain-

ing «immediate balance for the differential method by the adjustment in one

branch, namely, when f= 0, for then p would be independent of d, and

therefore balance could be obtained by varying d without altering p.

However, on account of the key equation f== w + f, it would follow

from f == 0, that 6 must be zero also, which represents a physical impossi-

bility masmuch as the internal resistance of galvanic cells cannot be reduced

2 0 ar 10 oP aes of

keep a, 6 and f constant and vary / and d, whence we should have:

p= (0+d+f)/b+d+f + Sd) dh + f? d=0

an equation, which it is always possible to fulfil for any variations of / and d if taken of

opposite signs, although it may be difficult to achieve it practically by a simple motion,

such as that of turning a handle. The absolute value of these variations depends of

course on the variation of ¢ which disturbs the balance, and in order to have accelerated

balance we ought to decrease / and increase d when ¢ increases, and vice versa.

1875.] Theory of Duplex Telegraphy. 53

to zero, not even approximately. Besides the 5. mu. F. requisite for duplex

working being necessarily comparatively large, 8 will always be a quantity

which cannot be neglected against the other resistances of the system, even

if the single cells were of small resistance.

But supposing it were practicable to construct a battery of exceedingly

low internal resistance, then, as f== 6b + d, it would be necessary to make

6 = o and d = 0 another physical impossibility, as 6 must consist of con-

volutions to produce magnetism, and d must be variable to produce balance.

This solution f= 6 + d=w + ~ =o, or even each of these three

branches of an only exceedingly small resistance, must therefore be rejected.

(6.) Adjustment of balance by moving the coils or armatures.

This, it will be clear, is the solution for immediate balance, for such a

mode of adjustment would involve no relation between the resistances of the

three branches, leaving their determination free for other purposes. In order

that the slightest movement of the two coils, or their armatures, may pro-

duce the required balance, it will be best to move both the coils or armatures

simultaneously in the same direction. In fact to beable to produce balance,

no matter how great the variation in the resistance of the line may become,

it will be necessary to make the coils movable for the changes of seasons,

and the armatures for the daily changes.

Tt is clear that the differential method, when-balance is adjusted by the

movement of the coils or armatures, can alone be compared in efficiency with

the double balance, and the superiority of the latter is most striking, While

ammediate balance, and the fulfilment of the other two essential conditions,

ean be obtained with the double balance method within any given range by a.

variation of the resistance in one single branch (@ branch), this same result

- with the differential method can only be arrived at by either supposing four

branches simultaneously variable, or by supposing the coils and armatures

movable,—both pre-supposing complicated mechanical arrangements requir-

ing delicate workmanship and being lable to get out of order.

Rapid approximation of the two functions D and S towards zero.

Supposing the fulfilment of the key equation as one of the most egsen-

tial conditions, we know that

p = S for each station invariably.

Now for Station I we have

where

LY’ = (V+ da)’ —(ae +h +c’)

N’ = f’ (0 aed, oe a’ + h’ + c’) + (v’ “+ d’) (a’ + h’ + c’)

If we call ¢/ that value of the measured circuit, which for any given

values of the two branches 0’ + d’ and a’ + h’ produces balance in Station

54 Louis Schwendler—On the General [No. 2,

I, 2. e. for which A’ = 0, then if ¢’ varies dc’, we have A’ = n’ &¢’, while WV’

becomes WV’ + dN’.

Thus we have

‘ 5 OR

Cem ee

ve E’ vn’ 6c’

Tie? , Saas rr

a h ne Y f

+ 1 mea ee

b’ + d’

but as a& + hh’ + eee, =p’ the complex resistance in Station I, and

as further dc’ can be neglected against c’, we have finally :

nw 6c’

Oe! fey et oem

Further m’, the force exerted by the coil 6’ on a given magnetic pole

when the unit current passes through the coil, can be expressed as follows :

7 / Ba

where 2” is a coefficient depending only on the dimensions and shape of the

coil, on the manner of coiling the wire, and on the integral distance of the

coil from the magnetic pole acted upon.

Thus: we have

Go Ee a. 8

Ttf sd Je

Now supposing the factor W’ constant,f S’ becomes smaller the

smaller 6 is. :

In the second part it has been proved quite generally that @ decreases

permanently with increasing p’ p”, no matter to what special cause the vari-

ation of ¢’ is due, whence again it follows that p should be a maximum.

From the form of p however we see that for any given sum 6 + f + d,

p becomes largest if

fab4d

which is “ the regularity condition” of the differential method.

* This expression supposes that the thickness of the insulating covering of the wire

can be neglected against the diameter of the wire, which is allowable. 7’ is a constant

with respect to 0’.

,

+ That WV’ can be kept constant while 6’ decreases and oe varies, and f?+ & + d

is constant, it will be clear is possible, for if d’ =o the variation of b’ + d’ may be

considered entirely due to a variation of d’, equal and opposite in sign to the variation

of f’. If d’=o0 then we must consider r’ variable with J’ in order to keep JV’ constant

7

while, varies, which is admissible since the position of the coils has not been fixed as

yet.

1875.] Theory of Duplex Telegraphy. 55

To have S’ therefore for any variation as small as possible, we must

make f= 6-+ d. Substituting this value of fwe get an expression for S’

which shows that it has an absolute maximum for 0 but no minimum, from

which we conclude that 6 should be made either very much smaller or very

much larger than the value which corresponds to a maximum of S, but no fixed

relation between 6 and d or a can be found.

In order to prove that 6 + d =f is the solution, we must now show

that it also makes D as small as possible.

S

But as ae

we have only to show that the regularity condition 6 + d= f, makes P

either as large as possible, or, which would be still better, a maximum.

Now

IP se AY ay WY

where A’ is the current which enters the line at point 2 (Fig. 2) when

Station IT is sending alone, while pv’ is the factor which determines the loss

through leakage of the line, and 2’ is the factor to which the magnetic force,

exerted by the current A” yw’ in Station I, is proportional.

p as well as X’ are functions of the resistances in Station I only* but

not of those in Station IT.

Now for constant values of ’ and X’ (2. e. leaving everything in Station I

constant) P’ becomes larger the larger A” is:

W q

A" — BE" b ee d

Substituting its value for VV”, and dividing numerator and denominator

-by 6” + d”, we get

Pa

— - oad (a” + h") - 7H! ‘ She

DOS a te)

Supposing balance in Station IT rigidly fulfilled, we have

(6"+ d’) m" — (a" + h" + 0’) n" =0.

am!

2 oC = (b" + d’)— —(a" +h’).

nv’

Substituting this value of ¢” in the expression for 4” and reducing,

we get

Ky’ y! Jf b"

Wl ve _s

af y! vV/ b! + q’ (o" zip dq! =a V/ a!

o -

a es :. ae nt

ee ME fi+Urd

8

56 Louis Schwendler—On the General [No. 2,

i

Dividing by gq’, and putting 7 = 0’ we have

o” o/b!

ft y! r/o" + (b” ae Gf! io fh / a

This expression has a maximum* for

b” = i" +- Q 4

which contradicts the regularity condition f = b + dso long as dis different

from zero.

Thus, in order to fulfil the regularity condition, and the maximum

current, for the differential method simultaneously, we must put up

d—0

It has, however, been shewn that in order to have immediate balance,

when adjusting balance by a variation in the resistances, we have to

alter the resistances of the four branches 6 + d,a +h, f, and w + f simul-

taneously according to a relation already given. ‘Thus it is proved that

adjustment of balance by an alteration of the resistances must be rejected,

since, as pointed out before, a variation of the resistances of the coil 6 is

impracticable.

We are obliged, therefore, to adjust balance by moving the coils or

their armatures, and the further solution of the problem is only required,

when this mode of adjustment is adopted.

A! = zE’

Maximun magnetic moment.

It has now been proved that d is to be made zero, in order to be able

to fulfil the conditions of regularity and maximum current simultaneously ;

and that therefore, to obtain immediate balance, readjustment of balance is

to be effected by a movement of the two coils @ and 6 or their armatures,

and not, as has been generally proposed, by an alteration of the resistance

in the branches (a + h) and (6 + d).

Hence / appearing in the denominator of P only, and h =» o not being

any more required for adjusting balance, the best value we can give to h

1s :—

L— 0

which will make P, obviously largest.}

* Tn order to keep the balance in Station IT rigid when 4” varies we must suppose

o” simultaneously variable with 4”. This is perfectly justified, for 7” can be altered by

an appropriate movement of the coils to keep up the balance in Station IL without al-

tering the outgoing current A”.

+ The resistances d and h, without exerting magnetic force, were originally intro-

duced in order to investigate the possibility of adjusting balance by an alteration of the

resistances in the branches. But since it has been shown that this mode of adjustment

is to be rejected it is of course clear that the dead resistances in these branches should

be made zero when P will become largest.

1875.] Theory of Duplex Telegraphy. 57

Substituting therefore in the expression for P

h= d =O

f= + p=

we get

iz oe UM for Station I

Ce Se a

and

Ki’

2@+c)+v

These two expressions do not as yet contain the balance conditions.

a ris ONE ,, Station II.

, ,

The factor = a

ne factors 5 (+o) +0" and 2 (a Hegre

are identical, namely :—

/ i

alk Be ae?

BQ +e te 2@+ej+h Q

Where Qaif2Wea tery tutus

$V) WATE) + @ tN HU 40)

as can be easily calculated by sustituting for w and ¢ their known values.

In the second investigation it has been stated why P’ and P” cannot

be made maxima separately, and that we could do nothing else but make

their sum amaximum. In this case we have to do the same. Hence the

question to be solved is reduced to the following :

BE” N + HX’

Q

‘is to be made a maximum with respect to the variables a, b, g andr, while

they are linked together by two condition equations, namely :—-

r (@+e)— VAN a b’ —o balance in Station I

and vr’ (a” & ce”) — g'/ a" b" == 0 yy saeea! WE

This general problem can be solved in exactly the same way as it was

in the second investigation. It is however not needed to do this again,

since the general solution can be written down from inference, after having

solved the special problem for a line which is perfect in insulation.

Suppose that 2 == o, or at least very large as compared with J + I’

= IL, then obviously Pp and = become identical without condition,

FD ex JEP, FBT

namely :—

PP’ = P’ = _ £ 2g a+ ra/b

4 L+2a+40

while the two balance equations become also identical namely :—

29Vab—rdatb42L)=0

58 Louis Schwendler—On the General [No. 2,

If we substitute the value of 7 from the balance equation in the expres-

sion for P, we get

P=H qd. Benen ate

4a+2L0+56

which has an absolute maximum with respect to a only, namely

L b

im =

Substituting this value of @ in the last expression for P we get :

Eq 1

Whence it follows that P becomes largest for 6 = 0, otherwise db re-

mains indeterminate; g on the other hand should be made as large as

possible.

If we now put v = = and develope its value from the balance equa-

tion, we get

r 1 b

WN ESE

The solution of the 1st problem of the differential method, when the

line is perfect in insulation, is therefore

h=d—o

Ff =b=w+Ae

ih @

m2 4

oo /

2V 2 L + 6

The absolute value of 6 is left indeterminate,* and we only know that

the smaller it can be made the better.

But to fulfil this best condition f= 6 = w + 6 =o represents a

physical impossibility, since neither 8, the internal resistance of constant

galvanic cells, can be made zero, not even approximately, nor 6, which must

have convolutions in order to act magnetically.

The larger f= 6 == w + B becomes, for practical reasons, the more

the differential method, even under the best quantitative arrangements as

given above, will become inefficient as compared with the double balance.

* Practically, however, it may be said, that 4 is given; for generally 8, the inter-

nal resistance of the signalling battery is determined by the nature and number of

galvanic cells required for duplex working. We must only remember that 8 should be

made somewhat larger than £, in order to have an adjustable resistance w in the battery

branch, which may be used for compensating any variation of the battery resistance?

that the equation f= 0 = w + B may be permanently fulfilled,

1875.] Theory of Duplex Telegraphy. 59

Now by inference we get for a line with leakage, 7. e, 7 ©

flo eek b' 7

amg A

oy BRS 6”

iA — ae -+- =

L Approxinately.

|

2 4

y = a wv lian

INV 2 L/ +0’

Vecaue of b”

OY — = PARANA

2NV2L/+b" J

The above values for a and v are somewhat too large, but in practical

application they are quite correct enough.

The physical reason that this solution for the differential method gives

an indeterminate result, is simply due to the fact that the force which pro-

duces the signals in the differential method is due to the combined magnetic

actions of ¢wo separate coils through which unequal currents pass, instead of

to one coil, as in the bridge method. On account of b = f, it follows that

the current which passes through the 6 coil is only half of that passing

through the @ coil. Thus, in order to make the most of the arrived currents,

6 and f should be both equal to zero, or, in other words, placing all the

convolutions in @ and none in 6 must clearly give the greatest magnetic

force. Obviously, however, such a solution could not fulfil the balance con-

dition in the sending station.

The value of 6 should be chosen as small as practicable and its minimum

value is 6, the internal resistance of the signalling battery. How much

larger 6 should be taken, depends on the absolute variation of £, 7. e., on the

constancy of the resistance of the signalling battery. If the battery is very

constant with respect to internal resistance, then 6 need be only very little

larger than 8, which determines the adjustable resistance w.

For instance minotto cells can be easily prepared with an internal re-

sistance of 10 B. A. U. per single cell. Their minimum resistance, obtained

by working, is never less than 5 B. a. v., andif the zincs are changed from

time to time, their maximum resistance will scarcely ever be higher then

10 B. A. U.

Hence to make 6 about 50°/, larger than 6 will suffice, by which, if

f is known, the greatest value of w is fixed.

The absolute value of @ can be determined from the number of cells

which have to be connected up successively, in order to work a given instru-

ment through a given line, when the circuit Fig. 2 is adopted. This abso-

lute value of 8 will therefore not only depend on the electrical state of the

line and the nature of the cells, but also on the absolute sensitiveness of the

differential instrument employed.

GO Louis Schwendler—On the General [No. 2,

To make £ therefore as small as possible, a sensitive construction of the

differential instrument becomes requisite ; further cells of high £, m. F. and

low constant resistance are best adapted for forming the signalling battery.

In order to get the widest limits in the variation of w it is clear that that B

should be selected which is calculated from the maximum number of cells

required to produce the signals with sufficient force. The greatest number

of cells is obviously required when the line is at its lowest insulation, in

India during the monsoon.

Lie 3 :

The value »== — is what has been termed the mechanical arrangement

of the differential instrument.*

If 6 =w + Bf has been determined by fixing f, then v has its smallest

value for Z largest, which is the case when the line is perfect in insulation ;

when the coil a must be closest to the magnetic pole acted upon, and the

coil 6 furthest away from it.

The highest value of v we obtain by substituting the lowest JZ, z. e.

when the line is at its lowest insulation ; when the coil 6 must be nearest to

the magnetic point acted upon, and the coil a furthest away from it.

Hence the two limits of » being fixed by the known limits between

which Z varies, the extent of movement of the two coils is also fixed, and

consequently, if g is chosen arbitrarily, the construction of the differential

instrument is determined. But even q is not quite arbitrary, since we know

the form, dimensions and resistance of the coils, which, for instance, in Sie-

mens’ polarized relays on any given line, have to produce the magnetism in

single circuit to get the signals with engineering safety.

The solution of the 1st problem of the differential method is therefore:

1. Balance in each station must be obtained by a

movement of the two acting coils or their armatures,

either singly or better simultaneously in the same di-

rection, and vot by an alteration of the resistances in the

branches.

2. If this mode of adjusting balance be adopted, then the solution is :

d=h=

f =b=—=wtf

Lb

2

vat ag /,b

q 24av2L+b

Tt will now be clear that the given solution fulfils the following essen-

tial conditions :

77), A. 2b. VOl ul Pt. eaoaslias:

Phil. Mag., Vol. XLIV, p. 166,

1875.] Theory of Duplex Telegraphy. 61

(i). Any variation of the resistance in the total system has the least

possible disturbing effect on the recewing instrument.

(ii). Any disturbance of balance can be eliminated by an appropriate

movement of the two acting coils or their armatures, without

disturbing balance im the distant station.

(iii). Conditional maximum magnetic moment of the receiving instru-

ment.

(iv). Conditional maximum current.

AppEnvuM I.

Here I wish to give some additional explanations and corrections with

reference to the Ist and 2nd parts of this investigation.

In J. A. 8. B., Vol. XLIII, 1874, Pt. II, p. 20, I have substituted

aoe

without stating that this expression for ¢’ is only approximately true.

The correct expression for ce’ is clearly

i (U +p")

tl + p”

which approximates closely towards L’ + p” if 1” + p” is sufficiently small as

compared with 7. This for any line in good electrical condition, will always

be the case.

At page 9, in the foot note, for ‘‘ as nearly as possible equal” read “ as

nearly as possible proportional.”

dG

eT +

At page 20, Wore Ss +2ag (d—yg)=0

dG p

should be di =L(@—7)+2aad—7/)=0

At pages 19 and 224 after having shewn that

a+-f=gr+d

I conclude at once that on account of equation VI (a d — 9 f = 0)

a=grdl=f os 354 sco UE

while mathematically it follows only that

WEY.

and d—f

These two equalities do certainly not contradict equation VIII but they

do not necessitate it.

The additional reason why equation VIII should be chosen follows

from the balance condition

ad—bc=o

62 Louis Schwendler—On the General [No. 2,

Therefore 6 becomes largest for any given ¢ and any given (a + d), if

we put a = d.

But 0 largest is required for two separate reasons :

1. If the immediate balance is disturbed by an alteration of the resis-

tance of one or more of the four branches, which may happen, especially by

S; 2. é., B (battery resistance) varying, then p becomes at once a function of

6,7 e@., an increasing one with 6. ‘Thus in order to keep p as large as pos-

sible, and at the same time as constant as possible, 6 should be selected

largest.

2. Further by making 0 as large as the circumstances will admit, we

clearly have the largest sent and largest received currents, which will be

clear without calculation. In fact later on, page 232, it has been shewn that

a = dis the condition for the maximum signalling current. '

‘“AppENDUM IT.

Since the 3rd February, 1875, the main line from Bombay to Madras

had been successfully worked duplicé by means of the “double balance

method.”

This line is worked direct, 2. é., without any translating instruments,

and is 797 miles in length ; it consists almost throughout of No. 53 wire

B. W. G. (diameter 5¢ m. m.) and is supported chiefly on the Prussian

insulator.

The section of this line from Bombay to Callian is exposed to the de-

structive influence of a tropical sea climate ; between Callian and Poona the

line passes over the Western Ghats, the dense fogs during the cold weathey

and the heavy rains during the South-west monsoon on these hills seriously

affect its insulation; from Poona to Sholapore and Bellary, the line runs in-

Jand and experiences a climate on the whole favourable for the maintenance

of constant and high insulation ; between Bellary and Madras, however, the

line again comes under the influence of a most unfavourable climate, especial-

ly just before and during the continuation of the North-east monsoon, when

the atmosphere at a high temperature, is saturated with moisture and salt,

leaving conducting deposits on the surface of the insulators.

Consequently during the South-west monsoon the resultant fault is

near Bombay, during the hot weather it shifts towards the middle of the

line, and in November when the rains set in at Madras and the weather on

the Bombay side is clearing up, the resultant fault is situated close to

Madras.

1875.] Theory of Duplex Telegraphy. 63

By February next, duplex working will therefore have been submitted

to a most severe test, applied as it will have been for a whole year to a long

line the electrical condition of which is highly variable with respect to

season and locality, and its practicability will doubtless again be clearly

proved, as has already been the case on the Calcutta-Bombay line, 1600 miles,

where under no more favourable climatic conditions, duplex has, for the past

twelve months not only fulfilled but surpassed the expectations formed of it.

No difficulties have been experienced, and it is believed never will be.

Strange as it may appear from a theoretical point of view, it will

nevertheless be found in practice, that a line worked duplicé carries more

than double the traffic of the same line worked singly ; for it represents two

lines carried on different posts far distant from one another, instead of 2

parallel lines on the same posts, and consequently the highly injurious effects

of voltaic induction are eliminated.

Further the receiving signallers, not being provided with keys, are

unable to interfere with messages during their transmission.

Corrections and repetitions do not necessitate a stoppage of work, for

they are obtained in the following manner: the receiving signaller marks

with a cross, or underlines the words to be repeated, and places the message

by the side of the sending signaller, who calls for the repetitions directly he

has finished the message he is transmitting, and during this call the distant

station may either send fresh messages or may also call for repetitions ;

consequently single working need never be resorted to, and the simultaneous

exchange of messages and corrections becomes continuous.

The Indian system of receiving (the sounder system which has now

been universally recognised as the only right one hand for signalling) thus

necessitates constant attention on the part of the receiving signallers, for any

inattention on their part at once becomes known to the controlling officer.

64 J. Waterhouse—Photography in connection with [ No. 2,

X.—Photography im connection with the Observation of the Transit of Venus

at Roorkee, December 9th (Civil), 1874.—By Captain J. WavERMOUSE,

Assistant Surveyor General of India.

(Received July 30th ;—Read August 4th, 1875.)

In December last I communicated to the Society a brief account

of the proposed arrangements for observing the Transit of Venus at Roor-

kee, drawn up by Capt. W. M. Campbell, R. E., and although the popular

interest in the subject has now somewhat worn off, a description of the opera-

tions connected with the application of photography to the observation in

India of this very important astronomical event may not be without

interest to the members of the Society, and as a record of experience gained,

be useful on a future occasion.

Object of Photographic Observations.—Without entering into the

consideration of the astrongmical problems involved, it may be briefly

stated that the object in view in making photographic observa-

tions of the Transit of Venus was to obtain a series of images show-

ing, with the utmost attainable accuracy, the exact relative positions

of the planet and the sun at carefully noted times during the pro-

gress of the Transit at the different stations of observation; so that

by combining these photographs, the path of the planet across the solar

disc might be accurately determined and the solar parallax be estimated by

comparing the paths thus deduced for different stations. It was further

proposed to endeavour to secure a graphic time-record of the exact

moments at which the internal contacts of the planet and the limb of

the sun took place, by means of an arrangement enabling a_ large

number of photographic pictures to be taken on a single plate at

intervals of a second or so just about the time of contact. It was antici-

pated that results of the highest possible value and reliability would be

obtained if photographs sufficiently exact to allow of minute micrometrical

measurement could be secured, as such photographs would form a permanent

and indisputable record, entirely free from the errors and imperfections in-

separable from personal observation, and have the further advantage that they

might be examined at leisure and, if necessary, carefully compared by seve-

ral independent examiners. How far these anticipations have been fulfilled

still remains to be seen; but as several hundred photographs have been ob-

tained in various parts of the world by different photographic processes and

with dissimilar instruments, sufficient data will probably have been gained

to test the value of photography for observations of so delicate a nature

and, if this is satisfactorily proved, to show by what methods it may most

successfully be applied.

1875. ] the Observation of the Transit of Venus. 65

The superintendence of the official arrangements for the observation

of the Transit in Northern India was entrusted to Colonel Tennant,

R. E., who has done so much to further the progress of astronomy and

solar physics in this country, and was one of the first to recognise the

value of photography as a means of recording the Transit. He selected

Roorkee in the N. W. Provinces as his station of observation, partly on

account of the great advantages to be gained by the proximity of the Canal

Workshops for setting up the observatory and the repair and adjustment of

instruments.

Photoheliograph.—ltwas arranged that photographic observations should

form part of Colonel Tennant’s programme and that with this object he should

be furnished with a photoheliograph by Dallmeyer, of the same construction

as those supplied to the English and Russian expeditions. These instruments

were on the same principle as the photoheliograph designed by Dr. Warren

De la Rue for the Kew Observatory, and consisted of a telescope com-

bined with a photographic camera, equatorially mounted, and driven by

clockwork. According to a description given by the maker, the object

glass was 4 in. diameter and 60 in. focal length, corrected to com-

bine the chemical and visual foci. The image of the sun formed at the prin-

cipal focus was about 3 in. in diameter and was thrown on to an enlarging

combination by which an enlarged image about 4 in. diameter was projected

on to the sensitive photographic plate arranged as in an ordinary camera. A

little in front of the enlarging lens was a slide pierced with two circular

openings, one fitted with spider-web crosslines and the other with a glass

plate ruled with a fine reticule of squares, and capable of adjustment so as

to be brought into the focus of the object-glass in order that the cross-wires

and reticule might be enlarged and brought to fine focus at the same time

as the image of the sun. The pictures could thus be taken with the cross-

wires, which served as a reference mark for measurements in connection with

the declination and right ascension circles, or with the reticule, by means

of which any optical distortion caused by the secondary enlargement of

the image could be measured.

The quick exposure of the plates was effected by means of a shutter

sliding between the cross-wires and the enlarging lens, in which position the

object could be effected with a minimum of motion. This shutter was held

at its lower end by a spring and was arranged so that when raised to its

full extent, by means of a string attached to its upper end, the passage of the

solar rays to the sensitive plate was cut off. This string passed over a

pulley on the body of the instrument and had at the end a hook on which

a loop of strong cotton thread was attached and, being stretched so as to

pass over a conical block fixed on the camera, retained the shutter in its

raised position. When the thread was cut, the force of the spring imme-

66 J. Waterhouse —Photography in connection with [No. 2,

diately drew down the shutter and allowed a momentary exposure of the

sensitive plate to the solar rays during the passage of a slit in the shutter,

the width of which could be increased or diminished at will from nil to 5

of an inch by means of another slide worked by a screw connected with a

graduated scale. The rapidity of motion of the shutter could also be regu-

lated by increasing or diminishing the tension of the spring by means of

a screw.

When the shutter was down the solar rays were quite cut off; but by

a simple arrangement a circular aperture above the exposing slot could be

brought into a position concentric with the axis of the telescope, thus per-

mitting the whole bundle of rays to pass uninterruptedly through the

camera and enabling the image to be examined for focussing, &c.

The camera of the photoheliograph was constructed to take plates six

inches square. ‘The position of the image on the plates was regulated by

means of a finder fixed on the outside of the telescope tube and consisting

of a lens throwing an image of the sun upon a screen made of tale covered

with paper, and adjusted so that when the enlarged image was in its pro-

per position on the ground glass of the camera the finder image just filled

a square ruled on the tale screen.*

Janssen Slide.—A repeating arrangement for taking several pictures on

one plate, designed by Dr. Warren De la Rue on the principle proposed by the

eminent French astronomer M. Janssen, and known as the Janssen slide, also

formed part of the equipment. This arrangement having been fully described

and figured by Dr. De la Rue,* it will suffice to say that it consists of a circular

wooden case about 12 in. in diameter and 2 in. deep, with a removable shutter

in front and constructed so as to be fitted on to the camera in the position

occupied by an ordinary dark slide. Revolving on a central axis within this

case is a metal disc or plate-holder, with 60 radial slots and as many circular

spaces racked in its edge, carrying the sensitive plate held between rings

strongly electroplated with silver. Outside the case, in front, a second smaller

disc revolves just outside the shutter and is provided with a radial opening

capable of being opened or closed at pleasure, so as to regulate the exposure

by admitting more or less light to the plate through a radial slit cut in the

shutter of the slide, about 1 in. long and exactly corresponding in position

and width to the sixtieth part of the circumference of the plate. The axis of

this exposing disc passes through the case and carries a pin which fits into

the slots in the edge of the revolving plate-holder and is turned, from outside —

the case, by means of a winch arranged with gearing, so that it may be

* The screen originally supplied with the instrument was of parchment, but as

this was found to expand and contract with the variations of moisture in the air, it

was advantageously replaced by the tale and paper screen,

¢ Roy. Ast. Soc. Monthly Notices, May 1874.

1875.] the Observation of the Transit of Venus. 67

worked either by hand or automatically by means of clockwork. This axis

also carries an ivory ring on the periphery of which is fixed a piece of

platinum wire which, as the axis revolves, comes into contact with a strip of

platinum fixed on a spring attached to a connector, so that it may be placed

in electrical communication with a chronograph and electric clock and thus

enable the precise moment to be recorded, when the uncovering of the aperture

in the shutter of the slide by the exposing dise exposes a portion of the plate

tothe sun. As there are sixty slots and the aperture corresponds to the

sixtieth part of the circumference of the plate, it is evident that for each

entire revolution of the plate-holder sixty distinct images will be impres-

sed on as many separate portions of the plate within an annular space about

1 in. wide round its circumference.

The apparatus is constructed so that the plane of the sensitive collodion

film shall exactly coincide with that of the focussing screen of the camera,

and in order to adjust the instrument so as to obtain an image of any de-

sired portion of the solar limb or disc, it is arranged that when the sensitive

plate is in the proper position for receiving the first image of the sixty,

the observer can look from behind, through a series of three red glasses, one

of which is in front of the plate, on the exposing disc, and the other two be-

hind it, one on the revolving plate-holder and the other on the wooden

ease. The three glasses are coincident only in one position, 2. e., when the

stop, formed by racking the last of the radial slots for only a short dis-

tance, is on the right of the axis ; and as the stop is on the left of the axis

after a complete revolution, the revolving plate-holder must always be

reversed through an entire revolution after each operation in order to bring it

into the proper position for focussing. While focussing, the sensitive plate

‘itself acts as a focussing screen.

By means of clockwork the rate of revolution of the plate-holder could

be so adjusted that the exposures might be made at intervals varying from

about half a second to two seconds, but as it was desirable not to expose the

separate pictures too rapidly, the rate was set so that the entire revolution

might be accomplished in about a minute and a half.

Preliminary trials with Dry-Plates.—I received intimation about the

middle of August 1874 that, with the concurrence of the Surveyor General, my

services were likely to be placed at Colonel Tennant’s disposal for the superin-

tendence of the photographic observations. As there appeared to bea general

opinion in Europe that a dry process would be most suitable for con-

tinuous observations lasting over a period of some hours and would

have other special advantages for the purpose, the first thing to be done

was to select the process to be used and to gain some experience in working

it; and although the weather at that time of the year was most unfavorable

to photography and very trying to work in, all the time that could be

68 J. Waterhouse—Photography in connection with [No. 2,

spared from my regular office duties was devoted to preliminary trials of

dry plates in Calcutta till October, when I joined Colonel Tennant at

Roorkee.

It was understood that the English observers were to use the beer-al-

bumen dry process recommended by Captain Abney, R. E., and therefore

my first trials were with it; but although the instructions given by Captain

Abney were carefully carried out, it was found impossible to obtain the

exalted sensitiveness claimed for the plates and, though the pictures obtain-

ed had many good qualities, the exposures were so long that I could not

but consider the process unsuitable and look for some other by which

more sensitive plates could be secured. ‘The beer-albumen process was,

however, tried on several different occasions, both in Calcutta and at Roor-

kee, with different collodions and various samples of beer, but always with

the same result.

The cause of the great want of sensitiveness shewn by these plates

could not be discovered. Captain Abney says that those who have not

succeeded with his process have not used a sufficiently porous collodion ; but

on this occasion several collodions were used, some containing a large pro-

portion of water, but without any noticeable advantage ; though other dry

plates taken with the same collodions gave much greater sensitiveness.*

It is possible that the beer used was not quite suitable from containing

too large a quantity of chlorides or other substances detrimental to sensi-

tiveness, and that this was probably the case is shown by the fact that a

much greater sensitiveness and generally better results were obtained with

the mode of working the beer-albumen process recommended by Mr.

Davies of Edinburgh, in which a small quantity of nitrate of silver is

added to the beer with the effect of throwing down all the chlorides and

much of a glutinous substance; but even this modification did not give

quite satisfactory results and the idea of using the beer-albumen process

for the Transit plates was given up. Although the process has no doubt

yielded excellent results in the skilled hands of Captain Abney and others,

the uncertain composition of the different liquids known as beer render it

undesirable that this substance should be used in the preparation of dry

plates which are to serve asa standard for scientific purposes and from which

comparable results are expected. For such purposes more certainty and

* T have quite recently tried the beer-albumen process again with samples of collo-

dion yielding good results with other dry processes—but found the plates just as in-

sensitive as they were before. By flowing the films, after washing away the free

silver, with a 10-grain solution of pyrogallic acid in beer, then again well washing,

and finally flowing the plate with a mixture of glycerine and dilute albumen, plates

were obtained giving excellent results with at least ten times more sensitiveness than

those prepared by Captain Abney’s plan.

1875. ] the Observation of the Transit.of Venus. 69

uniformity will be attained by the use of materials which are likely to be

of nearly the same chemical composition in all parts of the world.

As the beer-albumen process was not found to answer, attention was

turned to other dry processes and several different methods were tried with

varying results.

At an early stage of the experiments it was found from trials with a

rough photoheliograph, constructed in Calcutta for the purpose, that a pro-

eess which might give very good results for taking views &c. would not

answer for the sun and vice versd; and the same was afterwards found to be

the case when working with the English photoheliograph.

Among the most promising dry processes tried in these preliminary

experiments were the gum-gallic, in which the so-called preservative is

composed of a solution of gum arabic and gallic acid, and a process in

which the preservative was laudanum, either alone, as a dilute solution

in water containing from 16 to 4 per cent. of laudanum, or mixed with

gum arabic or gum tragacanth, in order to keep the pictures free from the

stains liable to occur when using the laudanum alone. Excellent results

for views were also obtained with a filtered mixture of laudanum and very

thin arrowroot water. I was induced to use the laudanum from a state-

ment of Prof. Vogel of Berlin, that plates prepared with morphia were

more sensitive to the comparatively nonactinic rays from the outer part of

the solar disc; and though I did not remark any special superiority in

this respect, the laudanum plates were found more sensitive than most of

the others tried. Plates prepared with a saturated solution of morphia in

water also gave good results.

The addition of nitrate of uranium to the nitrate of silver bath used

-for sensitising the plates, as recommended by Captain Abney, was found

advantageous for most of the dry plates, giving increased sensitiveness and

other good qualities: As some doubt has lately been thrown on the advan-

tage of the uranium bath, it may be as well to state that in the ordinary

wet process with bromo-iodised collodion I have found that no advantage is

gained by the addition of the uranium salt to the nitrate bath, but, on the

contrary, there is a great loss of sensitiveness. With dry plates, however,

it is different, the gain in sensitiveness is well-marked and the shadows

appear cleaner than on plates sensitised in the ordinary bath without the

uranium.

Shrinkage of the Collodion films.—When it was first proposed to

employ photography in observing the Transit, it was objected that the

collodion processes would be unsuitable on account of the shrinkage or

contraction the collodion films undergo in drying. De la Rue in 1861

made some very careful experiments, the result of which was to shew that

with proper precautions the shrinkage was entirely in the thickness of

70 J. Waterhouse—Photugraphy in connection with [No. 2,

the collodion film: more recently, however, Paschen had found this

contraction to amount to not less than ;2;, of the length of the plate

with albumenised plates, and to 52;; of unalbumenised plates; in one

instance it being so much as <3, of the length and ,3, of the breadth of

the albumenised plate. Rutherfurd, on the other hand, found that if

the plates received a preliminary coating of albumen, the shrinkage of the

wet film in drying did not exceed 73,5" and was, on an average, about five

times less. Prof. H. Vogel, of Berlin, also made some experiments on the

conditions affecting the stability of the collodion film, which proved the

value of a substratum as a preventive of contraction of the film and shewed

that dry plates were less liable to contraction than wet. Captain Abney

and Colonel Stuart Wortley, when experimenting on a dry process to be used

for the transit by the English expeditions, also gave this subject their care-

ful consideration and came to the conclusion that with proper precautions the

amount of shrinkage would be so small as to be negligible. Notwithstanding

this concurrence of testimony as to the possibility of disregarding the contrac-

tion of the film, I thought it desirable to satisfy myself as to the suitability

in this respect of the various dry processes I was trying, and the plates were

therefore tested by a method which I afterwards found was somewhat similar

to that followed by Dr. De la Rue, and appeared to have the advantage of

entirely avoiding any chance of error from parallax caused by want of absolute

contact between the test lines and the collodion film. Several glass plates

five inches square were prepared by drawing on them, with a very fine diamond

point, diagonal lines through the corners of the plates. With the intersec-

tion of the diagonals as a centre, a circle was described 4 in. in diameter, so

that it might correspond in size with the solar disc on the plates to be taken

during the Transit. These test plates were then coated with the usual

albumen substratum and prepared exactly in the same way as the dry

plates under trial, They were exposed to light from the back, so that an

impression of the engraved lines was obtained through the film. The

plates were then developed in the same way as the other plates and when

dry, examined under a very powerful micrometer capable of dividing to the

aoucy of aninch. To facilitate the examination, a piece of the film was

cut away across the lines in different parts of the plate, and the course of

the uncovered part of the line compared with the covered part. In no case

was any perceptible difference found, except when the substratum had been

purposely omitted, or processes used which gave rise to blistering of the

film. The only chance of error I could see in this plan was the sticking

of the film to the rough surface of the engraved lines ; but in the cases

where the film blistered it was found that the blistering was more marked

on the lines than elsewhere, and so it would appear that the lines did not

exert any particular influence on the free motion of the film. I had not

1875. } the Observation of the Transit of Venus. 71

time to go into the subject very thoroughly nor the means of trying other

tests.

Arrangements of the Observatory.—l arrived at Roorkee on the

13th October and thus had about eight weeks for preparation. Colonel

Tennant had built an observatory with domes for all the observing in-

struments and had allotted to me avery convenient dark room about

ten feet square, attached to the dome in which the photoheliograph had

been erected and separated from it by a narrow passage about 7 feet

long and 3 feet wide. I had doors placed at each end of this passage, so

that communication could pass between the dome and the dark room

without letting light into the latter ; and in order to avoid the necessity

of constantly opening the doors for the passage of the dark slides to and

fro, a sort of box opening at both ends and large enough to hold a dark

slide was let into the panelling of each of the doors, and the dark

slides were thus easily passed backwards and forwards without any risk

of letting in light or raising of dust. Double doors were also constructed at

the entrance to provide for communication from outside without interruption

of the work going on within. ‘Tables and shelves were arranged in the

dark room so as to keep all the operations and the necessary chemicals and

appliances for each quite distinct; thus there was a table for the nitrate

baths and near it, shelves for the collodions and plate boxes. Another

table with sink, was set apart for developing and close by, were shelves for

‘the developers and chemicals &c. used for developing. A third table was

used for changing dry plates and above it were shelves for the dry

plate boxes. Some such system was absolutely necessary in such import-

ant operations, and the principle of a place for every thing and every thing

~ in its place was rigidly adhered to.

As it was undesirable to use the dark room in the observatory for the

preparation of plates and chemicals or as a store room, nothing was kept in it

except the chemicals and apparatus actually required theze. A dark room for

the preparation of dry plates, testing baths, &c., was fitted up in a house

immediately opposite the observatory, and here also all mixing of chemicals,

cleaning plates, and other preparatory work was carried on and spare stores

kept.

The photoheliograph had been erected by Colonel Tennant before my

arrival on an isolated brick pillar in the centre of a circular room 12 feet in

diameter, fitted with a revolving observatory dome.

It was arranged that the times at which the several photographs were

exposed should be recorded by electricity on a chronograph placed in an ad-

joining room in electric communication with the standard clock, which also

gave the time to a clock-dial placed in the dome.

10

72 J. Waterhouse—Photography im connection with [No. 2,

This was effected by the use of a tappet or make-cireuit key, to which

Colonel Tennant had very ingeniously fitted a pair of scissors so that the

act of cutting the thread to let loose the exposing shutter of the photohe-

liograph, completed the circuit and the exact time of exposure was thus

instantaneously recorded on the chronograph. The Janssen slide was also

fitted with arrangements for being placed in electric communication with

the chronograph, so that every turn of the winch was recorded at the

moment of exposing each picture round the circumference of the plate.

The staff of assistants at my disposal included three European assis-

tant-photographers, Sergeant J. Harrold, R. H., of the Photographic

Branch Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, Lance-Corporal George and

Private Fox, of H. M.’s 55th Regiment, who had been thoroughly trained

by Colonel Tennant in the ordinary manipulations of the wet collodion

process, with three native servants for handing the plates to and fro and

performing other menial duties.

Preparatory Work and Drills.—One of the first things to be done

before beginning the drills was to examine the whole stock of glass and

carefully select about 200 of the best and most free from flaws, which were

carefully set aside to be used for the Transit.

The dry plate trials were resumed with the advantage of having a

suitable instrument to work with. ‘The beer-albumen and other processes

that had been found more promising in Calcutta were tried again, but

were found not quite satisfactory with the sun; the tea and coffee

processes, which I had not tried in Calcutta, were better and I finally

adopted a modification of the coffee process recommended by M. Con-

stant of Lausaune, substituting albumen for gum to avoid the tendency

to blistering so common when using gum, and also with the view

of lessening photographic irradiation, against which the coffee proved a

further protection. These plates were easily prepared and were found fairly

sensitive, easily intensified, perfectly clear and free from blurring in the

shadows.

The glass plates, having received a thin coating of albumen as a subs-

stratum, were coated with collodion and sensitised by a somewhat prolonged

immersion in a 40-grain silver bath, then washed in four changes of dis-

tilled water and finally immersed in a resensitising solution, or so-called

preservative, composed of

Wrredeallpumien 2. . 5s Meets tones tnntenses sieirere 2 grammes

Mearns cle. ss OOo 000 oo CERO eae oH 12

Coffee infusion made by boiling 380 grammes of

coffee in 860 C. C. of water ............... 300 cub. cents,

WW aiUGIen oon 5 500000 Bh s0505 dogo OKO boy Hodbo. ol)

and then drained and dried without heat.

93

1875. ] the Observation of the Transit of Venus. 73

As soon aS arrangements were sufficiently advanced, preliminary drills

were commenced with the object of finding out the best mode of working,

in the event of dry plates being used, and after a few trials, it was arranged

that instead of developing every twelfth dry plate, as proposed by the

HEnglish observers, every fifth plate should be prepared by the wet process

and developed at once to ascertain if all the adjustments were correct, the

necessary alterations in the exposure of the plates being arranged by trials

beforehand.

From some cause all the dry plates prepared at Roorkee were covered

with spots, some transparent, others opaque and comet-like, and as it was

impossible to trace the cause of these spots or to avoid them, even with the

most careful precautions, trials were made, about the 17th November, to ascer-

tain if the ordinary wet process could be used instead and, after working a few

days, it was found that there was no difficulty in keeping a regular supply of

plates every two minutes by the use of four sensitising baths. The superior con-

venience of working by the wet-plate system and the great saving of time and

trouble that would be gained became so manifest that it was definitely de-

cided to adopt it and thenceforth the wet plate drills were carried on daily

between the hours of 7 and 12, during which the Transit would take place ;

as a rule in the early morning and forenoon, alternately, sometimes

twice during the same day. Particular attention was given to practising

the mounting of the Janssen slide by signal and again unmounting it and

resuming the ordinary plates in the interval.

Although the use of dry plates was said to possess the great advantage of

enabling irradiation to be much diminished by the use of albumen in the re-

sensitizer and also in reducing the shrinkage of the film to a mininum; as well

as great convenience in preparing and developing the plates at leisure freefrom

excitement or hurry, and in facilitating the working of a large number of plates

with a small staff of assistants, the substitution of the wet process had many

advantages in avoiding the very tedious operations of preparing and developing

so large a number of plates, which alone would have taken up about two days

before and after the Transit, and more particularly in enabling the state of the

work to be seen throughout the Transit and any necessary alterations to be

carried out immediately. The manipulations of the wet process were per-

fectly familiar to all my assistants and by a division of labour they were

able to carry on the work with ease and without the slightest confusion.

By giving the films a substratum I hoped to avoid any shrinkage of

the collodion in drying and by placing pieces of wet red blotting paper behind

the plates to lessen the tendency to irradiation.

My programme of operations having been drawn up and approved by

Colonel Tennant, the first rehearsal took place on the 28th November with

tolerable success, and several points were noticed as requiring modification.

TA J. Waterhouse—Photography in connection with [No. 2,

After further practice, a second full rehearsal took place on the 2nd Decem-

ber, and a final one on the 6th, which was very successful; 120 six-inch

plates with 6 Janssens being exposed in the course of the time the Transit

was calculated to last.

The preparations for the Transit itself, such as numbering and cleaning

glasses, preparing and testing baths, and examining the minor adjustments

of the instruments were commenced about a week beforehand.

Unfortunately the weather for a few days before the Transit was very

cloudy and most unfavorable for trials of chemicals and testing the focal

adjustments of the instrument, which caused some trouble and uncertainty.

Although it was determined to adopt the wet process entirely

for the Transit plates it was considered desirable to have a small

supply of dry plates prepared in reserve in case of accidents and to

be used, if necessary, at times when the supply of wet plates could

not readily be kept up. About a dozen of the six-inch and four of the

Janssen plates were therefore prepared by the coffee-albumen process, already

described, using a highly bromized collodion recommended by Captain Abney

for sun pictures, which gave an intense picture with considerable sensitive-

ness; but owing to the short time between receiving the materials from

England and their being used this collodion had scarcely time to ripen

properly, and so could not have a fair trial. Captain Abney’s formula was—

Thomas’ bromized collodion.........0. etelsists asetnZOM OZ

» lodized 5 BRL elsialsicr ovals ivialetelecsclers 20

Alcohol s. g., 805..... PPT eH ewe NG visio sa als loa sie o'e'e ORDOROU

IPrireaylling = 660dg0000 So0d6udb00bGdO5sb0negoy Gull) Sars

IVViaGCTIN US Seis soso 0's 0’ EMER oRo rs cue <ioleye ailtahenis%ie 120 min.

The plates were developed with the strong alkaline developer recom-

mended by Captain Abney.

One of these Janssen plates and four of the six-inch plates were used

during the Transit and, with the exception of the spots, were excellent pic-

tures, fairly sharp and dense, free from blurring, and, in some respects, better

than many of the wet plates.

Several days before the Transit 120 six-inch glasses were selected from

those set aside as the best and were numbered with a diamond in one corner

consecutively from 1 to 120, <A reserve of about 80 plates was also selected

and marked with a cross in one corner. The whole of these plates as

well as a dozen of the best circular Janssen plates were then carefully

cleaned and coated, on the unmarked side, with an albumen substra-

tum, consisting of the white of one egg and about one drachm of

ammonia to a wine-bottle of water, in order to prevent any rising

of the film and consequent liability to shrinkage. The plates thus

numbered and albumenised were arranged in order in five boxes, hold-

1875.] the Observation of the Transit of Venus. 75

ing two dozen each, with the marked corners running along the upper

left hand side of the boxes. Each box was then legibly marked with a

distinguishing letter and the numbers of the plates contained in it thus

oa, A sixth box containing marked plates was kept in reserve to be used

if required, and it was arranged that any plates so used were to be numbered

at the time of use with their proper number in order of sequence.

It was also carefully enjoined on the assistants that the utmost care

was to be taken to preserve the proper order of sequence of the plates

throughout the operations, but that if, by accident, a plate should be left

out or any alteration in sequence occur, the officer in charge should be at

once informed of it and duly record it. Should any of the plates originally

numbered be broken during any of the operations or put aside from any

other cause, their places were to be filled up from the marked plates and

they were to be numbered in their proper order of sequence.

Arrangements were made for providing four nitrate of silver baths of

suitable size for sensitising the six-inch plates and a larger one for the Janssen

plates ; besides these, two small baths and one large one were kept ready in

reserve in case of one of the other baths getting out of order or becoming

temporarily unfit for use. The baths used were new and about 45 grains

to the ounce (10-2 per cent.).

The collodion used was prepared according to a formula given me by

Colonel Tennant as follows :—

Cadmium Iodide, ....... 505.0 CBOE © erie et eramme.

Cad muUmaySrOMiiGey wi. sto.6 oicro os « vo » slate ete 1 re

Ammonium Iodide,.....+.s2ee0. o's « « oan von L op

HS VLORAV PIMC <tc) wi eleive' sie ois Gh5 CORIO ERIE Oo 0 Ac Sac -

HS DN CT Ree eile et cholate SU wisi eh eR aN Go's os seeees>; 110 cub. cents.

PCO WOLD oigrer calereie babe vious lattes oi os 2 NOL ees

This collodion contained a large proportion of pyroxyline and haloid salts

and was selected because it was found to give more density of the film

and intensity of image than the ordinary commercial samples. ‘Two pints

of it were carefully cleared for use during the Transit.

A reserve supply of a mixture of Thomas’ and Rouch’s was also used

for some of the plates. It was arranged that the collodion should only be

used once, so that each plate might be coated with fresh collodion, thus

preserving the uniformity of the films and keeping the collodion free from

impurities.

An ample supply of developer was also prepared by the following

formula :—

Erotosulphate of Iron... .,.....0.-..sssenees 5O° grammes

On

Sugar eosepeoeeseoe eee eoseanesvee0998R08 098 FF 88808 5 9?

7

76 J. Waterhouse—Photography in connection with [No. 2,

Glacial Acetic acid ..therdesscccesenesveces 40 CUDMerINIE:

Spirits of Wine soereevccens eseeesetsearerseege 30. ” ”

EVVIIGOR Ios bith ietle'+ <<: CteeMemNenete tele talava't. sar totiatte - L000 ae

A solution of cyanide of potassium was used for fixing.

It was considered advisable not to intensify the plates, but to obtain

the greatest possible intensity from the first development.

As the plates were developed they were placed in a draining rack in

order as taken and put aside till after the Transit.

The distribution of duties was arranged as follows :—

I remained at the Photoheliograph to expose the plates at every two

minutes and record the times of exposing each plate by the clock dial,

which had previously been ascertained to agree with the standard clock,

carefully noting any variation in the intervals and any other noteworthy

circumstance connected with any of the plates. At every sixth plate, with

a few exceptions, the cross-wires were replaced by the reticule.

Sergt. Harrold developed the plates and generally supervised the

operations in the dark-room. He was directed to take special care that the

plates were arranged in the racks m their proper order of sequence as deve-

loped, and to note in writing any variations. He was at once to inform

me of any defects in exposure or in the position of the image on the plate.

Corporal George coated the plates with collodion and sensitised them.

He was responsible that the plates were taken in the proper order, as num-

bered and arranged in the boxes, and was ordered to at once report any

change. In case of having to pass over any of the marked and numbered

plates, he was to properly number the plates substituted for them. In

order that the position of the sun’s image might be the same on all the

plates, he was ordered when coating the plates with collodion to keep the

unnumbered side of the plate uppermost, with the numbered corner away

from him on his right hand, pouring off the collodion at the near right-

hand corner.

Private Fox took the plates out of the baths and placed them in the

slide so that the numbers might be at the upper left-hand corner of the

slides and the thick collodion at the lower left-hand corner. (‘This arrange-

ment of the plates when being coated and placed in the slides was observed

throughout all drills and practice plates, and answered the purpose perfect-

ly.) He then placed the dark slides in the receptacle in the door from which

they were passed into the dome by the man in the passage between the

doors. It was also his duty to carry the Janssen slide into the dome, place

on and take off the No. 1 counterpoise, which was fixed at the end of the

declination axis, and carry the Janssen plates back again for development.

In case of there being any delay in a wet plate being ready at the proper

time, he was to keep a dry plate in readiness to be sent in instead, notify-

an

1875. the Observation of the Transit of Venus. 77

ing the change, and this he was ordered to do at all changes from wet to

dry and vice versa.

In order to prevent mistakes and confusion in communicating between

the dome and the dark room, it was arranged that all communications should

be in writing ; supplies of slips of paper with a pencil attached were kept

in a convenient position in different parts of the dark room and the dome,

and were passed to and fro through the slides in the doors without noise or

disturbance of the operations.

Of the three native servants, one remained in the dark room to hand

the dark slides backwards and forwards, but when the Janssen slide was

used he went into the dome to put on the No. 2 counterpoise, at the object

glass end of the telescope ; another man remained in the space between the

double doors and passed the dark slides in and out through the slides in the

doors. The third stood in the dome to hand me the dark slides, hold the

loops of thread and hook them on the string attached to the exposing shutter,

turn the dome, and give me any other assistance I required.

Corporal George and Private Fox took it in turns to act as orderly of

the week and their duties were to open the dome for work, have the water

boxes filled at the proper times, uncover the instrument, see that the

necessary chemicals and glasses were ready in their places for use, and after

work, to have the rooms cleaned, the instrument dusted, and the dome

closed.

Two or three days before the Transit I examined all the adjustments of

the sliding shutters and the electrical communications and satisfied myself

that all were in good order.

As the weather had been cloudy two or three days before the Transit

there was some uncertainty as to whether it would be fine or not, but, in the

~ event of its turning out cloudy, I had arranged that the whole operations

were to be gone through just as for a drill, so that we should have been in a

position to take immediate advantage of any break in the clouds, discretion

being of course exercised in altering the uniformity of the intervals between

the plates, in order to take advantage of any passing gleam of clear sunshine.

Fortunately it was fine and this precaution was not required, but I am sure

that it was the only way of making certain of being ready at a moment’s

notice had the sky been cloudy.

Operations on the Day of the Transit.—After the cloudy weather

of the previous two days, it was an agreeable surprise when we awoke on

the morning of the Transit to find an almost cloudless sky. All prepara-

tions had been completed the night before and we were in our places

betimes. As the first contact had been computed to occur at about 7h.

13m. 7s. (mean time) the order for commencing the preparation of the

plates was given about 7 o’clock, and the work of the day commenced

with the exposure of a Janssen plate for trial of the apparatus. After

78 J. Waterhouse—Photography im connection with [No. 2,

this two six-inch plates were exposed and then, about bisection, another

Janssen, followed by two more six-inch plates and then a third Janssen for

the first internal contact, for the exposure of which a signal was to be given

by Colonel Tennant. Owing to the wet plate prepared for this having

slipped off the dipper, a dry plate was substituted and the plate was mounted

in ample time. While watching the image carefully through the red glass,

waiting for Colonel Tennant’s signal, I noticed that the planet appeared to

have passed well within the boundary of the solar disc, though still attached

to the limb by a well and strongly defined ligament, so that the planet and

ligament were of a distinct gourd-shape exactly like the appearance of the

“black drop” one had been led to expect.* On development the plate

showed no sign of any such such gourd-like appearance, except at the 21st

picture where the clock-work had dragged, and there an image appeared,

the exact counterpart of what I had seen.

After this the regular work with the six-inch plates commenced and

went on pretty regularly, at the stated intervals of two minutes between

each exposure, till about half-past 9, when there was a break of 15 minutes

for refreshment and to change the chronograph paper, &c.

Though this break may appear long, it had been found more convenient

to have one long break than two or three shorter ones,on account of the

loss of time in stopping and getting under way again. It was arranged

that the break should take place either well before or after mid-transit, so

as to be sure of pictures being taken about the time of mid-transit.

It was also arranged that when the signal for the break was given, all

wet plates under preparation should be exposed and dry plates sent in till

all the wet plates had been developed and every thing was ready for open-

ing out the doors. In the same manner after the break, dry plates were

sent in until the wet plates were ready. The work then went on as before

till the time came for mounting the Janssen for the second internal contact,

which was exposed by signal from Colonel Tennant. Two more six-inch

plates were then taken, then a Janssen, followed by two more six-inch plates,

and last of all a Janssen, about the time of last contact, which was exposed

and closed a few seconds before the final contact, thus concluding the work.

The sequence of the plates in the racks was examined and the plates

were left to dry till next day and then replaced in the plate boxes.

It had originally been intended that 120 six-inch plates should be

taken, as it had been found quite possible to do so at the rehearsals, but as

I was perfectly dependent on Colonel Tennant’s signals for starting the

Janssen plates, I allowed plenty of time so as to make sure of having the

* Colonel Tennant remarks with reference to this—“ There is no doubt in my mind

that the outer part of the sun is xever free from the result of outstanding astigmatism.

For Janssen plates it should have been specially cared for at the expense of the central

portion of the picture.”

1875. ] the Observation of the Transit of Venus. 79

Janssen plates ready when required, without hurry ; and so only two plates

were taken between the Janssens instead of four, as had been arranged.

The result of the day’s work was 109 six-inch plates taken, but of

these two failed entirely, so that only 107 can be counted. ‘These are all

fairly clean and free from fog or stains but in many of the plates the images

are not so sharp as could have been desired. Though the day was fine and

cloudless, there was a good deal of haze and I think the want of sharpness is

chiefly due to this and other atmospheric conditions, as the same faults

were observed for two or three days after the Transit,

Of the Janssen plates there were five which also were, for the most

part, clean, good plates, fairly well defined though not perfectly sharp.

Several of the photographs shew marked irradiation round the planet,

and a want of sharpness which may be partly due to the atmosphere of the

planet, as the limb of the sun is very much sharper. On some of the pic-

tures distinct streamers are visible round the limb of the planet and pro-

ceeding from it. I have not seen anything of the kind mentioned as being

observed by other parties, and, as the appearance is not visible on all the

negatives, it is no doubt a form of photographic irradiation; but, if not,

a comparison of the Roorkee negatives with those taken at other places

may throw light on the cause of it.

None of the plates were varnished, as it was considered undesirable to

varnish plates intended for future measurement, and also to obviate any

chance of the varnished films cracking when removed to England, as is often

the case with negatives taken in this country.

With the exception of the want of sharpness of some of the plates, the

operations may be considered quite successful as far as the mere photography

is concerned. The arrangements described above and the programme of

operations answered admirably and I cannot suggest any improvement.

Whether the photographs are sufficiently sharp and perfect in other respects

to answer the purpose intended still remains to be seen.

General Remarks.—During the course of the preparations a good deal

of time had to be devoted to putting some of the instruments into proper

working order, in which work I was much assisted by Captain Campbell, who

had charge of the operations with the great 36 in. theodolite. Thus for some

time, the Janssen plates were found to be fogged and so indistinct as to be

almost useless, This was due, partly to reflection of light from the polished

surface of the wood-work of the slide and the brass-work of the under sur-

face of the exposing disc, which was partially obviated by covering with dead

black varnish all the surfaces capable of reflecting light on to the sensitive

plate, and partly to the ruby-red glass fixed in the revolving dise not being

perfectly impervious to the actinic rays, but this defect was overcome by

substituting a piece of thick ruby-glass for the thin, light-coloured piece

originally supplied. Even with these precautions, some white light found

80 J. Waterhouse—Photography in connection with [No. 2,

its way on to the plate between the revolving disc and the wooden case,

which were at a greater distance apart than appeared necessary, though the

entrance of light might have been prevented by fitting the exposing disc

with a flange running in a groove cut in the wood-work of the slide or fastened

above it. There was also considerable friction about the internal sur-

faces, which caused a strain on the clock-work and gave a good deal

of trouble till the cause had been removed. With the exception of these

defects, the slide seemed admirably constructed and adapted for the

object in view. It remains, however, to be seen how far this ingenious

instrument has answered the expectations of its inventor and those who

have adopted it, but if it should be used at the next Transit, it would, I

think, be desirable that arrangements should be made for the automatic

movement to be continued or distributed at intervals over a much

longer period than one minute, as on the present occasion, so that

all the phenomena attending the contact may be fully observed and

recorded. It is also very desirable that the photographer should

not require a skilled observer to watch the time of contact for him. ‘The

doing so has a very disturbing effect on a man who is able to make a good

observation of contact, and time is also lost in preparing and waiting for

a signal.

As far as shewn by the plates obtained at Roorkee the differences be-

tween pictures taken a few seconds apart are so slight, and the advance of the

planet is so imperceptibly marked, if indeed, there is not sometimes an appear-

ance of retrogression caused by atmospheric tremor, that perhaps little would

be lost by taking the pictures at intervals of 4 or 5 seconds instead of at

every second.

The mounting of the slide necessitates the alteration of the adjust-

ments of the telescope for taking the six-inch plates, thus stopping all such

observations about the critical period and it is therefore most desirable that

each operation with the Janssen slide should extend over as long a period

as possible. Colonel Tennant tells me that the cusp measures are indefinitely

more valuable, if good, than any six-inch plates, which he would entirely

eliminate. In this case, if it were considered essential that the successive

pictures should be taken at intervals of not more than one or two seconds, a

second, or even a third, Janssen slide might be provided so that they might

be rapidly changed one after the other. If it were feasible to construct the

slide so that the plates could easily be changed without removing the whole

slide from the camera, it would be better still, as in that case the observations

could be carried on at every second or two, and three or four plates exposed in

quick succession during five or six minutes about the time of contact, and, if

desirable, continued at regular intervals afterwards; but this appears to pre-

sent considerable mechanical difficulties and an arrangement would be required

by which the revolving disc could be at once brought into the proper position

1875. ] the Observation of the Transit of Venus. ~ 81

for exposing the successive plates instead of having (as in the present slide)

to be reversed through an entire revolution, which alone takes nearly half a

minute.

The photoheliograph, like all work turned out by Mr. Dallmeyer,

was an excellent and perfectly finished instrument, but seemed to me

to be scarcely sufficiently firmly mounted for continuous work ex-

tending over so many hours, with the constant shaking caused by the

insertion and withdrawal of the dark slides, which were much stiffer than

they ought to have been. This stiffness of the dark slides was found

not to be due to climatic influence, because they did not agree in

measurement with the focussing screen which fitted perfectly, and

they had to be filed down considerably before they would fit; this

defect, due no doubt to an oversight in the maker or to hurry in turning out

the instrument, was a serious one, as besides the liability to tremor caused by

the frequent alteration of declination, the focus might have been disarranged

by the alteration in the thickness of the slides by filing, but there was

nothing else to be done under the circumstances.

For my part, speaking merely as a photographer, I should prefer the

system adopted by Lord Lindsay and the American parties in which the

camera was an immovable fixture and the solar image retained in a constant

position by means of a siderostat carefully adjusted to follow the sun. In

any case, the slides should be constructed to fit quite easily into their places,

' and in this respect the dark slides made for the equatorial camera used at

Dodabetta for photographing the solar eclipse in 1871, were of a much

better pattern than those sent out with the photoheliograph.

Another defect of the photoheliograph was that the hanging counter-

poise, placed near the object-glass of the telescope when using the Janssen.

_ slide, was found to swing and induce a tremor in the instrument, spoiling the

definition of the pictures ; it was therefore replaced with a rough, but efficient

substitute, in the shape of a canvas bag, the ends of which were filled with

shot. This was merely hung over the end of the telescope at the proper

balancing point and kept the tube perfectly steady.

As regards the process to be adopted for photographing the Transit of

1882 much will depend on the results obtained by the different methods

used in December last as to whether photography can be advantageously

employed and, if so, which process is most suitable.

As far as my experience goes, the wet process seems less favourable to

perfect sharpness and clearness of the image than the dry, but Colonel Ten-

nant tells me he has lately obtained very superior results by using a pyro-

gallic acid developer with bromoiodised collodion, in place of the iron

development. From experience I have gained in preparing for photograph-

ing the recent Nelipse, I believe that great advantages may be obtained by

slightly staining the ordinary wet films with orange or red anilin dyes or

82 J. Waterhouse—Photography in connection with, Se. [No. 2,

by the use of moist plates, prepared with bromised or bromoiodised

collodion afterwards treated with albumen and glycerine, which I have found

very simple to prepare and exceedingly free from all tendency to blurring

or irradiation. Itis probable, however, that before 1882 the usual modes

now in vogue for taking negatives will have been quite superseded by the

simpler method of using sensitive emulsions which have only to be poured

on to the plates and dried without any further preparation. Great advances

have recently been made by Carey Lea, Bolton and others in obtaining such

emulsions capable of giving pictures with the same rapidity as the ordinary

wet or dry processes and with a perfect freedom from the irradiation or blur-

ring so detrimental in astronomical photography, besides which the perfect

simplicity and ease of the cperations are a strong recommendation; and I

may, I think, safely predict that should photography be used for the next

Transit, the emulsion processes will, if not exclusively, be used very extensive-

ly ; unless, possibly, the superiority of pictures taken on daguerreotype plates

or silvered glass films over those on collodion should be incontestably proved

or some other better process be discovered meanwhile.

Although the photographic operations connected with the obser-

vation of a Transit of Venus present no great difficulties, and are in

some respects easier than photographing the total phase of an Helipse, a

great deal of patient careful work is required beforehand to ascertain

the best conditions for working with regard to local circumstances, and

this the short time at my disposal on the present occasion scarcely

allowed me to have, especially as so much time was spent over the

dry process, which might, as the event proved, have been well employed in

perfecting the wet. It is therefore very desirable that the subject should

not be lost sight of between this and the next Transit and that every oppor-

tunity should be taken of utilising the experience already gained towards

ascertaining the most perfect methods of taking these sun-pictures. It would

also be advisable that as many as possible of the observers of the last

Transit should also take part im the next.

Although the Transit of 1882 will not be visible in any part of India,

much useful preparatory photographic work might be done concurrently

with the daily observations of sunspots, now that an instrument is available

for taking advantage of the comparatively fine weather enjoyed in this

country, particularly at the time of year when the weather in Hurope is

most unfavourable to such observations; and this would not be the least

among the many advantages to Science to be gained by the establishment of

a Solar Observatory in this country, which has been so earnestly advocated by

Col. Tennant and, it is to be hoped, will soon be an accomplished fact.

el a a i i a i i a

Ea

1875.] 83

XI.—Deseriptions of new Marine Mollusca from the Indian Ocean.

By G. and H. Nevuit.

(Received July 15th ;—Read August 4th, 1875.)

(With Plates VII and VIII.)

The types of the new species of shells described in this paper mostly

belong to the family Plewrotomide, and are all in the eollection of the

Indian Museum.

Murex (OcINEBRA) qippa, Pse.

Latirus gibbus, Pease, Am. J. Conch., 1867, (Sandwich I.)

Murex Crosseana, Vién., J. de Conch., 1874, (Mauritius).

We have found this shell at Ceylon, the Seychelle, and Andaman

Islands ; it is nowhere a common shell.

Murex (OCINEBRA) FISCELLUM, Ch. var.

Chemn., Conch. Cab., fig. 1524-5, (Pulo Condor).

M. Liénardi, Crosse, J. de Conch., 1868, (Mauritius).

We have found both the type form and the var. Liénardi at Mauri-

tius, also at Ceylon and Aden the above var. only ; a large series of speci-

mens in all stages of growth show that the two forms cannot be retained

as distinct species—The very common Sistrum undatum (Ch., fig. 1851-2,

Tranquebar) must not be confused with the above, as well pointed out

by Chemnitz in his original description, as also by v. Martens (Vorderasiat.

Conch., p. 95); we have found the typical form of S. undatwm, with

whitish aperture, at Ceylon, Mauritius, and Natal; ‘var. Indica, nobis, (de

- Blainv. pl. X, fig. 8) at Ceylon, Mauritius, Singapore, Bombay, Anda-

mans, Penang, Arakan, Bourbon, and Seychelles; var. swbturrita (de Blainv.

pl. X, fig. 12) at Mauritius only, where it is rather scarce; the Museum

also possesses specimens of var. margariticola, Brod. (Conch. Icon., fig. 28)

from the N. Coast of Australia: this form differs from var. Indica by the

fewer, more nodulous ribs, becoming more rapidly obsolete, by its stouter

and thicker growth, by the more regular transverse sculpture, and by its

more sombre colouration.

Conus CryLonensis, Brug.

As already surmised by v. Martens (Don. Bism., p. 32), Pease is wrong

(Am. J. Conch., 1867, p. 126) in uniting Conus Ceylonensis, Brug. with

Conus pusillus, Ch. (Conch. Icon. fig. 154); both are abundant species

at low water on the reefs at Ceylon and the Andamans; the latter species

we have also found at Mauritius and the Seychelle Islands. Not only, how-

84 G. & H. Nevill—Deseriptions of new Marine Mollusca. {[No. 2,

ever, the shells, but the animals also are quite distinct ; the latter in Conus

Ceylonensis being a bright scarlet throughout, the body minutely, almost

imperceptibly streaked with white, the siphon the same, only much more

distinctly so ; the animal of Conus pusillus is, on the other hand, pure white,

with a narrow pink rim round the extremity of the siphon and at its base,

and the posterior end of the body is also tinged with pink.

DRi“1ia LucrpA, n. sp., Pl. VIII, Fig. 15.

Shell acuminately fusiform, very smooth and glittering ; white, slightly

and irregularly marbled with pale brown here and there between the ribs and

especially behind the outer lip; suture distinct, apex blunt and rounded,

almost like that of Pyramidella in character ; whorls 8 to 9, the two first

smooth and embryonal, the others divided with a deeply incised groove beneath

the suture, longitudinally, thickly, distantly ribbed ; last whorl with 9 ribs,

transversely striated at its base, gibbous posteriorly, with a rather consider-

able smooth space behind the marginal varix (as in Reeve’s fig. 199, Pleur.

pudica, Hinds), next the suture the upper part of the ribs, cut off by the

deep spiral groove, have the appearance of a row of granules ; columella and

aperture smooth, a callous tubercle at junction of outer lip with the former,

sinus very deeply excavated.

Long.8, diam. 3 mil.

H. and A, Adams in their ‘ Genera of Recent Mollusca’ class Clavatula

guisqualis of Hinds as a Clathurella ; it would, however, probably be better

placed in Drillia, as is done with other allied spp. robusta, Hinds, &e. D.

lucida resembles extremely closely the shell from South America figured and

described by Hinds as Clavatula quisqualis (Voy. Sulph., pl. VI, fig. 5) ; the

Indian species is smaller, with transverse striz at base of the last whorl, with

a row of granules and a deep groove beneath the suture, and with straight

instead of oblique ribs. The type is from the Persian Gulf, where it was

dredged rather plentifully by Mr. Blanford off Tumb Island and Gwadar ;

it was also dredged by Mr. Wood-Mason at the Andamans and found by

the late Mr. Raban at Pooree iu the Bay of Bengal; the specimens from the

two last-named localities differ slightly from the type form, being a little more

richly marbled with brown (much as in Hinds’ figure of his Clavatula leta),

and having the ribs on the last whorl a trifle more rounded and the penulti-

mate rib in the centre of the back more developed than the others (present-

ing a varicose appearance).

Driti1a acuminata, Migh., Pl. VIII, Fig. 14.

P. Bost. Soc., 1845.

Shell fusiform, resembling in shape many small species of Mitra, some-

what smooth and shining, apex sharp and pointed (generally broken off) ;

1875.| G. & H. Nevill—Deseriptions of new Marine Mollusca. 85

bright brown, with a broad white band at the upper part of the whorls, re-

peated near base of the last whorl, this white band is more vivid and dis-

tinct on the ribs than in the interstices; whorls 8, the three first without

sculpture, the others longitudinally flexuously ribbed, with a depression be-

neath the suture, last whorl transversely ribbed dt its base, with approxi-

mately 12 longitudinal ribs, two of which in the centre of the back are

joined together and have a varicose or gibbous appearance ; columella and

interior of aperture brown, smooth, outer lip sharp, very thin, sinus small.

Long. max. 63, diam. max. 23 mil.

Andaman I. and Ceylon, scarce at both places. We have given a fresh

figure of this species from an Andaman specimen, as the figure in the Don.

Bism. (pl. 1, fig. 1) is scarcely sufficient for satisfactory identification.

Typical specimens in the Indian Museum from the Sandwich Islands in no

respect differ from Indian Ocean ones.

MANGELIA FULVocrINcTA, n. sp., Pl. VII, Fig. 1.

Shell attenuately fusiform, shining ; whorls nine, the first four embry-

onal and colourless, the third and fourth peculiarly and strongly carinate, the

other five longitudinally, varicosely ribbed, seven ribs on the last whorl ;

under a lens, minutely but regularly transversely striated, strize more or

less obsolete on the ribs; white, with a chestnut-brown band immediately

under the suture, more vivid in the interstices than on the ribs themselves,

this brown band covers the columella and nearly the whole of the lower half

of the last whorl, is also very strongly marked on the lower portion of the

outer lip and within the aperture; columella and outer lp smooth, sinus

obsolete, canal very short and truncate.

Long. 8, diam. 3 mil.

Type Bombay (Rev. S. B. Fairbank), also Ceylon (nobis), and Pooree

(H. H. Raban).

(Coll. Indian Museum and H. Nevill.)

ManGenia FarrBanxt, n. sp., Pl. VII, Fig. 2.

We have long hesitated whether this shell should be distinguished

from Reeve’s Pl. hexagonalis, the differences between our shell and the

figure in the Conch. Icon. seem however to necessitate it. MJ Fairbanki

can be distinguished by the more open canal, the five or six denti-

eulations within the acute outer lip, the sharp transverse strie, equally

and strongly showing both on the ribs and in the interstices, the striz

distant from one another, only three on each whorl, the middle one

slightly the largest, imparting a somewhat angulate appearance to the

whorls ; the longitudinal ribs are thicker and more rounded than in Reeve’s

figure; the shell has 8 whorls, the two first embryonal, slightly mammillate ;

86 G. & H. Nevill—Deseriptions of new Marine Mollusca. [No. 2, .

it is of an irregular leaden-brown colour, stained with a darker shade on the

outer lip and on the columella.

Long. 6, diam. 2 mil.

Type Bombay, probably also Ceylon and Andamans ; the specimens,

however, from these two last localities are not sufficiently perfect for satis-

factory identification. For the type specimens of this and for many other

interesting species from the same locality, the late Dr. Stoliczka was indebted

to the Rev. S. B. Fairbank.

MANGELIA (?) InTERRUPTA, Rv.

P. Z. 8. 1846.

Daphnella bella, Pse.

Pl. gemmulata, D.

Amongst some hundred specimens in the Museum from the Sandwich

I., Mauritius, Bourbon, Ceylon, and Abyssinia, a single Ceylon spe-

cimen alone shows minute denticulations just within the outer lip, as in

Reeve’s figure. A comparison with specimens in the British Museum marked

interrupta, Rv. first enabled us to identify this species ; the genus still

seems to us doubtful, perhaps Carpenter (P. Z. S. 1865) is correct in placing

it in the Columbellide. It is common in Ceylon, where it seems to be finer

and better marked than elsewhere in these seas. If it should prove to be

a pleurotomid, Pease’s name bella had probably better be employed, as

Lamarck and Sowerby have both described distinct shells as Plewrotoma

imerrupta.

CLATHURELLA RUGOSA, Migh.

Pi. curculio, Nevill, J. R. A. S. (Ceylon Branch), 1869.

Pease is quite wrong (Am. J. Conch. 1871, p. 25) in uniting this

species with C. sealarina, Deshayes ; the short rounded whorls, more pro-

duced spire, different character of the sculpture, absence of the second black

transverse line on the whorls, amply distinguishing the latter ; the former is

abundant at Ceylon and Arakan, the latter at Mauritius, Bourbon, and

Ceylon.

C. RUGOSA, var. CURCULIO, nobis, 1. c., from Ceylon.

This variety has 12 longitudinal ribs on the last whorl, four transverse

keels on the whorls, the two middle ones very prominent, the other two more

or less obsolete, suture excavated, only very faintly stained brown, minutely

and spirally striated ; two transverse brown lines on the last whorl, show-

ing also within the aperture ; it does not differ from the type form sent us

by Mr. Pease from the Sandwich I., as figured and described in the Don.

Bism., except by its greater size.

Long. 8, diam. 32 mil, (last whorl, long. 42).

1875.] G. & H. Nevill—Deseriptions of new Marine Mollusca, 87

C. RUGOSA, var. FALLAX, nobis.

This is probably the form that induced Pease incorrectly to make

scalarina a synonym of rugosa. This dwarf variety has 9 longitudinal ribs on

the last whorl, the four transverse keels are less unequal in size, there is

only one brown line on the last whorl and within the aperture (in this

respect only does it agree with scalarina) ; the peculiar straight outer lip and

consequently contracted aperture, as also the form of the whorls and suture,

are the same as in the type form.

Long. 43, diam. 2 mil. (last whorl, long. 2).

Common at Mauritius and Bourbon ; rare at Ceylon.

CLATHURELLA SCALARINA, Desh.

Specimens in the Museum agree exactly with the typical figure (especi-

ally as regards the rounded outer lip and open aperture) ; suture scarcely

excavated, spirally minutely striated, six transverse keels on each whorl (the

first and last somewhat indistinct), 12 longitudinal ribs on the last whorl

(mot 15 to 16 as in the original description); apex and suture stained

an intense brown, only one brown line on the last whorl and within the

aperture.

Long. 6, diam. 2 mil. (last whorl, long. 23).

Abundant at Balapiti in Ceylon ; rare at Mauritius.

CLATHURELLA EXQUISITA, Nn. sp.

We found this shell marked in the British Museum as Clathurella

nebulosa, Pease, but it differs totally from the shell described under that

name (P. Z. 8., 1860, p. 143), being of a beautiful pink colour with a white

transverse band, not white with interrupted longitudinal brown lines as in

Pease’s description of P. nebulosa; it may rather prove to be a small

variety of the shell described and figured by Pease from Paumotus (Am. J.

Conch., 1868, p. 219) as Clathurella canaliculata ; however, even if it should

prove so, our name exquisita will stand for the species, as Reeve described a

totally different shell as P. (Clathurella) canaliculata, P. Z.S., 1848; if the

Paumotus shell proves to be distinct from our Mauritius one, as we think it is,

we would suggest for the former the name of Clathurella Peaset. C. exquisita

differs from C, Peaset by the absence of the dark brown line beneath the

transverse white band, by its suture not being coloured brown, by tha

much greater contraction of the last whorl and the outer lip at their base,

thus making a more prominent canal, by the last whorl having only 12

longitudinal ribs instead of 14, finally by its smaller size. We have not

thought it necessary to figure this species, as it is one that cannot be

mistaken.

Long. 92, diam. 4 mil.

Rather scarce at Mauritius.

12

88 G. & H. Nevill—Deseriptions of new Marine Mollusca. [No. 2,

CLATHURELLA REEVEANA, Desh.

Seems to be the same asa shell figured and described by Pease as C.

tumida (Am. J. Conch. 1867), This species occurs at Mauritius and at the

Andamans, at both of which places it is scarce. OC. Reeveana and C. cy-

clophora, D. should, we think, form a distinct section of Clathurella, in which

should probably be classed P. subula, egrota, &. of Reeve ;in Adams’

‘Genera’ these latter are recorded as Daphnella.

C. cyclophora we found at Mauritius rather sparingly, also at Aden

a single specimen of a shell which seems to belong to it, though in too bad

a state of preservation for certain identification.

CLATHURELLA SMITHI, n. sp., Pl. VIII, Fig. 13.

Shell minute, angularly fusiform, attenuated, apex round, slightly sinis-

tral ; white, tinged with pale brown on the columella and outer lip ; whorls

seven, acutely angled in the centre, depressedly excavated on the upper half,

which is devoid of sculpture ; the first two whorls altogether without sculpture,

the 8rd and 4th simply acutely keeled in the centre, the others closely reticu-

lated, minute granules formed where the keels bisect one another, longitu~

dinal keels obsolete on the lower half of the last whorl; in some specimens

_a prominent keel is present immediately beneath the suture of the last two

whorls, in most, however, this is obsolete (as in the specimen figured) ; colu-

mella rather strongly twisted, sinus deep, outer lip reflected, transversely

striated.

Long. 33, diam. 13 mil,

Mr. Rlanford dredged 30—40 specimens of this minute shell off Gwa-

dar and Tumb Island in the Persian Gulf; it perhaps nearest resembles

Reeve’s Pl. concentricostata (fig. 279), but is quite distinct ; we have named

it after Mr. HE. A. Smith of the British Museum, who has lately described

some interesting smali shells from the Persian Gulf.

CLATHURELLA apicuLATA, Montr., Pl. VII, Fig. 3.

J. de Conch. 1864, p. 264, (IV. Caled.)

We propose to distinguish the Andaman form under the name of var.

minor. Ten specimens of this variety were found living at Ross Island under

blocks of coral at low water, it can only be distinguished from the sype form,

which has not yet been found at the Andamans, by its smaller size (long.

42, diam. 13 mil.). The row of opaque, white spots on the back of the last

whorl are very characteristic. It is nearest allied to the next species, C. Wal-

leti, which also lives at the Andamans and under precisely similar conditions :

the slight but constant differences in shape and sculpture between the two

are well shown in the accompanying figures. Dead specimens of C. apiewlata

are fairly abundant in Ceylon, in size closely approximating to the type form

(long. 62, diam. 3 mil.)

(Coll. Indian Mus,, Rev. J. Warneford, and H. Nevill.)

1875.]_ G. & H. Nevill—Descriptions of new Marine Mollusca. 89

CiaTHURELLA Matuert, Recl., Pl. VII, Fig. 4.

J. de Conch. 1852, p. 254, (Pacific 0.)

I found seven or eight specimens of this lovely species alive at the An-

damans, at Ross Island and North Bay, under blocks of coral at low water ;

the shell is of the most brilliant purple imaginable; it agrees exactly with

the original figure and description. (G. Nevill.)

(Coll. Indian Mus. and Rev. J. Warneford.)

CLATHURELLA PERPLEXA, n. sp., Pl. VII, Fig. 5.

This shell, though in many respects so like Mangelia Fairbanki,

should probably be classed as a Clathwrella; whorls 8, the last very short,

three first embryonal, the others broadly, somewhat indistinctly longitudi-

nally ribbed, ribs not so straight as in I. Fuirbanki, but somewhat

rounded, especially on the last whorl, three raised transverse striz on the

lower portion of each whorl, the uppermost one almost obsolete, a charac-

teristic raised transverse keel immediately below the suture ; uniform ash-color,

a shade or two darker in the interstices of the ribs and near the apex; co-

Tumella, outer margin of the lip and interior of the aperture bright chestnut-

brown, columella a little twisted, outer lip very sharp, irregularly undulat-

ing, obsoletely granulated just within the aperture.

Long. 6, diam. 24 mil.

Type Bombay ; also found in Ceylon.

(Coll. Indian Museum, and H. Nevill.)

CLATHURELLA NIGRocINcTA, Montr., Pl. VII, Fig. 6.

J. de Conch. 1872, (N. Caled.)

The colouration of the last whorl is remarkable: there are five rows of

- distant elongated nodules, of which the two first rows next tho suture are

of a leaden colour on a broad black band, the third row of a brilliant orange,

the fourth and fifth pure white, these five rows of nodules (coloured in the

same way) are then repeated.

About twenty living specimens of this shell were found at the Anda-

mans, on Blair’s Reef, Aberdeen, and Ross Island, under blocks of coral at

low water.

Long. 9, diam. 4 mil.

CLATHURELLA SINGULARIS, n. sp., Pl. VII, Fig. 10.

Shell elongate, fusiform, sub-conical, apex pointed ; white, in the centre

of the ribs on the last whorl ornamented with obsolete brown spots ; whorls

nine, the first four embryonal, smooth, on the fourth traces of convex sculp-

ture only, the last five transversely, regularly, rather broadly, somewhat

distantly striated, longitudinally faintly and obtusely ribbed, nine ribs on

the last whorl, becoming obsolete towards the base, the last mb next the

90 G. & H. Nevill—Descriptions of new Marine Mollusca. [No. 2,

outer lip varicose, much more strongly developed than the others; ribs of

the 5th and 6th whorls perfectly straight, on the 7th and 8th angulated

about the middle, the last whorl angulated at about the 4th or 5th of the

transverse striz ; columella straight, smooth, a small tooth-like projection

at the commencement of the deep, rounded sinus; outer margin of the

lip almost straight, much produced, exceedingly sharp ; interior of aper-

ture white, smooth, and shining; under a powerful lens only can be seen

a microscopical, regular, longitudinal striation, these strie are bent in

the same way as the last varicose rib and should perhaps be called strize

of growth, they are a trifle more distinct close to the suture.

Long. 84, diam. 34 mil.

(Coll. Indian Mus. and Rev. J. Warneford.)

Three or four specimens only of this interesting species were dredged by

Mr. Wood-Mason at a considerable depth at the Andamans. In shape and

sculpture it resembles most closely Cythara Delacouriana of Crosse (J.

de Conch. 1872, pl. fig. ); the columella and outer margin are, however,

both perfectly smooth and the sinus is much more distinct, the spire too is a

great deal longer in proportion to the last whorl, in length the last whorl

(measured at the back) is 43 mil., the other whorls altogether only measur-

ing 4 mil. We have felt considerable doubt whether this species is correctly

classed as a Clathurella ; perhaps it would be better placed with Mangelia.

CLATHURELLLA Masont, n. sp., Pl. VII, Fig. 7.

Shell ovately fusiform, white, remarkably scalariform ; six angular

whorls, broader at the top than at their base, the first two rounded, smooth

and embryonal, the others prominently and regularly, somewhat distantly,

transversely striated (four striz on the 4th and 5th whorls), longi-

tudinally strongly ribbed, ribs pointed and very prominent at their com-

mencement, nine of them on the last whorl; columella and aperture smooth,

with a row of regular, rounded granules just within the acute margin

of the outer lip, this latter is very broadly reflected and has a longi-

tudinal, somewhat obsolete rib down its centre, this being decussated by seven

transverse striz presents the appearance of a double row of granules; the

outer margin where it joins the body whorl is callous and thickened, the sinus

very deep and rounded, the aperture small, contracted, as nearly as possible

of equal width all the way down from the sinus to the end of the canal. This

species agrees remarkably, as regards sculpture and shape of the whorls, with

a shell described as Pl. scalata by Souverbie (J. de Conch., 1874,

pl. VIII, fig. 4) ; it differs, however, by the totally different character of the

aperture and by its fewer whorls.

Long. 4, diam. 2 mil.

Dredged by Mr. Wood-Mason at the Andamans.

1875.) G. & H. Nevill—Descriptions of new Marine Mollusca. 91

CLATHURELLA Marrenst, n. sp., Pl. VII, Fig. 8.

Shell regularly and conically fusiform, of rather dark brown colour with

bright lilac granules ; seven rounded whorls, reticulated with very thick

somewhat distant ridges, forming at the points of intersection, three rows

of large, pearl-like, slightly oblong granules, on the last whorl these three

rows of granules are repeated, after the sixth row the shell abruptly becomes

contracted, forming an excavated furrow, near the base there are again

six rows of granules, but much smaller and more rounded, these give a some-

what angular appearance to the last whorl ; the columella is much contorted,

or twisted in the middle, of a lilac colour, with a few minute denticulations at

its edge; the aperture and the four strong denticulations at its outer edge

are also of alilac colour, the sinus is deep and rounded, the outer lip is

bright brown, abruptly contracted near its base, forming a strongly marked

canal.

Long. 5, diam, 2 mil.

Tolerably abundant in sand from Balapiti in Ceylon.

(Coll. Indian Mus. and H. Nevill.)

CLATHURELLA ENGINZFORMIS, n. sp., Pl. VII, Fig. 9.

Shell narrowly elongate, convex, in shape resembling several species of

the genus Hngina, peculiarly attenuated and contracted towards the base,

spire pointed ; white, banded with a single somewhat irregular yellow band,

repeated a little below the middle of the last whorl, some of the granules

on this band are yellow, whilst others are white ; whorls seven, distantly

reticulated with thick, obtuse, longitudinal and transverse keels, the

interstices, under a lens, minutely and closely longitudinally striated,

the sculpture is very distinct and clearly marked on the last two whorls,

but much confused and difficult to trace on the upper ones; as in the pre-

ceding species, pearl-like granules are formed where the ridges cross one

another, in the present shell however they are more regular in size and

more rounded, there are three rows of these granules on each whorl,

besides an additional smaller one and some indistinct transverse ridges close

to the suture; there are ten longitudinal keels on the last whorl ; sinus deep,

but rather contracted, bent down rather abruptly ; aperture very straight

and narrow, suddenly widening a little close to the end of the canal, seven

rather large regular granules at the inner margin of the outer lip.

Long. 54, diam. 24 mil.

In sand from Balapiti in Ceylon.

(Coll. Indian Museum and H. Nevill.)

92 G. & H. Nevill—Deseriptions of new Marine Mollusca. [No. 2,

CLATHURELLA LEMNISCaTA, Nevill, Pl. VII, Fig. 11.

J. R. A. S. (Ceylon Branch), 1869.

White, with one brown band just below the sutures and with a second

one towards the base of the last whorl, the latter fills the excavated fur-

row and shows also in the interior of the aperture, the columella also is

stained brown ; whorls seven, distantly latticed with very broad longitudinal

and transverse keels, forming oblong granules where they cross one another,

there are four of these transverse granulose keels on each whorl, the upper

one small and somewhat indistinct, the two middle ones very prominent,

the lowest one small, scarcely perceptible, almost hidden by the next

whorl; the last whorl has five of these keels, the first smaller than the

others, then an excavated furrow as in Clathurella fusoides, Reeve, and in

Clathurella Blanfordi, nobis.

Long. 64, diam. 23 mil.

In sand from Ceylon and Mauritius (nobis), Bombay (Rey. S. B.

Fairbank), and Gwadar in Persia (W. T. Blanford).

We give a figure, from a Mauritius specimen, of this widely distributed

little species.

(Coll. Indian Museum and H. Nevill.)

CLATHURELLA CONTORTULA, n. sp., Pl. VII, Fig. 12.

Shell globosely conical, somewhat peculiarly twisted or bent, suture

distinct ; white, with a pink tinge towards tbe top ; apex very obtuse, with

a decollated appearance ; whorls 6, longitudinally ribbed, ribs thick and

prominent, distantly transversely striated, so as to present a granulose ap-

pearance; at the base of the last whorl several rows of small granules ;

columella peculiarly twisted, aperture narrowly contracted, outer lip thick,

in the middle bent inwards. This shell seems very close to Reeve’s Pl.

obtusa, the shape however is different, the aperture more contracted, &c.

Long. 53, diam. 23 mil.

Abundant in sand from Balapiti in Ceylon.

(Coll. Indian Museum and H. Nevill.)

CLATHURELLA BLANFORDI, n. sp., Pl. VII, Fig. 14.

Shell cylindrically ovate, elongate, sutures rather indistinct, apex

sharp and pointed, a beautiful deep mauve colour throughout ; whorls 7

to 8, longitudinally and transversely ribbed, ribs very prominent, of equal

thickness, forming granules at the points of intersection, towards the base of

the last whorl an excavated furrow as in our C. lemniscata, &c.; columella

short and twisted, aperture moderately wide, contorted, with a rather large

sinus, outer lip thickened with two or three granules just within the aper-

ture.

Long. 52, diam, 23 mil.

1875.| G.&H. Nevill—Deseriptions of new Marine Mollusca. 93

In sand from Annesley Bay in Abyssinia. I have named this prettily

coloured little shell after Mr. W. T. Blanford, to whom the Indian Museum

is indebted for it, as well as for very many other interesting species from the

same locality.

CLATHURELLA ARMSTRONGI, n. sp., Pl. VII, Fig. 13.

Shell pyramidically elongate, angular in the middle of the whorls, very

pointed at base, suture distinct, apex very sharp and pointed ; colour

uniform chocolate-brown ; whorls eight, the first two perfectly smooth, the

ard and 4th with two transverse keels in the centre, the last four obtusely

and distantly longitudinally ribbed, transversely regularly striated ; colu-

mella much contorted or twisted, with a shining callosity which is pro-

minently rugosely granulated as in the genus Cythara ; aperture short and

much contorted, with a large, prominent, tooth-like tubercle at the junc-

tion of the outer lip with the columella and with a remarkably wide, deeply

excavated sinus ; outer lip thickened, transversely striated, peculiarly and

minutely, very closely granulated just within the aperture ; in three of the

four specimens the columella and margin of the outer lip are stained a

brighter brown than the rest of the shell, The above characters will serve

easily to distinguish this shell from Pl. arctata of Reeve, the only species

which, as far as we know, it at all resembles.

Long. 5, diam. 24 mil.

The type was dredged by Mr. Wood- Mason at the Andamans in

25 fths. Dr. Armstrong of the Indian Coast Survey has also presented to

the Indian Museum three specimens, which he dredged at about the same

depth in the Paumben Straits, in these latter the columella and outer lip are

stained a bright brown, but there is no other difference from the type form,

CYTHARA GRADATA, n. sp., Pl. VII, Fig. 15.

Shell compressedly, ovately oblong ; sutures excavated, apex very obtuse,

having a decollated appearance, pure white throughout ; whorls six, longi-

tudinally ribbed, ribs continued to the extreme base of the last whorl, trans-

versely very regularly striated, columella almost straight, slightly rugose at

its upper part ; aperture narrowly contracted, especially towards its base,

sinus small ; outer lip very thick, regularly rounded, granulated just within

the aperture.

Long. 5%, diam. 2 mil.

Not uncommon in sand from Balapiti in Ceylon (nobis) and Bombay

(Rev. 8. B. Fairbank).

(Coll. Indian Museum and H. Nevill.)

Cyrmara pDuBIoSA, n. sp., Pl. VII, Fig. 18.

We have felt considerable doubt whether the present species is really

distinct from the shell described by Reeve as Mangelia coniformis, Gray

94 G. & H. Nevill—Deseriptions of new Marine Mollusea. [No. 2,

MS., the greater thickness of shell, straighter outer lip, and less oblique

longitudinal ribs seem, however, to distinguish the present form. Shell

ovately conical, thick, apex mammillate ; white, with a broad brown stain on

the back of the last whorls ; whorls 7, the first three embryonal, the next

three angular, the longitudinal ribs only beginning towards the base of each

of them, give the appearance of a row of nodules just above the suture ;

the last whorl unusually straight and regular, with an excavated shelf at the

top, transversely and closely striated, strie somewhat obscure, peculiarly

undulating and interrupted, decussated with somewhat indistinct longi-

tudinal almost straight ribs, commencing at the base of the excavated shelf;

regularly and closely denticulated both on the rather widely spreading

callosity covering the columella and also just within the margin of the

straight outer lip ; aperture contracted, much straighter and narrower than

in Reeve’s figure of coniformis.

Long. 73, diam. 4 mil.

Apparently very scarce, four specimens in sand from Mauritius and one

from Port Blair, Andamans.

CyTHarA IssEtt, n. sp., Pl. VII, Fig. 17.

Shell thick, ovately conical, suture very distinct, apex pointed ;

white, with an orange band in the middle of the whorls, the band repeated

on the last whorl, this band is distinct on the longitudinal ribs, but only

here and there traceable in their interstices ; whorls seven, the first three

embryonal (in dead specimens nearly always wanting), the others longi-

tudinally concentrically ribbed, ribs very thick, throughout closely trans-

versely striated ; columella nearly straight with a moderate sized callosity,

closely covered with distinct granules and transverse rugosities; aperture

narrow, widening somewhat abruptly near the base, sinus moderate, outer

lip thickly reflected, transversely striated, slightly rounded, a row of large,

regular granules just within the aperture.

Long. 72, diam. 4 mil. (decollated specimen of four whorls only).

Common in sand from Balapiti, Ceylon.

I have named this shell after M. Issel of Genoa, whose works on the

shells of the Red Sea, Persia, and Borneo, afford most valuable aid in

determining our Indian Ocean shells.

(Coll. Indian Museum, Rev. J. Warneford, M. Issel and H. Nevill.)

Cyruara Issext, var. CerNica, (? sp. nov.), Pl. VII, Fig. 16.

Considerably smaller than the type form, the entire, full grown figured

specimen being only 63 in length and 23 mil. in breadth ; there is apparently

no other difference, except that the sinus is a trifle less distinct, and the

aperture a little straighter,

Mauritius,—rare.

1875.{| G. & H. Nevill—Deseriptions of new Marine Mollusca. 95

fT ARGINELLA (GLABELLA) PICTURATA, Nevill, Pl. VIII, Figs. S—9.

J. A. S. B. 1874, p. 23.

We have nothing to add to our description of this pretty little shell,

which would appear to be very local, as we have only seen specimens from

the Mauritius.

Marerneia (Vonvarina) rnconspicua, Nevill, Pl. VIII, Figs. 10—11.

J. A. S. B., 1874, p. 28.

The Museum is indebted to the Rev. 8. B. Fairbank for specimens —

of this species from Bombay ; the type is from Mauritius, where it is

tolerably abundant.

MARGINELLA (VOLVARINA) DEFoRMIS, Nevill, Pl. VIII, Fig. 12.

J. A.S. B., 1874, p. 28.

This appears to be a very rare shell, three or four specimens, all from

Ceylon, being the only ones we have ever seen,

ManrGinena Issent, n. sp.

We propose to change to Marginella Isseli the name of a shell called

M. pygmea by Issel (Malac. del Mar Rosso, p. 216), there being already a

species of that name described by Sowerby in 1846. This minute species

was dredged abundantly by Mr. W. T. Blanford off the coast of Persia

in 25 fths.

Nassa OBESA, n. sp., Pl. VIII, Figs. 2—38.

Shell thick, stout, globosely conical, smooth and shining, spire very

pointed, apex acute ; brown, indistinctly and minutely mottled with white,

nreoularly stained near the suture with a darker shade of brown, the colou-

ration agrees perfectly with Reeve’s fig. 6 (mutabilis, L., from the Medi-

terranean) ; whorls 10, the three first without sculpture, very small, the

others longitudinally, obliquely thickly ribbed ; the ribs and their mterstices

are of about equal thickness, the former are almost, or altogether, obsolete on

the back of the last whorl, four or five, however, are always present close

to the callous rib behind the outer lip; transversely somewhat distantly

grooved, the grooves towards the base of the last whorl and the two or

three upper ones more deeply incised than the others and forming two

rows of more or less granulose ridges immediately beneath the suture ;

columella with a moderately large white callosity, slightly rugose, aperture

ridged near its margin.

Long. max. (wanting the three first embryonal whorls) 22, diam.

max. 14 mil,

Kutch,—rare. Major Godwin-Austen has been good enough to compare

this species for us with the British Museum and Mr. Hanley’s collections: he

13

96 G. & H. Nevill—Deseriptions of new Marine Mollusca, [WNo. 2,

confirms our opinion that it appears to be new, the nearest he could find

being Reeve’s algida (Conch. Icon., fig. 145), from Moreton Bay, Australia ;

the present species bears a remarkable resemblance in many respects to J.

mutabilis, its thickness, different sculpture, rugose columella, &c. will, however,

distinguish it. At Ceylon and Penang we have found a variety which

approaches nearer to IV. algida than the figured type form from Kutch.

N. OBESA, nobis, var. CEYLONICA.

More acuminate, less globose, suture more distinct; longitudinal ribs

on the antepenultimate whorl more or less obsolete, transverse grooves on

the last two whorls almost obsolete; callosity on the columella a shade

more defined and less rugose.

Long. (perfect specimen) 19, diam. 10 mil.

Ceylon and Penang.

(Coll. Indian Museum and H., Nevill.)

Nassa Perstca, v. Mart.

Deshayesiana, Iss.

A common shell both at Aden and the Andaman Islands. It is admirably

described and figured in a most interesting and important paper by von

Martens, published as a separate part of the ‘ Nov. Conchol.’ under the title

of ‘ Ueber vorderasiatische Conchylien.’

CoLUMBELLA PARDALINA, Lam.

This most variable species abounds on the reefs at the Andamans, where

one of us collected many hundreds of specimens in all stages of growth.

Pure white specimens, exactly agreeing with Souverbie’s figure, were abund-

ant, another very similar variety also occurs, white with a broad pale yellow

band round the last whorl (with or without a few yellow spots on the

spire); specimens marked like Reeve’s fig. 75 A. and C. are also common,

but considerably smaller and more compressed: this last variety may be

called Andamanica.

Typical form, very common in Ceylon, long. 163, diam. 9 mil.

Var. lactescens, Souv., J. de Conch. 1866, long. 18, diam. 7 mil.

Var. Andamanica, long. max. 12%, min. 10, diam. max. 63} min.

42 mil.

CoLUMBELLA (MiIrrELLA) BALTEATA, n. sp., Pl. VIII, Fig. 4.

Shell small, elongately fusiform, spire about the same length as the last

whorl, apex pointed, of a bright red colour ; light reddish brown, a single belt

of dark red in the middle of the whorls between the ribs, the ribs them-

selves in their centre are indistinctly white spotted; whorls 7, the upper

ones smooth, the others longitudinally ribbed, ribs obsolete near the suture ;

1875.] G. & H. Nevill—Descriptions of new Marme Mollusca. 97

transversely indistinctly striated, a groove below the suture of the upper

whorls, becoming obsolete near the last whorl ; columella simple and twisted,

outer lip acute, slightly emarginate at the top, aperture striated within.

Long. 5, diam. 14 mil.

Mauritius. Not common.

ZAFRA POLITA, n. sp., Pl. VIII, Fig. 5.

Shell small, slenderly fusiform, attenuated at both ends, perfectly smooth,

glistening spire contorted, nearly but not quite as long as the last whorl! ;

white, with two bands of irregular opaque white flakes on each whorl (four

on the last); whorls 6 (the figured specimen hag had the first broken off),

the last striated at its base, outer lip remarkably thick and bent inwards,

making the aperture peculiarly contracted,

Long. 33, diam. 13 mil.

Mauritius,—rather scarce.

Hasily distinguished by the absence of sculpture and by its remarkably

contracted aperture from its nearest ally, 7. ornata, Pease. Z. purpurea, H.

Ad, from New Hebrides is also found at Mauritius.

ZAFRA SEMISCULPTA, n. sp., Pl. VIII, Figs. 6—7.

Shell narrowly lanceolate, turreted, spire a little longer than the last

whorl, apex pointed; horny-brown throughout; whorls 7, the three first

without sculpture, the rest longitudinally thickly ribbed, ribs about twice

as broad as their interstices (in this respect our figures are slightly at fault),

obsolete on the back of the last whorl, which is transversely striated

at its base; a sharply defined callosity covers the columella, outer lip

scarcely thickened or reflected, not as long as the columella, slightly

_ emarginate at junction with the last whorl ; aperture narrow and contracted,

as wide at the top as at the base.

Long. 3, diam. 1 mil.

This species was dredged by Mr. Blanford at Cape Negrais, off the

coast of Burma.

SIsTRUM VENTRICOSULUM, nu. sp., Pl. VIII, Fic. 16.

Shell small, ovately ventricose, very gibbous in the middle, thick, solid,

abruptly attenuated at base; spire short, acutely pointed, about half the

length of the last whorl; white, here and there stained with pale brown;

whorls 7, the first four very small, embryonal, without sculpture, the next

has two rows of unequal granules, the lower row somewhat pointed and much

the larger ; the last whorl widely excavated at the suture, with a row of pro-

minent granules, rounded beneath with distant, somewhat indistinct longi-

tudinal ribs, transversely rather distantly keeled, forming slightly pointed

granules where they intersect the ribs, the interstices under a lens very mi-

98 G. & H. Nevill—Deseriptions of new Marine Mollusca. [No. 2,

nutely and closely longitudinally striated ; columella with a moderately

spread callosity, which is slightly rugose; canal long, not recurved ; four

denticulations within the aperture, the two upper ones very thick and promi-

nent, outer lip much thickened, slightly emarginate at the upper part.

Long. 54, diam. 83 mil.

Ceylon — Rare.

This is the smallest species of the genus as yet described.

KULIMA ACUFORMIS, n. sp., Pl. VIII, Fig. 1.

Shell very elongate, sharply pointed, white and shining, solid, flexuous ;

whorls 17, cylindrical, slightly angulate at their base, except the last whorl

which is short and rounded ; no impressed line at the suture, varices obliquely

continuous ; aperture oblong, slightly produced in front, rounded at base ;

columella reflected, outer lip scarcely thickened.

Long. 10, diam. 23 mil.

Dredged at the Andaman Islands by Mr. Wood-Mason.

Rare. The above character will easily distinguish this graceful shel!

from its nearest allies, #. lactea and flexuosa, A. Ad.

(Coll. Indian Museum and Rev. J. Warneford.)

Eviima (ARcUELLA) MiriFica, Nevill.

J. A. 8. B. 1874, (Mauritius).

We have lately noticed that H. and A. Adams described a genus under

the name of Bacula, allied to Hulima, (in A. & M.N. H.,1868, Vol. XI, p. 18)

founded on a species from China, which they called striolata ; this shell pro-

bably belongs to the same genus as the species from Mauritius, which we

described as above ; in either case our name for the genus, or sub-genus, will

stand, there being a genus Gaewlum described prior to 1863.

Mirra (TurricvLa) cRuENTAtTA, Ch.

Fig. 1438-9, from the E. Indies.

Typical specimens, as admirably figured by Chemnitz, are found at the

Nicobars (probably the locality whence the type came) and Andamans;

they have two white bands on the last whorl, with 10 to 11 distant,

flexuous ribs, nodosely angled at the upper part; the transverse grooves

rugose, approximately equally incised, forming tolerably regular and oblong

granules where they intersect the ribs.

Long. 193, diam. 8 mil.

M. crurentata, Ch. var. PROXIMA.

This is the shell from the Philippines figured by Reeve (fig. 126) for

eruentata, Ch. ; it is a form which is often mistaken for Reeve’s IZ. armillata ;

it has 16 ribs on the last whorl, isa trifle less flexuous, and less prominently

1875.] G. & H. Nevill—Deseriptions of new Marine Mollusca. 99

angled at the upper part than the type form; the transverse grooves and

double white band are similar.

Common at the Andaman I.

Long. 19, diam. 63 mil.

M. cruentata, Ch. var. SANDVICHENSIS.

Extremely close to the preceding is the form from Ascension I. (Pacific

O.) sent to us by Mr. Pease as “ JL armillata (?) perhaps erwentata, Ch.”

This variety is recorded in the ‘ Donum Bismarckianum’ as armillata, Rv. ;

from which it differs by the less flexuous ribs and different shape of the

whorls, being nearer Reeve’s amanda; it seems to us to be best classed as a

variety of erwentata, Ch.: the whorls are not angulate near the suture, the

transverse grooves are nowhere rugose but are more or less obsolete in the

centre of the last whorl; a groove at the upper part being more deeply in-

eised than the others (in this respect it agrees with armillata), gives the

appearance of a row of prominent, bisected tubercles just below the suture ;

there are 21 ribs on the last whorl, which are only very slightly flexuous, _

ib has a single white band only.

Long. 53, diam. 6 mil.

M. cruentata, Ch., var. amawpA, Rv.

Reeve’s I. amanda, (fig. 318) from the Philippines is only a variety of

this protean species. Specimens dredged abundantly by Dr. Stoliczka at

Singapore agree exactly with Reeve’s typical figure and description. It differs

from erwentata var. proxima by the whorls not being angulate, by a deeply

incised groove near the suture, forming a row of oblong tubercles next the

suture, by the much greater width of the white bands and by the less vivid

orange tinge of the ribs, which are 16 to 20 in number; and from

eruentata var. Sandvichensis by the more regular and rugose transverse

striation and by the broad double white bands ;—it is in fact intermediate

between the two.

Long. 13, diam. 5 mil.

Two specimens from Aden, unfortunately not in good condition,

apparently belong to this variety, the ribs are, however, more distant.

Reeve’s armillata (fig. 315) from the Philippines, may perhaps prove also

to be a variety of cruentata, or it may be a variety of obeliscus, Rv. ; it

seems intermediate between the two.

Mitra (TuRRicuLA) oBELIscUS, Rv. var. ANDAMANICA.

Pl. VIII, Figs. 19—20,

Shell slenderly fusiform, shining; very dark brown with a single very

narrow white band, more distinct on the ribs than in their interstices ; whorls

9—10 (as in WL eruentata and all its varieties), produced, very slightly

100 G. & H. Nevill— Descriptions of new Marine Mollusca. [No. 2,

turreted, not angulate at the upper part ; 18 flexuous longitudinal ribs on the

last whorl, perfectly smooth except near the suture, where they are divided by

a groove, interstices transversely regularly grooved ; canal short, not recurved,

columella and interior of the aperture dark brown.

Long. 14, diam. 44 mil.

Dredged by Mr. Wood-Mason at the Andamans.

This shell in many respects resembles Reeve’s JZ. armillata ; the above

characters will, however, easily distinguish it.

Mirra (TurRicvLa) RADIUS ?, Rv. (an pmpALA, var. ?) Pl. VILL. Figs.

17—18.

Shell pyramidically fusiform,pointed, shining ; white,with a broad brown

band over the lower half of the last whorl and within the aperture, apex

brown; whorls 10, turreted, more cylindrical and produced than those of

MM. dedala, Rv. (fig. 281) or glandiformis, Ry. (fig. 310) ; longitudinally

flexuously ribbed, ribs slightly thickened near the suture, interstices regu-

larly engraved with transverse striz ; four folds on the columella, the lower

one almost obsolete (Reeve gives only two folds to his IZ. radius).

Long. 134, diam. 43 mil.

Dredged by Mr. Wood-Mason at the Andamans ; rare.

This seems to be doubtfully distinct from 12. dedala and glandiformis,

both of which are common shells at the Andamans and at Ceylon; they all

appear to run into one another and may prove to be varieties of one and the

same species.

Mirra (SCABRICOLA) PRETIOSA, Ry.

P. Z. 8. 1846.

Mitra Antonie, H. Ad., P. Z. 8. 1870, (Red Sea).

This species also was lately obtained rather abundantly by Mr. W. T.

Blanford in the Gulf of Oman on the coast of Persia, as also was Turricula

(Thala) casta, H. Ad. (P. Z. 8. 1872, p. 9, from the Red Sea) and a new

species very closely allied to the latter.

Rissorna (P) ABNORMIS, n. sp., Pl. VIII, Fig. 23.

Shell small, thick, shortly fusiform, white, suture distinct; apex re-

markably abruptly and truncately sinistral, as in the Pyramidellide ;

whorls 6, the two first embryonal, without sculpture, the others longitudi-

nally somewhat thickly ribbed (the figured specimen being rather young,

the ribs are less developed than in mature specimens), the last whorl

rounded, with about 15 ribs, obsolete towards the base; throughout trans-

versely, closely, somewhat rugosely striated, so as to form minute, indistinct

eranules where the striz intersect the ribs; columella strongly twisted at base,

covered with a moderately widely spread callosity ; aperture small, peculiarly

1875.] G.& H. Nevill—Deseriptions of new Marine Mollusca. 101

deeply channelled at base, within showing the transverse striation on the

back of the last whorl; outer lip produced, rounded, no sign of any emargi-

nation at the upper part, much thickened, transversely striated, with a sub-

granulose appearance, crenulated at the margin.

Long. max. 3, diam. max. 13 mil.

Mauritius ; not uncommon in sand.

This should probably constitute a distinct sub-genus of Fzssoina, dis-

tinguished by the very distinct canal, twisted columella and sinistral apex ;

a shell dredged in Japan by A. Adams and distributed by him as ‘‘ Lachesis,

n. sp.” is a very closely allied species.

CYcLosTREMA EBURNEA, n. sp., Pl. VIII, Figs. 21—22.

Shell depressedly orbicular, thick and callous, ivory white and shining,

suture distinct ; whorls 5, sharply angled a little below the centre ; longi-

tudinally obliquely plicated, ribs very massive, slightly wider than their

interstices, obsoletely granulated at the angulation ; interstices transversely

very closely, beautifully and regularly striated, old specimens (as the figured

type) are very callous and the transverse striation becomes almost obsolete ;

a very prominent, thick, transverse, rounded keel at the periphery, sculp-

tured like the whorls ; % of the base sculptured as above, the transverse

striation being however more distinct, the remaining 4 round the um-

bilicus is smooth, the sculpture becoming abruptly obsolete ; umbilicus mo-

derate, in old specimens partly covered by the thickened columella, aperture

irrecularly rounded, margins callous and thickened, slightly reflected over

the umbilicus, giving a notched appearance to the columellar margin.

Alt. 24, diam. 42 mil.

Pooree, in the Bay of Bengal. Rare.

This handsome species is like no species of the genus as yet described ;

it perhaps most resembles the West Indian cancellata of Marryat, and it is

possible that the specimens from the Philippines recorded in the Thesaurus

under that name may prove to belong to our species.

Rinercura acuta, Phil.

Mal. Zeits. 1849, (Aden).

R. minuta, H. Ad., (Suez).

Both var. minuta and the larger typical form are extremely common at

- Aden, in the Gulf of Oman, and at Gwadar on the coast of Persia, as also at

Bombay, Ceylon, and Arakan ; an allied form (if not the same) was also ob-

tained by one of us at Natal; the largest adult specimen in the Museum

measures long. 43, diam. 3 mil., the smallest long. 17, diam. 1 mil.; there

are also numerous full-grown specimens of many intermediate sizes. Curi-

ously enough, Dr. Stoliczka obtained this species at Singapore, but not R.

Caron, Hinds. Dr. Armstrong has presented to the Museum a single speci-

102 G. & H. Nevill—Deseriptions of new Marine Mollusca, [No. 2,

men lately dredged alive in Paumben Straits in 39 faths., which must

‘apparently be referred to #. acuta, though it is thicker and more callous

than any of the Persian Gulf specimens and the striation is entirely

obsolete ; owing to its much thicker texture and more developed teeth, the

aperture is much more contracted ; other specimens may eventually prove

this form to belong to a distinct species.

Rineicura Caron, Hinds.

Voy. Sulph. 1844, (Malacca).

This species also was dredged by Mr. Blanford at Gwadar; it is quite

distinct in all its characters from #&. acuta, the peculiar and very different

‘outer lip, slight development of the parietal tooth, and different texture and

striation at once distinguishing it.

RineicuLa aprcavTa, Nevill.

J. A.S. B., 1871, (Mauritius).

Lately found by one of us at the Andamans rather abundantly ; it is

only distinguishable from &, acuta, Phil. var. minuta, H. Ad. by its

smooth, polished appearance, having only three striz at the base of the last

whorl, instead of being striated throughout as in the other species ; it is

slightly narrower and more contracted, less callous, with the teeth more

sharply developed.

RINGICULA ABBREVIATA, 0. sp.

Closely allied to #&. Caron, Hinds; it has the same regular striation

throughout and peculiar corrugated or crenulated outer lip, but has only

33 whorls, the spire being strikingly short and truncated in appearance;

there is no tooth within the outer lip, the parietal tooth is strongly deve-

loped, the callosity is extremely broadly reflected on the lower part of the

columella and is rugose and sub-obsoletely granulose, there are two teeth

on the columella, the lower one of which in some specimens is bifid.

Long. 3 (of which the last whorl alone measures 23), diam. 23 mil,

Balapiti in Ceylon, rather common.

(Coll. Indian Museum and H. Nevill).

Trocuus (TALLORBIS) ROSEOLA, Nevill.

J. A.S. B., 1869, (Ceylon).

T. (Luchelus) Lamberti, Souv., J. de C. 1875, (NV. Caled.)

That M. Souverbie should have overlooked our original description of

this remarkable form is unaccountable, the more so that the figure is an

excellent one, and that the description, as indeed does the name also,

indicates the peculiar colouration of the shell. It may be well to take this

opportunity of stating, that we have found in our Indian seas the greater

1875.] G. & H. Nevill—Deseriptions of new Marine Mollusca. 103

part of the new marine species described from New Caledonia by M.

Crosse and Souverbie; for instance, we had prepared a description of a

new uchelus found by one of us alive at extreme low water on a reef at

Port Blair, Andaman Islands; on receipt, however, of No. 1 of the

Journ. de Conch. for 1875, we found the same species admirably described

and figured by M. Souverbie from N. Caledonia, under the name of Lrochus

(Huchelus) fossulatulus.

TrocHus SaTRraptus, v. Mart.

Nov. Conchol. Sup. V, (Bushire).

T. (Clanculus) Tonnerrei, Nevill, J. A. S. B., 1874, (Aden).

The specimen described by v. Martens is considerably bigger than any

found by us at Aden; in other respects they seem to be exactly similar ; the

denticulations at the base of the columella and within the outer lip were

not sufficiently marked in our figure, though properly recorded in the

description. When we published our species the part of the Nov. Conch.

containing the above description had not reached Calcutta.

Trocuus (GippuLta) HorpsworrHana, Nevill, var.

J. A.S. B., 1871, (Ceylon).

Minolia variabilis, H. Ad., P. Z.8., 1873, (Persia).

This small variety was dredged tolerably abundantly in tho Gulf of

Oman by Mr. Blanford. After a close and careful examination we can detect

no difference from the type form, except in the considerably smaller size of

the Persian Gulf shell; we must, however, state that in this respect we

have seen no intermediate specimens. ‘The Museum possesses typical speci-

mens of G. Holdsworthana from Penang, as well as from Ceylon.

In a collection of shells, numbering some 600 or 700 species, dredged

by Mr. W. T. Blanford off the coast of Persia, and presented by him to the

Indian Museum, are specimens of the following interesting shells: a

single specimen of a species of our genus Lobinsonia, perhaps our R.

Ceylonica ; anew species of Niso and our NV. pyramidelloides (the latter

was also dredged in the Paumben Straits by Dr. Armstrong); Rissoina

Stoppanu and &. Bellardii of Issel, with ten other species of the genus ;

Fossarus Stoliezkanus, nobis, and three new species of the genus; Rimula

propimqua, A. Ad.; a new species of Limaea, very close to the European

species ; Hucharis anqgulata, H. Ad. and Neera pulchella, H. Ad., &c.

It may perhaps be well to record here that specimens of Macrochlamys

Geoffreyt, H. Ad. (P. Z. S., 1868, p. 290) are marked in the collection of

14

104 G. & H. Nevill—Deseriptions of new Marine Mollusca, [No. 2),

the Jardin des Plantes at Paris, as Helix nulia, Fér., H. setiliris, Bens.

as H. turbida, Kér , H. argentea, Ry. as delibata, ¥ér, (also Beck, p. 31, No. 6,

without description) and a variety of the same as carinifera, Fér.,—all from

Bourbon ; H. stylodon, Bens. as depressa, Fér., from Mauritius ; (compare-

Prod. No. 314) H. pedina, Bens. (A. and M. 1862, from Bombay) as A.

vitrinoides, Desh. (Mag. de Conch, 1880), “ collected at Bombay in 1835 by

Dussumier” ; and Hyalimax Maillardi, Fisch. as Suecinea unguicula, Val.,

from Bourbon. There are also specimens marked as H. ochroleuca, Fer.

(loc. P) : an examination of pl. 80, fig, 1, Hist. des Moll., proved beyond doubt

that this name was given to the Mauritian shell described Mr. H. Adams

(P. Z. S., 1869) from our specimens as H. rufozonata ; the Bermuda species

must, therefore, receive a new name,

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

2 ae

Fig. 1. Mangelia fulvocincta, p. 85. Fig. 10. Clathurella singularis, p. 89.

2. ——_—— Fuirbanki, p. 85. 11. ———— lemniscata, Nev., p. 92:

3. Clathurella apiculata, Montr., p. 88. 12. ———— contortula, p. 92.

4 Malleti, Recl., p. 89. 13. ———— Armstrongi, p. 93.

3. perplexa, p. 89. 14. ———— Blanfordi, p. 92.

6. ———— _vigrocincta, Montr., p. 89. 15. Cythara gradata, p. 93.

"7 Masoni, p. 90. 16. Isseli, var. Cernica, p. 94.

8 Martensi, p. 91. 17. -—— Isseli, p. 94.

9 engineformis, p. 91. 18. —— dubiosa, p. 93.

iD Wane

Fig. 1. Eulima acuformis, p. 98. Fig. 14. Drillia acuminata, Migh., p. 84.

2-3. Nassa obesa, p. 90. 16. lucida, p. 84.

A, Mitrella balteata, p. 96. 16. Sistrum ventricosulum, Ney., p. 97.

5. Zafra polita, 97. 17-18. Turricula radius 2, Ry., p. 100.

Bar semisculpta, p. 98. 19-20. ———— obeliscus, Ry., var. An-

8-9. Marginella picturata, Nev., p. 96. damanica, p. 99.

10-11. —————- tnconsspicua, Nev., p. 95. 21-22. Cyclostrema eburnea, p- 101.

12. ———— deforiis, Nevy., p. 96. 28, Rissoina (?) abnorinis, p. 100.

13. Clathurella Smithi, p. 88.

1875.] 105

XII.—List of Mammalia collected by the late Dr. StoticazKa when attached

to the embassy under Sir D. Forsyrn im Kashmir, Ladak, Hastern

Turkestan, and Wakhdn, with descriptions of new Species—By W. 'T.

Branford, #. k. 8., # Z. 8.

(Received July 30th ;—Read August 4th, 1875.)

The collections made by Dr. Stoliczka in Kashmir, Ladak, Kashghar,

and Wakhan comprise a very fine series of mammalia, the description of

which has been entrusted to me by Mr. Hume, who has undertaken the general

direction, besides a large share in the details, of a work intended to be a

memorial of our late friend. It is of course impossible to supply the place

of the naturalist whose collections I shall do my best to describe, for with

him has perished much knowledge of the habits and distribution of the

animals, and although this want can be partially atoned for by the copious

notes he has left behind, much unfortunately can never be replaced. In the

present paper I shall merely give a list of the species of mammalia repre-

sented in the collections, with short characters of those which appear to be

new, reserving all detailed descriptions for the larger work, in which it is

intended to illustrate all the novelties and imperfectly known forms as fully

as possible.

There is always more difficulty in procuring specimens of mammalia

than in collecting terrestrial animals belonging to most of the other classes

of vertebrata and invertebrata, and this is especially the case with the

larger forms. It is consequently not to be expected that the species repre-

sented will be more than a portion of those inhabiting the country. Still

the collection is rich in some respects, and especially in kinds of rodents, and it

adds largely to our knowledge of the fauna of Western Tibet and Hastern

Turkestan. The larger mammals indeed were originally better represented,

but after Dr. Stoliczka’s death many specimens appear to have been removed

from the collection. Such at least was the case with the ruminants. Ina

private letter which Dr. Stoliczka wrote to me, he told me he had sent 22

skins of wild sheep from Kashghar. Of these only 11, 7 males and 4 females,

are now forthcoming, and not one of these has fine horns. There is not a

single specimen of Ovis Polt from the Pamir, the original locality, al-

though I have reason to believe that Dr. Stoliczka brought away one

head atleast. Lastly, there are skeletons of wild sheep and ibex in the col-

lection, of which the heads have disappeared. It is highly probable that

other specimens besides those of Ovis Poli have been similarly made over to

private individuals. The value of the collection for scientific purposes has

been seriously diminished by its being broken up, and the finest specimens

distributed, before it had been examined.

106 W. T. Blanford—On the Mammalia of [No. 2,

For convenience the country traversed may be divided into the Kash-

mir valley, Ladak, the Kuenluen range south of Yarkand (Karakash valley,

Sanjui Pass, &c.), the plains of Eastern Turkestan around Yarkand and

Kashghar, the ranges north of Kashghar, being spurs from the Thian-shan

range, the Pamir, and Wakhan.

The examination of the bats collected has been undertaken by Mr.

Dobson, who will describe them separately.

INSECTIVORA.

1. ERrmNacevs auButus.—Plains of Eastern Turkestan.

2. Sorex (CROCIDURA) MYOIDES, sp. nov. :

S. parvus, murinus, subtus albescens, pedibus albidis, pilis brevibus

sparsis indutis, caudd supra fused, subtus albescente, setis brevissimis con-

fertim annulaté, pilisque longiusculis hic inde instructd, auribus medioeribus,

vostro subtus albido. Long. corporis ewm capite 2.1, caude 1.5, pedis pos-

terioris cum tarso 0:5, auris 0°22 poll. angi.

Hab.—Leh, Ladak.

CARNIVORA.

3. Frtis tynx.—Skins purchased at K4shghar.

4, F.sp. near &. pardinus (? Chaus caudatus, Gray).—Skin purchased

as Kashghar.

5. FE. uncta.—Ladak ; Pamir P

6. Canis tupus.—Skins purchased at Kashghar.

7.* C. sp. nov. near C. awreus but larger.—Skin purchased at Kash-

ghar.

8. C. (VULPES) MonTANUS.—Ladak (purchased) ; plains of Yarkand.

9.* C. (VULPES), sp. immature.—Skin purchased at Kashghar.

10.* Mets, sp. nov.—Skin purchased at Kashghar.

11. Manrres rorya ?—Skin purchased at Yarkand.

12. M. sp. (? M. aprerum, var.).—Skin purchased at Leh.

13. Musrena vutearis ? var.—Purchased at Yarkand.

RODENTIA.

14. Preromys twornatus.—Kashmir.

15, ARCTOMYS AUREUS, sp. nov.

A. aureo-fulvus, dorso nigro lavato, capite antice fulvescenti-cano, ma-

culo fusco ad rostri extremitatem signato, ventre interdum leviter ferru-

* These species are probably new but it is not thought advisable to propose names

on the evidence of imperfect skins.

1875.] Western Tibet and Eastern Turkestan. 107

ginescente, caudd tertiam partem corporis capitisque equante, fulvd, nigro

breviter terminatd ; pilis elongatis corporis omnibus ad basin fuscis. Long.

a rostro ad basin caude circiter 18 (in corio dessiccato), caude vertebrarwm

6, palme 2, plante fere 3, crani 3°7 poll.

Hab.— Kaskasu pass between Yarkand and Sarikol, east of the Pamir.

This is a much smaller species than A. cawdatus, which it resembles

somewhat in colour, but it is never apparently so ferruginous beneath, nor

so black above as are some specimens of the Kashmir marmot. The tail in

A. aureus too is rather shorter in proportion. It appears to resemble A.

Hemachalanus {Hodgson nec Anderson) but to be larger and different in

colour. The skull shews distinctions from all these forms.

16. Arvicota BuyrHt.

Phaiomys leucurus, Blyth, J. A. 8. B. 1863, XXXII, p. 89 (nec Arvicola leucurus,

Gerbe).

Arvicola fuscescenti-fulvus subtus isabellinus, caudd fulvd, quartam

partem totius longitudinis subequante vel excedente, auribus rotundatis me-

diocribus, sparsim pilosis, palmis pentadactylis, ungue pollicari parvo obtuso,

dentibus molariis similibus ws A. mandarini, molario ultimo maxillari postice

magis producto, angulo interno postico ejusdem acutiore, dente anteriore

mandibulari antice angulo fortiore interno munito. Long. sine caudé 4—4:5,

eaude 1°25—1°35, crani 1, auris 0°4, plante 0'8 poll.

Hab.—Uadak.

The genus Phaiomys of Blyth cannot,I think, be separated from Arvicola,

as the only character of any importance, the presence of a claw on the rudi-

mentary thumb of the forefoot, is found in many <Arvicole, the common

water rat, 4. amphibius, amongst others. ‘The name A. Jeucurus is objec-

- tionable in the present case as the species has not a white tail, and the same

specific term had been previously applied by Gerbe to a vole inhabiting

the French Alps, but considered by Blasius identical with A. nivalis.

17. ARyVICOLA STOLICZKANUS, sp. nov.

A. supra lete fusco-rufescens, sive sordide ferrugineus, subtus albus ;

vellere molli, longiusculo, ad basin schistaceo, palmis tetradactylis, plantis

pentadactylis nudis brevibus, tarsis subtus pilis indutis, auriculis parvis e

vellere haud emergentibus, rotundatis, cauda quintam partem totius longi-

tudimis subequante, pilis fulvescenti-albidis setosis mstructa ; dente molario

maxillart ultimo angusto, intus angulis duobus fortioribus antice, nullis

postice, extus quatuor parvulis, duobus antice, ceteris postice, spatio inter=

vemiente, munito. Long. a rostro ad basin caude (in corio dessicato) 4, caude@

1, tarsi 0-7 poll.

Hab.—Nubra valley, Lad4k; Aktaégh near Karakoram Pass.

108 W. 'T. Blanford—On the Mammalia of [No. 2,

In colour this species approaches A. russatus of Radde, but that is

said to have the tail tawny above, and the teeth are described as very

different. The last upper molar in A. Stoliczkanus is peculiarly formed, the

anterior portion having two strong salient angles inside, and two very

weak ones outside, this is followed by an elongate process with two slight

angles outside and none inside, the whole tooth being much elongated.

18. Nesoxta Inpica.—Kashmir.

19. Cricrerus (CRICETULUS) PHxUS, var.—Kuenluen range north of

Sanju pass, Pamir, and Wakhan.

20. OC. (CRICETULUS) FULVUS, sp. nov.

C. peraffinis Criceto pheeo, sed major atque magis fulvus, arenaceo-

fulvus vix cinereus. Long. corporis capitisque 4:5, caude 14, auris 0-75,

tarsi O°7 poll.

Hab.—Plains of Eastern Turkestan, Pamir, and Wakhan.

Another form of the pheus group of hamsters intermediate in size bes

tween C. pheus and C. isabellinus.

21. Mus crassrpes P—Tankse, Ladak.

22. Mus PACHYCERCUS, sp. nov.

M. affinis M. Bactriano, sed minor, caudd breviore, crassiusculd, setosé,

supra fusco-fulvus, subtus albidus, awribus ovalibus majusculis, pilosis,

Long. (exempli in spiritu vini conservati) a rostro ad basin caudeé 2°3,

caude 2, auris 05, plante 0°65 poll.

Hab.—Plains of Hastern Turkestan.

This is apparently the common house-mouse of Eastern Turkestan and

differs from I. Bactrianus of Afghanistan, Persia, and North-western India,

by having a shorter, thicker tail and a differently shaped and larger skull.

The colour is sandy brown.

23. Mus syivaricus, var—Kashghar ; Panja in Wakhan.

24, GERBILLUS CRYPTORHINUS, sp. nov. :

G. supra rufescenti-arenaceus, subtus albus, coloris dorsalis ventralis-

que limite bene notato ; vostro in lobum semicireularem intus pilis brevibus

sparsis indutum, nares obtegentem, desinente; caudé corporis capitisque

longitudinem eaxcedente, cwm dorso superne fere concolore, sed magis rufes-

cente, nist apicem versus, ubi mgrescit, subtus pallidiore, pilis nonnullis ad

apicem caude longioribus nigrescenti-fuscis, auribus mediocribus, ovalibus,

extus antice dense pilosis, mystacibus confertis, capitem longitudine parum

1875. ] Western Tibet and Eastern Turkestan. 109

excedentibus, supremis nigris, ceteris albis ; vellere longiusculo, molli, nitido,

basin versus ad tergum schistaceo ; palmis subnudis, pilis sparsis indutis,

plantis confertissime pilosis ; dente molario ultimo simplici, ncisoribus wni-

sulcatis. Long. exempli majoris nuper occisi a rostro ad basin caude 5:5,

eaude 6°25, auris 0°75, pedis posterioris a calcaneo 1*4 poll. Long. exempli

minoris 4°5, caud@ 5 poll.

Hab.—Plains of Eastern Turkestan.

This form is distinguished from all others with which I am acquainted

by the peculiar flap at the end of the snout covermg the nasal apertures.

This flap is semicircular in form, and hairy inside. I can find no descrip-

tion of a similar appendage in any other species, and there is nothing of the

kind in G. Indicus, G. Hurriane, or in two undescribed species from Persia

and Baluchistan, of all of which I have examined specimens preserved in

spirits.

G. cryptorhinus is coloured like G. meridganus, but is of the same size

as G. tamaricinus. From both the above species and from their ally, G.

collium,* which inhabits western Turkestan, the present species is distin-

guished by the tail being longer than the body.

Another peculiarity of G. eryptorhinus is that the lachrymal bone

appears never to be ankylosed to the skull. Consequently the process of

the lachrymal which in all true Gerbillz projects into the anterior angle of

the bony orbit, is frequently absent from the whole bone being lost, This

was the case in two skulls which I examined.

25. Drevus racopus.—Plains of Eastern Turkestan.

26. Lepus PALLIPES P—Ladak.

27. L. Trperanvus >—Nubra valley, Ladak.

28. L. YARKANDENSIS.

Giinther, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., September, 1875, 4, XVI, p. 229.

L. parvus, affins Lepori tolai, sed multo minor, nusquam niger nec

griseus, auribus usque ad apicem concoloribus, haud nigris, arenaceo-isabel-

linus, fusco plusve minusve ad dorsum lavatus, lateribus lacteis, pectore palli-

dissime rufo, caudd alba, superne fused ; vellere molli, longiusculo, ad basin

cinereo. Long. a rostro ad basin caude 17, capitis 3°6, caude 4, auris 4°25,

tarst 4:25 poll,

* For translations of the characters of this and of some other species described in

Russian by Severtzoff in his Turkestanskie Jevotnie, I am indebted to the kindness of

Dr. Feistmantel. No translations are given in the “ Zoological Record,’’ and in the

“« Archiv fiir Naturgeschichte’’ even the names are omitted. It is greatly to be regretted

that M. Severtzoff does not, like all the best naturalists amongst his countrymen,

describe in a language more generally understood.

110 W. T. Blanford—On the Mammalia of [No. 2,

Hab.—Plains around Yarkand and Kashghar.

This species approaches LZ. tolai, Pallas, but is much smaller, with pro-

portionally longer ears, and is chiefly remarkable for having no black on

the tips of the ears, nor on the tail, and no grey tint on any part of the

boay.

29. L. Pamrrensis, Ginther, 1. c.

LL. supra arenarius vel fusco-isabellinus, infra albus, wropygio albescenti-

cinereo ; caudd superne nigra ; auriwm marginibus superioribus extus nigris ;

pectore pallido rufo ; vellere denso, molli, ad basin, preter ventral, emereo ;

pilis longioribus ad dorsum nigro-terminatis, intermiztis. Long. arostro ad

basin caude circiter 18, caude@ 4, awris a basi anticd 5, ejusdem latitudo 2°75,

erani longitudo 3'5, tarst 5 poll.

Hab.—Banks of Lake Sirikul, Pamir.

This is distinguished from the last by being somewhat larger, by

having the ends of the ears and the upper part of the tail black, and by its

greyrump. It is near to ZL. Tibetanus but differently coloured. The

ears in the dry skin measure only 3°6 in. from the orifice and 45 from the

head outside.

30. lL. SToLiczKANUS, sp. nov.

L. precedenti peraffinis, arenario-fulvus, differt tantum auribus multo

longioribus, vellere dorsali nigro lavato. Long. cori desiccati a rostro ad

basin caude 17°5, caude (vertebrarum) 3, ejusdem cum pilis apicialibus fere

5, cranit 3°5, awris extus 5:2, tarsi 4°9.

Hab.—Hilly country and Thian Shan mountains north-east of Kash-

ohar.

This is rather darker than the preceding species and has much longer

ears. When fresh the latter would probably measure over 6 inches. Both

this and the last appear to have longer ears than L. Lehmanni, Severtzof, in

which they are the same length as the head.

31. Lacomys LADACENSTS.

L. Curzonia, Stol., J. A. 8. B., 1865, XXXIV, Pt. 2, p. 108, nec Hodgson.

L. Ladacensis, Gunther, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Sept., 1875, Vol. XVI, p. 231.

L. major, pallide cervinus, seu rufescenti-fulvus, dorso in estate magis

rufescente, auribus rotundatis, majusculis, extus ferrugineis, velleris dorsalis

dimidio basalt nigrescenti-plumbeo, apiciali primum rufescente, tune demum

albescenti-isabellino, pilis nonnullis longioribus nigris ad dorsum intermiztis,

ventre pedibusque pallide fulvis, capite antice rufescente, vibrissis supe-

1875.] Western Tibet and Eastern Turkestan. 111

ridribus nigris, inferioribus albis. Long. tota circa 9, cranw 2°25, auris 1,

tarst 1°5 poll.

Hab.—Ladak.

This is the common species of northern and north-eastern Ladak but

not apparently of the mountains bordering the Kashmir valley. It is easily

recognized by its peculiar pale fawn colour, more rufous insummer. It was

first described some years ago by Dr. Stoliczka, who referred it to Z. Cur-

zonie. I had occasion subsequently to shew that the true LZ. Curzonie of

Hodgson isa different species, and I have just heard from Dr. Giinther,

whilst this paper is passing through the press, that he has named the

present form Ladacensis: I have consequently withdrawn the name I had

proposed to give it. It is allied to Z. ogotona by the form of the skull.

32. Li. AURITUS, sp. nov.

L. superne sordide fulvus fusco-lavatus, capite humerisque rufescentibus ,

auribus magnis rotundatis, pilis tsabellinis indutis, vellere molli, pilis

basin versus nigrescenti-plumbeis, apices versus in dorso lateribusque isabel-

hinis, fusco-terminatis, subtus albis. Long. (in corio dessicato) tota circiter

75, cranit 1:8, auris 1, tarst 1:2 poll.

Hab.—Pangong lake, Ladak.

A larger form than Z. foylez with much larger ears. The colour

in two skins from Lukung on the Pangong lake is smokey brown. The ears

are as large as in the last species and must in the living animal be nearly

3 Inches across.

33. Li. GRISEUS, sp. nov.

L. sordide griseus, subtus albus, ad dorsum frontemque leviter rufescenti-

lavatus, vellere elongato, molli, ad basin plumbeo-nigro, apices versus in dorso

lateribusque griseo, apicibus ipsis nonnullis fuscis ; awribus magnis rotun-

datis, pilis sparsis albidis indutis. Long. in exemplo nuper occiso 7, capitis

1°75, auris 1:4, tarsi 1°3 poll.

Hab.—Kuenluen range South of Sanju Pass.

I know of no other Lagomys which approaches this in colour. It is a

peculiar grey, almost the colour of Chinchilla. The skulls of the last and

present species approach in character to those of Z. Roylei and L. rufescens

but still exhibit well-marked differences.

34, Lagomys Macroris? Giinther, 1. c—Kuenluen range ?

The above is a wonderfully rich series of Leporide.

112 W. TT. Blanford—On the Mammalia of Western Tibet, §e. [No. 2,

UNGULATA.

85. SUS SCROFA, var. NIGRIPES.

Hab.—Thian Shan mountains near Kashghar.

The two specimens, male and female, closely resemble the European

wild boar, but the legs are black, and there are some trifling cranial differ-

ences, which, although perhaps insufficient to justify specific distinction, are

worthy of notice.

36. Ovis Hersi ?—Thian Shan mountains.

37. O. nanuRA.—Kuenluen range.

88. Capra SrprricaA.—Kuenluen range and Thian Shan mountains.

89. GAZELLA SUBGUTTUROSA, var. YARKANDENSIS.

G. subgutturosa cornibus lyriformibus juxta caput subparallelis, lente

divergentibus ; facie fusco valde striata.

Hab.— Plains of Eastern Turkestan.

This differs much from the typical form of G. swbgutturosa, the horns

taking a much less open curve, and the face markings being much darker,

but as intermediate forms are found in Persia, I do not separate it.

40. Panruotops Hopesont.—Ladak.

41. Crrvus, sp. (horns only)—? Thian Shan mountains N. E. of

Kashghar.

42, CAPRIOLUS PyGarGuS ? (horns only)—Kashehar ?

P. S. Sept. 28th.—The number of the Annals and Magazine of Natural

History for September, 1875, containing descriptions of several species of

hares and Lagomys by Dr. Giinther, was only received just before the last

proof of this paper was passed. Although, under the rules usually adopted

in England, the names given by myself would have priority, from having

been given in a paper read before the Asiatic Society in August, I have

thought it best to withdraw them, and to substitute those given by

Dr. Giinther, in order to obviate any risk of confusion in the nomenclature.

JOURNAL

OF THE

meet it SOCIETY.

Part II.—PHYSICAL SCIENCE.

No. IIJ.—1878.

eee

XIII.—On the species of Marmot inhabiting the Himalaya, Tibet, and the

adjoining regions— By W. T. Buayrorn, F&F. &. S., FZ. 8.

(Received July 30th, 1875 ;—Read August 4th, 1875.)

The distinctions and nomenclature of the Himalayan and Tibetan

species of marmot appear to me in need of careful revision. The necessity

for investigating the subject during an endeavour to ascertain the name of

the Ladak species, and of a new form of which specimens were obtained by

Dr. Stoliezka at the Kaskasu pass, on the road from Yarkand to the

Pamir plateau, has convinced me that the received synonymy of the two

best known species requires reconsideration, and that several of the identi-

‘fications made by Gray, Blyth, Jerdon, and Anderson are erroneous.

The history of the nomenclature of Himalayan and Tibetan marmots

appears to be the following. In 1841,* Mr. Hodgson described a species

from the “ Kachar’’ of Nepal and the plains of Tibet under the name of

A. Himalayanus. In 1843, he redescribed this species and suggested alter-

ing the name to Zibetensis, and at the same time distinguished a smaller form

with a longer tail and somewhat different colouring as dA. Hemachalanus.

From references made at various times to his unpublished catalogue it is

probable that 4. Hemachalanus had originally been called 4. Tibetanus by

Mr. Hodgson, and it appears under that name in the British Museum Cata-

logue of Mr. Hodgson’s collections. In the same year, 1843, Dr. Gray, in the

British Museum ‘ List of specimens of Mammalia’, united A. Himalayanus,t

* For references see below.

¢ Under A. Himalayanus in this catalogue, after the reference to Hodgson’s de-

scription, there is added “Griffith, Jour. A. 8. B. 1841, 779?” The proper referenca is

15

114 W. T. Blanford—On the species of Marmot [No. 3,

and “ A. fulvus, Eversman” to A. bobac of Schreber. There is no evidence

that these species had ever been compared, and the only specimen stated to

exist in the British Museum at the time was said to be from Siberia.

The next addition to the nomenclature was by Jacquemont, who de-

scribed a marmot from the range north of the Kashmir valley as 4. cauda-

tus. His description was published, with a fizure of the animal, in the

appendix by Geoffroy St. Hilaire to Jacquemont’s posthumous work, the

‘Voyage dans I’ Inde,’ in 1844.

In the ‘ Catalogue of the specimens and drawings of the Mammalia and

Birds of Nepal and Thibet presented by B. H. Hodgson, Esq. to the British

Museum,’ the larger or short-tailed marmot is called A. bobac, Gmelin, and

the smaller A, Zibetanus, Hodgson. The same names are preserved in the

second edition of the catalogue issued in 1863.

In 1847 the “large Himalayan marmot” was described by Dr. Jame-

son as Arctomys Tataricus. This description appears to have been over-

looked by Indian naturalists.

In 1851, Horsfield in his ‘ Catalogue of the Mammalia in the Museum

of the Hon. East India Company’ classed both A, Himalayanus and A. cau-

datus as synonyms of A. bobae.

Omitting several notices of the various Himalayan marmots by travel-

lers, the next noteworthy attempt at discriminating the species was by

Adams in 1858. He called the “red marmot” of Kashmir A. bobac, and

the “ white marmot” A. Zibetanus. It is evident, I think, that most writers

apply the name A. bobac to Adams’s “ white marmot.”

Blyth in his catalogue (1863) united all the Himalayan marmots under

A. bobac, Schreber, giving as synonyms Mus arctomys, Pallas (which is the

original name of A. bobac), A. fulvus, Eversman, A. Tibetanus, Himalayanus

and Hemachalanus, Hodgson (the last with a note of interrogation, however),

and A. caudatus, Jacquemont. In a foot note Blyth points out the dis-

tinctions between Hodgson’s two supposed species, but adds that he cannot

satisfactorily discriminate two species in the Society’s skins and skulls. Dr.

Stoliczka* in 1865 was also disposed to unite the two forms found in the

western Himalayas, but he gave no details.

Jerdon, in his ‘ Mammals of India,’ considered that Hodgson was correct

in separating 4. Hemachalanus from the short-tailed form and, consequently,

probably J. A. 8S. B., X, 1841, p. 978, where mention is made by Dr. Griffith of a

marmot, the size of a beaver, found at between 11,000 and 12,000 feet in Afghanistan,

at the Hageeguk, Kaloo, and Erak passes. Of this animal no specimens appear eyer to

have been described, but, as I shall subsequently shew, there is a skull, probably fom

Afghanistan, in the Society’s old collection.

* J, A. 8. B. XXXIV, p. 111, note,

1875.] inhabiting the Himalaya, Tibet, and the adjoining regions. 115

distinguished two species; A. bobac (with A. Tibetanus and Himalayanus of

Hodgson and A. caudatus of Jacquemont as synonyms) and A. Hemuachala-

nus. Kitzinger in his ‘ Versuch einer natiirlichen Anordnung der Nager-

thiere’ enumerates two Himalayan and Tibetan species of Arctomys, which

he calls A. Lataricus, James. (with, as synonyms, 4. Himalayanus, Hodgs,

A, bobac, Gray, and A. caudatus, Gieb.) and A. caudatus, Isid. Geoffr.

In Dr. Falconer’s posthumous ‘ Paleontological Memoirs’ there is an

excellent description of the common marmot of Western Tibet with a full

account of the animal’s habits. He calls the species 4. Zibetana, and ina

note by the editor it is apparently identified with A. Himalayanus, an

identification which, as I shall shew hereafter, is incorrect.

Dr. Anderson in 1871* distinguished two species of marmot from

‘Ladak and the Kuenluen mountains, one of which he identified as 4. bobac

(with Mus arctomys, Pallas, Arctomys fulvus, Evers., A. Himalayanus and

A. Tibetanus, Hodgs. A. caudatus, Jacquemont, A. bobac, Gray, Horsfield,

Blyth, and Stoliczka, and A. Tibetanus, Adams as synonyms), the other

with A. Hemachalanus (synonyms—A, bobac of Adams and partly of Blyth

and Stoliczka).

In 1870, MM. Milne-Edwards described Arctomys robustus from MoU-

pin in Hastern Tibet. And I may conclude these notices by a reference to

M. Severtzoff’s work ‘Turkestanskie Jevotnie, in which A. baibacinus,

Brandt and A. caudatus, Geof. are said to be found in Western Turkestan.

Unfortunately the work in question is entirely in Russian and several of the

identifications are incorrect, so that it is impossible to feel any certainty as

to the animal which Severtzoff has identified with A. caudatus. I think it

improbable that the Kashmir marmot is really found in Russian Turkestan.

It is more probable that the species is the A. awreus described on a previous

page} from the specimens obtained by the late Dr. Stoliczka at the Kaskasu

pass between Yarkand and the Pamir.

I may here state at once that I have reason to believe that, besides

A. robustus, there are not two, but three species of Himalayan or Tibetan

marmots, and that a great part of the confusion in the nomenclature is due

to this circumstance.

In the synonymy above quoted one name frequently occurs, which ap-

pears to me to have been admitted by mistake. This is Arctomys fulvus,

Eversman. Blyth gives no reference; Gray, in the British Museum Cat,

p. 148, gives Griffith, A. K. t. 118, and, as Anderson gives precisely the same,

* The title of Dr. Anderson’s paper in the Proceedings of the Zoological Society

‘On some rodents from Yarkand’ is unfortunate, for only two of the four species de-

seribed had been obtained in Turkestan territory and not one was from the neighbour-

hood of Yarkand, whilst all four are found in Ladak.

+ Ante, p. 109 of this volume.

116 W. T. Blanford—On the species of Marmot [No. 3,

I suppose there may be such a name in some editions of Griffith’s Animal

Kingdom, though I cannot find it in the copy in the Society’s library. In

any case, I have no doubt the species is really A. fulvus of Lichtenstein,

described in Eversman’s ‘ Reise nach Buchara,’ p. 119. That species is a

Spermophilus and not a true Arctomys,* and, consequently, is distinct from

all the Himalayan species, none of which, so far as is known, have cheek

pouches.

The next point for consideration is what is Arctomys caudatus of

Jacquemont, As it is described as having a tail two-thirds the length of

the body, it is evidently not A. bobac,+ to which it is referred by Blyth,

Jerdon, and Anderson. It is clearly, on the other hand, the same as the

species referred by Anderson to d. Hemachalanus. Anderson’s specimen

agrees pretty fairly with Jacquemont’s figure and description ; there is more "

black on the back and tail in the former, and the abdomen wants the ferru-

ginous tint, but neither of these characters is constant. The localities

whence the two were procured are close together ; the marmot skin obtained

by Dr. Henderson and described by Dr. Anderson being from Matayon,

just north (on the Dras side) of the Zogi-laf, between Srinagar and Leh ;

whilst Jacquemont’s type was shot at a place which he called Gombour or

Gombur, close to the head of the Sind valley, but on the Indus side of the

watershed and in the valley of a stream running into the Dras river.

There is a possibility of a second and smaller marmot being found in

the Kashmir ranges, for Vigne, Travels in Kashmir &c., II. p. 230, mentions

seeing one, as large as a small fox, on the road from Srinagar to Skardo. The

animal which I identify with A. eaudatus is the size of a very large fox.

A skin just received at the Indian Museum from Dr. Aitcheson at

Srinagar agrees with that described as A. Hemachalanus by Dr. Anderson,

except that the back is blacker. Mr. Lydekker informs me that these skins

are precisely like those of all the marmots he saw on the ranges north of

Kashmir.

Still, however, I am in no way prepared to admit that Dr. Anderson

was correct in identifying the Ladak marmot with Mr. Hodgson’s A. Hema-

chalanus. ‘The former is a large marmot, one of the largest known species,

the skull measuring 105 mm. (4. 12 inches) or as much as A. robustus.

Hodgson’s A. Hemachalanus on the contrary must be a small marmot, the

body being only 12 to 18 inches long, and the tail 5¢ to 53, the corre-

sponding dimensions (taken from skins) of the Ladak marmot being 22 and

* Brandt, Bull. Ac. Imp. Sc., 1844, II, p. 366.

+ This has been noticed by MM. Milne-Edwards, Rech. Mam, I, p. 312.

¢ This name has been converted into Tooglen pass in the P. Z. 8. 1871,

p. 562.

1875.] inhabiting the Himalaya, Tibet, and the adjoining regions. 117

104 inches.* Dr, Anderson concludes that Mr. Hodgson had never seen an

adult of 4. Hemachalanus and that he drew up his description from immature

specimens. I do not think this view is probable. Hodgson was care-

less in matters of nomenclature, as many naturalists were in his time, but

he collected largely and studied the animals he described carefully, as is

shewn by the minuteness of his descriptions. I scarcely think, had the

specimens he described been half grown that he would have overlooked the

evident immaturity of the skulls, which he must have extracted, for he

describes the teeth. Moreover, I think Dr. Anderson must have overlooked

Mr. Hodgson’s remark that he had kept some of the smaller marmots alive

for months, one of them for over a year anda quarter. Surely he would

have noted their growth during that period. I cannotsay how long a

‘marmot may be in attaining its full growth, but if it requires more than a

year, it differs greatly in this respect from most rodents.

There are also, I think, some important differences between the colour-

ation of Hodgson’s A. Hemachalanusand the Kashmir marmot. ‘The for-

mer is described as having the general colour “ dark grey with a rufescent

tinge which is rusty and almost ochreous red on the sides of the head,

ears and limbs, especially in summer. Bridge of nose and last inch of tail

dusky brown.” In the latter the general colour is more yellow, the whole

lower parts and the limbs are ferruginous (there appears to be much varia-

tion, perhaps sexual, in the colour of the upper parts), the bridge of the

nose is not dark, but the tip is, and at least 3 inches at the end of the tail

are black.

Tt is true that Dr. Anderson mentions his having obtained skins pur-

chased at Darjiling which were undistinguishable from the Ladak marmot.f

It is probable that these skins had been brought from upper Sikkim, or

Tibet, but if so, and if they are correctly identified, the only conclusion I

can come to is that these must be three species of marmots in the Himalayas

of Sikkim and Nepal.

A. Tataricus I am unable satisfactorily to identify. The reference in

Wicgmann’s ‘ Archiv’{ runs thus “ A supplementary description of the large

Indian Marmot has appeared by Dr. Jameson, who has applied to it the

name of Arctomys Vataricus (Inst. p. 384).” The work referred to is

* The length of the tail in the Ladak specimen is without the hair at the end.

In Mr. Hodgson’s measurement the hair is, I think, included, although its inclusion is

not specified, because it is comprised in the corresponding measurement of the tail of

A. Himalayanus on the same page.

t+ Mr. Wood-Mason has had search made for these skins, but owing-to so many of

the Museum specimens having been packed away pending their transfer to the new

building, it has not been possible to find them.

£ 1848, Pt. 2, p. 155.

118 W. T. Blanford—On the species of Marmot [No. 3,

probably a French one, L’ Institut, at least so I infer from the fact of a

paper by Gervais quoted with a similar reference in the ‘ Archiv’ being

assigned to this magazine in Carus and Engelmann’s ‘ Bibliographia Zoolo-

gica’. At the same time neither Jameson’s nor Gervais’ paper is quoted in

the Royal Society’s Catalogue, although L’ Institut is included in the works

catalogued.

There is a short paper by Dr. Jameson on the Zoology of Chinese

Tartary in the Calcutta Journal of Natural History,* in which he briefly

mentions a marmot which he observed beyond the Niti pass, and of which

he says that it is of a reddish yellow colour and the size of a rabbit. I

know of no Himalayan marmot which when adult is so small as a rabbit ;

the smallest species is A. Hemachalanus, and possibiy this may have been

the animal observed by Jameson, but in Weigmann’s ‘ Archiv’ he is said to

have described the large Indian marmot: of course it does not follow that

the species seen by him north of the Niti Pass was the same which he

subsequently named A. Zataricus. Meantime the identification is of less

moment, because in all probability the species named by Jameson was

either A, Himalayanus, A. Hemachalanus, or A. caudatus, all of which names

have priority over A. Tutaricus.

But the most important point of all is the identification of the short-

tailed Himalayan marmot with A. bobac. This apparently was made by

Gray without his having examined specimens of A. Himalayanus ; and Blyth,

Jerdon, and Anderson, so far as I know, had never seen examples of the

true A. bobac, so that I doubt if the species have ever been compared.

Pallas (Zoog. Ros. As. I, p. 155) united all the known} Asiatic marmots

without cheek pouches to the Bobac, which he called Arctomys Baibak, but

he described the Kamschatkan race as a well marked variety. Brandt

(Bull. Ac. St. Pet. 1844, II, p. 364) separated this Kamschatkan form as

a distinct species, which he called A. Camschatica, but which he suggested

might be identical with the American A. monax, and he indicated another

species from the Altai under the name of A. baibacina, which, however, he

did not describe.t Severtzoff quotes this species A. baibacinus from western

Turkestan. Without attaching much importance to this circumstance for

the reasons already mentioned, I think it yet remains to be shewn that the

true A. bobac of Schreber, Mus arctomys of Pallas, is found in Central Asia

at all. The name was originally applied to the marmot of Poland and

* Vol. VII, p. 360.

+ Of course no Himalayan marmots had been described in 1811 when Pallas’s

work was first published.

+ He appears to have described it subsequently in a paper on the vertebrata of

Siberia, which I cannot find. Itis mentioned by Milne-Edwards in Rech. Mam. p.

311, note.

a ae

1875.] inhabiting the Himalaya, Tibet, and the adjoining regions. 119

Galicia, which appears to be a much smaller animal, weighing 8 to 10hbs., the

body being 16 inches, the tail 4 inches 4 lines, or including the hair 5’ 4”

long, whereas in 4A. Himalayanus the head and body measure 22 to 24

inches, and the tail 62 with the hair according to Jerdon, 53 to 6% accord-

ing to Hodgson. Pallas’s original measurements of A. bobac, which I

quote above,* are probably in French inches, which would render the

difference rather less, but still it is very considerable.

Pallas’s original description of the colour of A. bobac runs thus: Color

rostro et circa oculos magis minusve fusco-nigricans, inter mystaces sub-

Serrugineus ; parotides pallide, gula ferruginea, reliquum corpus infra et

artus interiore latere ferrugineo-lutescentia ; supra gryseus, pilis longioribus

mnigris, vel fuscis apice gryseo-pallidis magis minusve inumbratus. Cauda

basi subtus ferruginea, majore parte lutescens, a medio picea, apice atra.

The animal referred to A. Himalayanus does not differ greatly in colour

from Pallas’s description. MM. Milne-Kdwards,} however, point out that

A. bobac is a very much paler animal than A. robustws, which appears

closely to resemble A. Himalayanus, and may perhaps be the same.

On the whole I think it is far safer for the present to keep 4. Hima-

layanus distinct from A. bobac. I have not sufficient materials at present

to determine whether the short-tailed marmot of the Kuenluen and Ladak

is absolutely identical with the type of A. Himalayanus, but it appears to

correspond fairly and I know of no distinction.

The figure of A. robustus in the ‘ Recherches sur les Mammiféres’ is

much more richly coloured than A. Himalayanus is, but the authors of

the work point out that the plate is over-coloured. ‘The species are

evidently very closely allied and may possibly be identical. The skulls are

very similar, the nasals being a little shorter in A. robustus, and the point

of bifurcation of the sagittal crest further back, but there is a possibility

that these differences may be due to age, and it is evident from the state

of the teeth that the figured skull of 4. robustus, although apparently full

grown, is younger than that of A. Himalayanus which I have compared

with it: this skull of A. Himalayanus is from one of the skins brought

by Dr. Henderson from the Sanju Pass, Kuenluen range. There are,

however, some little differences in the form of the zygomatic arch, &c.,

and especially in the relation of the longitudinal to the transverse diameter,

which make me hesitate to consider the two the same.

In trying to throw some light upon this question of the Himalayan

marmots, I have examined the following specimens.

I, Four skins with skulls of A. awreus from the Kaskasu Pass.

* Glires, p. 113.

7+ Recherches Mam. p. 311.

120 W. T. Blanford—On the species of Marmot [No. 3,

II. Three skins of 4. Himalayanus (the same as examined and de-

scribed by Anderson) from Kitchik Yilak, close to the Sanju Pass in the

Kuenluen range, south of Yarkand (‘ Lahore to Yarkand,’ p. 101).

III. Askin of A. caudatus (the same as described by Anderson as

A. Hemachalanus) from Matayon on the Zogi-la near Dras between Kash-

mir and Ladak, and a flat skin of the same probably from Kashmir; also

a skull of the same brought by Mr. Lydekker from the range north of

Kashmir.

IV. The specimens made over by the Asiatic Society to the Indian

Museum, three stuffed skins, a skeleton, and two skulls, all enumerated in

Blyth’s Catalogue*. These require a few words of notice. By both Blyth

and Anderson the whole have been referred to A. bobac (1. e. A. Hima-

layanus). Two stuffed specimens (one of them young and both with im-

perfect tails) which were presented by Mr. Hodgson, probably belong to

this species. The other specimens are a stuffed skin and the skeleton from

an animal brought alive to Calcutta from Sikkim, and two skulls, one

presented by Lieut. Brownlow, who probably procured it in the western

Himalayas, and the other from the Burnes collection, and, therefore, it

may be expected, from Afghanistan. I have carefully examined the three

skulls and am convinced that they belong, in all probability, to three

different species, that of the skeleton differing widely from both the others

in the form of the palate and of the nasal bones, in the length’ of the sagittal

crest and the point of its bifurcation, whilst of the two remaining one is much

larger than the other, besides other differences. The skeleton is evidently

that of a fully adult animal. It measures from snout to insertion of tail

15 inches along the curve of the back, the tail vertebre 43. This is very

close to the measurement of A. Hemachalanus, and the skin agrees with the

description of that species in having the frontal portion of the face dark

brown. The fur is short and thin, but it is scarcely probable that the fur of

a marmot which had lived for months in Calcutta would retain its original

character. I think it highly probable that this specimen really belongs to

A. Hemachalanus. It certainly does not agree with A. Himalayanus.t

The skull presented by Lieut. Brownlow is, I find by comparison, that

of A. caudatus, The Burnes’ collection skull, although somewhat resem-

bling that of the new species A. aureus, appears to me to belong to a

* Cat. Mam. Mus. As. Soc., p. 108.

+ Ishould add, that in these specimens, as in all other skins either of birds or

mammals, which have been exposed to the light for many years in Calcutta, the colours

have faded greatly, and in all the mammals the texture of the fur appears to have

changed, becoming much harsher. I think it much to be regretted that small mammals

should be mounted at all; as a rule valuable skins and types should be kept unmounted

in drawers, and not exposed.

1875.] inhabiting the Himalaya, Tibet, and the adjoining regions. 121

different and probably undescribed species, which should be looked for in

Afghanistan. It is very possibly the form mentioned by Dr. Griffith as

seen by him at the Hageeguk, Kaloo, and Hrak passes,* and also briefly

referred to in Sir Alexander Burnes’ ‘ Cabool.’+

It is useless to refer to the various notes by travellers, on the marmots

observed by them, in the hope of ascertaining the distribution of the differ-

ent species, since the external differences are, as a rule, not sufficient to render

the brief descriptions given characteristic of any particular kind, and the

task of determining the exact range of each species must be left to future

research. I shall conclude this paper by giving the names and the synonymy,

so far as I have been able to unravel it, of the four species, the existence of

which in the Himalayas and the neighbouring ranges to the north-west

I consider probable, merely adding that in all probability another species,

hitherto undescribed, inhabits Afghanistan. Iam quite ata loss to con-

eeive what is the form with large ears represented in Hooker’s ‘ Himalayan

Journals,{ and which is said to migrate sometimes in swarms from ‘Tibet

to Upper Sikkim. Certainly, no known Himalayan marmot approaches this

animal in the structure of the ears§.

Section 1.—Short-tailed marmots having the tail less than one third the

length of the head and body.

1. Arctomys HIMALAYANuws.

A. Himalayanus, Hodgson, J. A. 8. B., 1841, X, p. 777.

“A. Himalayanus of Catalogue, potius Tibetensis hodie,’ Hodgs., J. A. 8. B., 1843,

XI, p. 409.

“A. bobac, Schreb.” partim, Gray, List of the specimens of Mammalia in the col-

lection of the British Museum, 1843, p. 148, ec Schreber.

“ A. bobac, Gmelin”, Gray, Cat. spec. &c. Mammalia and Birds of Nepal and Thibet

presented by B. H. Hodgson, Esq. to the British Museum, p. 23, (1846) ; xee Gmelin.—

Tb. 2nd Edition, p. 12, (1863).

2? A. Tataricus, Jameson, L’Instit. 1847, XV, p. 384.

“A. bobac, Schreb.” Horsf. Catalogue of Mammalia in the India House Museum,

p. 164, (1851) ; zec Schreber.

“A. Tibetanus, Hodgs.” white marmot of Kuropeans, Adams, P. Z. 8. 1858, p. 521.

“A. bobac, Schreb.” partim Blyth, Cat. Mam. Mus. As. Soc., p. 108, (1868) ; nee

Schreber.

A. bobac, Schreb.”” Jerdon, Mammals of India, p. 18, (1867), nec Schreber.

“A. Tataricus, Jameson,” Fitzinger, Sitzungsb. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien, 1867, LV, i,

p. 491.

* See note on page 114.

+ p. 163.

£ Vol. I, pp. 109, 170, smaller edition.

§ I cannot help feeling some doubt as to whether the animal figured is a marmot

at all.

16

122 W. T. Blanford—On the species of Marmot [No. 3,

A. robustus, H. and A. Milne-Edwards, Nouv. Arch. du Musée, VII, Bull. p. 92

(1870).—Recherches sur les Mammiferes, I, p. 309, Pl. XLVII, XLIX.

“A. bobac, Schreb.” Anderson, P. Z. §., 1871, p. 560, mec Schreber.

General colouration greyish fulvous, beneath yellow, hair of the back

with very short black tips, tail dark brown at the end. Length 22 to 24

inches, tail with hair at the end 52 to 62.

Hab.—Tibet : Ladik : Kuenluen south of Yarkand.

Section 2.—Marmots with tails one third or more than one third the length

of the head and body.

2. Arctomys HEMACHALANUS.

A. Hemachalanus. Hodgs., J. A. 8. B. 1848, XII, p. 410.

“ A. Tibetanus, Hodgs.,”’ Gray, Cat. Mam. Birds Nipal, p. 24, (1846)—2nd Edition

p. 12, (1863).

“ 4. bobac, Schreber”’ partim, Blyth, Cat. Mam. Mus. As. Soc. p. 108, (1863), nee

Schreber.

“ A. hemachalanus, Hodgson,” Jerdon, Mam. Ind. p. 182, (1867).

“ Qolour dark grey with a full rufous tinge, which is rusty and almost

ochreous red on the sides of the heads, ears and limbs, especially in summev.

Bridge of nose and last inch of tail dusky brown. Length 12 to 13 inches

tail (with hair) 54 to 53”.*

Hab,—Sikkim and Nepal, in the higher regions of the Himalayas.

3. ARCTOMYS CAUDATUS.

A. caudatus, Sacquemont, Voyage dans |’ Inde, Vol. IV, Zoologie, p. 66, Atlas,

Vol. IT, Pl. 5, (1844).

“ A. bobac, Schreber,”’ red marmot of Europeans, Adams, P. Z. 8., 1858, p. 521, nec

Schreber.

“ A. bobac, Schreber,” partim Blyth, Cat. Mam. Mus. As. Soc. p. 108, (1863), nee

Schreber.

“A. bobac, Schreber,” partim, Jerdon, Mam. Ind. p. 182, (1867), zee Schreber.

“ A. caudatus, Isid. Geoff.,” Fitzinger, Sitzungh. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien, 1867, LY,

1, p. 491.

A. tibetana, Falconer, Paleontological Memoirs, I, p. 583, nec A. Tibetanus, Hodgs.

“A. hemachalanus, Hodgson’, Anderson, P. Z. 8. 1871, p. 561, nee Hodgson.

Colour rich rufous yellow when adult, more or less black on the back:

sometimes the back is black throughout : lower parts with a strong ferrugi-

nous tinge ; tail black for the greater portion of its length. Head and body

about 25 in., tail with hair 13, or more than half the length of the body.

Hab.—Mountains north of Kashmir: Ladak.

* These are Hodgson’s measurements, but I anticipate that the animal grows to

a larger size, to judge by the skull, which is as large as that of 4. aureus.

1875.] inhabiting the Himalaya, Tibet, and the adjoining regions. 123

4, ARCTOMYS AUREUS.

A. aureus, W. Blanf., ante, p. 106.

On a previous page I described this species very briefly. The following

is a fuller account, taken from four specimens, three brought by Dr. Stoliczka

and one by Captain Biddulph from the mountains west of Yarkand.

General colour tawny to rich brownish yellow, the dorsal portion con-

spicuously tinged with black from all the hairs having black tips, but these

are far more conspicuous in some specimens than in others ; face grey to

blackish with a rufous tinge, covered with black and whitish hairs mixed, which

are about half an inch long on the forehead, the black hairs more prevalent

in some specimens, apparently males, than in others ; the middle of the fore-

head sometimes more fulvous. Just on the nose is a blackish brown patch,

and there is a narrow band of short black hairs mixed with white around

the lips: sides of the nose paler; whiskers black. Hairs of the back 12 to

13 inches long, dark slaty at the extreme base for about ¢ inch, then yellow,

becoming Heoner golden yellow towards the extremity, ite ends black. In

the blackest specimens (? males) the posterior portion of the back wants

the black tips. Tail the same colour as the back, except the tip, which is

black; the length of the black tip varies, but never exceeds about 23 inches

in the specimens before me, and in three out of the four it is only about an

inch: hairs of the tail about 2 inches long, brown at the base. Lower parts

rather browner, the hairs shorter and thinner, chocolate brown at the base,

without the short woolly under-fur, which is very thick on the back. Feet

above yellowish tawny like the sides.

Length taken on the dried skins :

Nicsenbomimseriiom Of baller) Jens cs «. chee 16°5 to 18°75

Tail, without hairs at the end, .......0-+204s 5 to 65

Epairseabrena Ol ball eee Mer cine! A... se 15 to 1°75

Fore-foot (palma) to eud of toe, without claws, ..... - 2:05

Mid toe, without claw, measured below, ..... Rte aters 0:8

Claw, measured above, ..i..¢.--.s00- ehataatels adoae OG

Hind foot (planta) to end of tee; without claws, ...... 29

MER Goes wilulnout: Claw, civ ches c'e'c'e so c's patctorearcen vieters « 08

Claw of do., measured above, ...sercercscee Meters i Oe

This is a very much smaller animal than A. eaudatus, and its tail ap-

pears shorter in proportion and with less black. The colour of the lower

parts is less rufous and the feet are tawny yellow, not ferruginous as in the

larger form. The fur of A. awreus too is softer. From A. Himalayanus

the present species is distinguished by its much longer fur, by being much

yellower in tint and less grey, and by its longer tail. It is also much smaller.

From A. Hemachalanus it may be recognised by its longer tail and richer

colouration.

124 W. T. Blanford—On the species of Marmot [No. 3,

The following are the dimensions of skulls of all the above species in

parts of a metre, those of A. robustus having been taken from the figures.

I also add the measurements of the skull of a specimen of A. bobac belonging

to the Berlin Museum.

se | So | SS ¢ 3

weiss | s S = SS S

ee} se |S | RS

Bee) NOON Se

Length from occipital plane to an-

terior end of nasal bones,...... "105 | :101 "104| :093! -105 | 094 | 0885

Breadth across widest part of zy- |

ROUAAO GOMES, 55000 060000 60 0655| -0675| :065) ‘061| -066 | -057 | °05

Do. behind postorbital processes, | -019 | -019 019] °020| 016 | -017 | -0165

Length of nasal bones,.......... "045 | -040 — 038) -042 | -088 | -08

Breadth do. behind, 010 | -013 011] :011| -017 | -0105{ 0105

Do. do. in front, ‘018 | -018 ‘015| :016) -020 | -0165; °6155

Length of row of upper molars, .. | -026 — "025| :024| -0235| -020 | -0215

Do. lower jaw from angle |

Lovalveolarimarcim 9.) =. cemae “069 | -070 °069| -064| -074 | -066 | 0625

Height of do. at coronoid process, | 0425 | :089 °037| °086| -041 | -030 | "036

P. 8.—Oct. 28th. Some months have elapsed since the above paper

was written, and in the meantime, through the kindness of several friends,

I have been enabled to add materially to the evidence as to the distinctions

of the different species of marmots.

In the first place, I am indebted to Professor Peters of Berlin, who,

with great kindness and liberality, has sent a skin and skull of Arctomys

bobae belonging to the Berlin Museum for examination. In its external

characters this animal differs widely from A. Himalayanus. It is a sandy-

grey animal with a brown wash, without a single black hair on its body,

the hairs on the back being dusky at the base, then dirty white, and the

tips of the longer hairs on the back and sides being brown. ‘The lower

parts throughout shew a ferruginous tinge. The terminal portion of the

tail is brown. ‘This skin measures from nose to rump 21 inches, tail 53;

but it is very much smaller than A. Himalayanus.

Of course this specimen may have faded and the tips of the hairs may

have been black originally, as in Pallas’s description, but there is nothing in

the character of the skin to render this supposition probable, and if the

tips of the hair had become paler, I should hardly have anticipated that

they would have done so to precisely the same extent throughout the body.

Moreover, the skin before me coincides closely with the figure in Schreber’s

Saugethiere, Pl. CCVIII, and with Messrs. Milne-Edwards’ description,

1875.] inhabiting the Himalaya, Tibet, and the adjoining regions. 125

Professor Peters tells me that the skin sent is from Siberia, and that he

has endeavoured for years in vain to procure a Polish or Galician specimen,

Compared with the skins of A. Himalayanus, this specimen of A.

bobac, besides being paler and having brown instead of black tips to the

lone dorsal hairs, has these hairs much longer and their dark tips more

developed, and the fur generally is finer and softer, The skull, with a

general similarity of outline, exhibits numerous differences, the most marked

being the very much smaller proportional size of the molars in the upper jaw.

The crown of the third molar is 4. Himalayanus measures 6 mm. across, in

A, bobae only 4°5 mm.

I am also indebted to Dr. Giinther for having very obligingly re-

examined the types of Arctomys Hemachalanus v. Tibetanus in the British

Museum in order to ascertain if they were adults. He writes to me as

follows :

“The skull of the type of A. Zibetanus is that of an adult animal, but

“ this type is the most wretched specimen i have ever handled. It was an

‘¢ individual brought up in captivity ; size that of a very small rabbit, skin

“nearly hairless, claws abnormally long and as sharp as a needle, teeth

** carious, incisors malformed. The frontal bones are gone, but I suppose

“ that they could not have been much arched, and the palate is very shallow,

“‘ very slightly concave.”

“There is another flat and imperfect skin of this 4. Tibetanus from

“ Hodgson’s collection. It is somewhat larger than the former specimen,

“ and is evidently adult, but there is no skull. Taking all the evidence

“ before me, I believe that this species but slightly exceeded a rabbit in

“size. But then what differences in size you observe in onr Swiss mar-

‘¢ mots.”

The important point is, of course, to ascertain that Mr. Hodgson’s ori-

ginal types were adult. The length of the tail shews that the species is dis-

tinct from A. caudatus, and the skulls differ very considerably. But some

further evidence is forthcoming. Some time after the preceding paper was

written the dead body of a marmot was sent to the Indian Museum by Mr.

Rutledge. The animal is said to have been originally brought from Bhutan,

but it has lived for a long time in captivity, and as usual the skin is in

wretched condition and almost hairless. The dimensions, however, agree

with those of A, Hemachalanus, and when the skull had been cleaned, it

proved precisely similar to that of the old skeleton in the Museum, belong-

ing to the animal said to have brought from Sikkim and to have lived for

months in the Asiatic Society’s compound. Mr. Fraser has also found,

amongst the accumulated collections of the Museum, another skin and skull

of a young individual, which also had been kept tame.

There is thus evidence of 5 individuals of this species at least, and I

126 W. T. Blanford—On the species of Marmot [No. 3,

have examined 3 skins and skulls myself. With the evidence before me, I have

not the slightest doubt that a small marmot does inhabit the northern parts

of Sikkim and Nepal, and that it is quite distinct in structure, colour, and

size from the large A. caudatus of Kashmir and Ladak. Unfortunately,

the Sikkim: skins which Dr. Anderson identified with a specimen belong-

ing to the Kashmir species have not been found. It is remarkable

that every individual of A. Hemachalanus yet examined has been kept in

captivity; skins of the wild animal are a great desideratum. The skull of

the specimen received from Mr. Rutledge is perfectly well formed and all

the teeth are healthy.

Dr. Aitcheson of Srimagar has had the kindness to make enquiries

about the marmots of Kashmir, and he has sent me specimens of young

A. caudatus. As in most young animals, the colours are indistinct, and

there is a peculiar immature appearance about the fur. ‘These young speci-

mens can be at once distinguished from 4A. Hemachalanus by their longer

tails.

It will be seen that the whole of the additional evidence tends to prove

that, exclusive of A. robustus, there are three and not two species of marmot

in the Himalayas and Tibet, and that neither of these species is identical

with A. bobae.

Within the last few days, Mr. Mandelli of Darjiling has sent to the

Indian Museum a magnificent collection of mammal skins from Sikkim and

Tibet, part of which he has presented to the Museum, and he has most

liberally allowed me to examine the whole. There is no specimen of

Arctomys Hemachalanus, but there are two fine skins of 4. Himalayanus.

These coincide very fairly in external characters with those from the Kuen-

luen, they are a very little greyer in tint and darker on the face, but there

can be no hesitation in referring both forms to the same species. The skull

of one of Mr. Mandelli’s skins has been extracted for me by Mr. Fraser.

Although it is near to that of the Kuenluen marmot and to that of A.

vobustus, it differs somewhat from both; its longitudinal and transverse

diameters being 101 and 67 millemeters, so that it is decidedly broader in

proportion to its length, whilst its height is rather less, and the nasal bones

are shorter and less convex. Despite these and other differences, there is

a general agreement in details, and I feel disposed to believe that the dis-

tinctions are insufficient for separation. Moreover, it is evident that the

cranial distinctions already pointed out in the case of A. robustus are not

greater than those which are found between the two forms of A. Himalayanus,

and, consequently, that either A. robustus must be united to that species,

or the Kuenluen marmot must be classed as distinct. I prefer the former

view and have adopted it in the preceding synonymy.

Dr. Severtzoff has recently visited London, and [ am indebted to Mr.

Dresser for obtaining from the Russian naturalist a few notes on some of the

1875.] inhabiting the Himalaya, Tibet, and the adjoining regions. 127

mammals described by him from Western Turkestan. I learn that the

species identified as Arctomys baibacinus differs from A. bobac in being

darker above, and more rufous below. It is a mountain species, whilst A.

bobac inhabits the steppes. Dr. Severtzoff suggests that it may be identical

with A. robustus (that is, doubtless, with A. Himalayanus), As A, Hima-

layanus extends from Hastern’ Tibet to the Kuenluen, keeping to great

altitudes, above the range of almost every other mammal, it is by no means

improbable that it may also occur farther to the north.

P. S.—Wov. 8¢h.—In the October number of the ‘ Annals and Magazine

of Natural History’ just received, Dr. Anderson has described another marmot

from the mountains north of Kabul under the name of A. dichrous. From

the description this appears to be distinct from A. awreus and the other

species referred to above, and it is very probably the form indicated by

Burnes and Griffith, a skull of which, as already mentioned, exists in the

Society’s old collection.

128 ’ §. Kurz—Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 3,

¥.

XIV.—Contributions towards a Knowledge of the Burmese Flora.

Part I.—By 8. Kunz.

(Continued from Vol. XLIII, p. 141.)

RULTAOCE LA.

Conspectus of genera.

A. Fruit separating into 2 to 5 distinct 2-valved carpels.

Trib. I. ZANTHOXYLEA. Flowers usually polygamous. Disk free, or rarely

wanting. Styles basilar or ventral, more or less free. Fruit-carpels coriaceous, the

endocarp persistent or separating elastically.

x Leaves opposite or nearly so, rarely intermixed with nearly alternate

ones. Unarmed.

Eyop1a. Stamens 4-5. Leaves often compound, rarely 1-foliolate.

Meticorr. Stamens 8. Leaves often 1- rarely 3-foliolate.

x x Leaves all alternate. Often armed.

ZANTHOXYLON. Petals 3—5, rarely none. Stamensas many. Leaves often pinnate.

B. Fruit a drupe or berry, rarely a capsule.

Trib. II. TODDALIEA. Flowers usually polygamous. Disk free. Style sin-

gle. Albumen usually present.

Acronycuia. Petals 4. Stamens 8. Drupe or capsule 4-celled. Erect unarmed

trees with 1—3-foliolate leaves.

Toppauia. Petals 2—5. Stamensas many. Berry 4—7-celled. Climbers, often

armed, with usually 3-foliolate leaves.

Trib. III. AURANTIEZA. Flowers hermaphrodite. Petals and stamens free or

connate. Style simple. Ovules 1, 2 or more in each cell. Berry often pulpy, with a

coriaceous or woody rind. Albumen none.

x Ovary-cells with 1 or 2 ovules only.

+ Style persistent, not jomted at the base.

Guycosmis. Calyx 5-parted or -toothed. Stamens 10, free. Ovules solitary.

Leaves pinnately 5-1—or rarely 7-foliolate.

+ + Style jointed at the base, deciduous.

t¢ Leaves pinnate or 3-foliolate.

* Ovules 2 in each cell.

O Leaves pinnate or pinnately 3-foliolate.

{ Cotyledons plano-conyex, fleshy. Petals im-

bricate.

Cuaucas. Filaments linear-subulate. Unarmed, the flowers in terminal cymes.

CriausEenA. Filaments dilated at the base. Unarmed, the flowers in panicles or

racemes.

£ { Cotyledons crumpled, leafy. Petals valvate.

Micrometum. Filaments linear-subulate. Unarmed, the flowers in terminal

corymbs.

O O Leaves digitately 3-foliolate.

Luyunea. Calyx cup-shaped. Stamens 8 or 10. Armed or not.

* * Ovules solitary in each cell.

1875.] of the Burmese Flora. 129

TripHastA. Calyx 3-lobed. Stamens 6. Spiny; leaves digitately 3-foliolate ;

flowers almost solitary.

Liwonra. Calyx 4- or 5-lobed or -parted. Stamens 8—10. Armed ; leaves pinnate.

+ + Leaves 1-foliolate or simple.

Paramicnya. Anthers linear-oblong. Disk elongate. Calyx usually cup-shaped.

Climbers, armed. Berries without pulp.

Ararantra. Anthers ovate or cordate. Disk cup-shaped. Calyx often irregu-

lar. Trees or shrubs, often armed. Berries with vesicular pulp.

x x Ovary-cells with numerous ovules.

+ Rind of berry leathery. Leaves 1-foliolate.

Cirrus. Stamens 20—60, often connate. Trees, usually spiny.

+ + Rind of berry woody. Leaves compound. ‘Trees.

FrEronra. Ovary 5—6-celled. Leaves pinnate.

AzGLE. Ovary 8- to many-celled. Leaves trifoliolate.

Evodia, Forst.

Conspectus of species.

x Panicles small, contracted, usually much shorter than the petioles.

Branchlets 4-cornered and marked with 4 prominent longitudinal lines; leaves 1—3-

foliolate, the leaflets sessile ; stamens shorter than the petals, ....... . L. viticina.

Branchlets quite terete ; leaves 8-foliolate, the leaflets on short petiolules, lively green,

.. Li. triphylla.

x x Panicles corymbose, spreading, as long or longer than the petiole.

Branchlets terete, thick; leaflets shortly petioluled, dark bluish-green, EZ. Roxburghiana.

1. KE. virtctna, Wall. Cat. 1219; Hf, Ind. Fl. I. 489.

Has. Tenasserim, Tavoy.

2. EH. rrreayina, DC. Prod. I. 724; Hf. Ind. FI. I. 488.

Has. Frequent in the damp hill-forests, and entering the drier ones,

from Martaban down to Tenasserim, at 8000 to 5000 ft. elevation,—

Fl. Febr., March ; Fr, Apr., May.

3. HE. Roxpureniana,* Bth. Fl. Hongk. 59; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 487,—

(Xanthoxylon triphyllum, Wight Je. t. 204; Hagara triphylla, Roxb. FI.

Ind. I. 416).

Has. Tenasserim.

Roxburgh’s figure of the fruit in his MS. drawings shews that the size

of the carpels and seeds does not differ from that of the plant formerly

usually taken for H. triphylla.

Melicope, Forst.

1. M.? Hetrert, Hf. Ind. FI. I. 492.

Has. ‘Tenasserim (or Andamans ?) (teste Hf.).

Zanthoxylum, L.

Conspectus of species.

* Cymes axillary, or axillary and terminal. Branches alternate. Leaves pinnate.

x Rachis of leaves winged. Flowers apetalous.

We

130 S. Kurz—Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 3,

Leaflets 2—3 in. long, glandular-crenulate ; cymes dense, }—1 in. long ; fruit-carpels

mistialliy oy 4——2.\ siclolelele) « sicle. + «(rteteteMeteteleliolelole\ele eleiele\olelictcliclslelalalsiate Z. acanthopodium.

Leaflets coarsely crenate, 3—1 in. long, ...... 0... escrccee soscvees Z. Andamanicun.

x x Rachis of leaves not winged. Flowers 4—4-petalous.

Leaflets in 2—8 pairs, glossy on both sides ; cymes axillary,........ Z. Hamiltonionum.

* = Cymes terminal. Branches opposite.

Leaflets clandular-crenate, in 7—10 pairs, ......00 csseeece seve socreces Z. Budrunga.

1. Z. acantuoropium, DC. Prod. II. 727; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 488.

Haz. Ava, hills east of Bhamo.

2. Z. AnDaMANIcUM, Kurz MS.

Haz. In the tropical forests of Termoklee island, west of South Anda-

man.

A very distinct small-leaved species, but the flowers and fruits are un-

known.

8. Z. Hamironranum, Wall. Cat. 7117; Hf. Ind. Fl. 1. 494.

Has. Burma (este Hf.).

4, Z. Buprunes, DC. Prod. I. 728; Hf. Ind. FL I. 495. (fugare

Budrunga, Roxb. Fl. Ind. I. 447).

Haz. Not unfrequent in the tropical and moister upper mixed forests

from Chittagong, Pegu, and Martaban down to Tenasserim.—Fr. Sept.

Doubtful species.

1. Z. spondiefolium, Wall. Cat. 1217; Hf. Ind. FI. I. 496.

Has. Amherst (Wall.) teste Hf.

Acronychia, Forst.

1. A. Cymrnosma, F. Muell. Fragm. Phyt. Amstr. I. 27. (A. lau-

rifolia, Bl. Bydr. 245 ; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 498 ; Oyminosma pedunculata, DC.

Prod. I. 722; Wight Ill. t. 65).

Has. Not unfrequent in the tropical forests of the Andamans; also

Pegu and Chittagong.—Fl. RS.

Toddalia, Juss.

1. T. Astatica, (Paullinia Asiatica, L. sp. pl. 524; LF. aculeata,

Pers. Ench. I. 249; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 497 (excl. syn. Zanthox. nitidum,

Wall.) Wight Ill. t. 66; Scopolia aculeata, Sm. Icon. ined. sub. t. 34;

Roxb. Fl. Ind. I. 616).

Var, a. acuLEATA, (Z. aculeata, Pers.), petioles and often also the

midrib beneath hooked-prickly ; panicles usually smaller and less branched.

Var. 6. FLonrBuNDA, (27. floribunda, Wall. Pl. As. rar. III. 17. t.

232), petioles and midrib of leaves unarmed; panicies often more com-

pound,

Haz. Frequent in the tropical forests from Ava and Martaban down

to Pegu, up to 3000 ft. elevation.—Fl. June.

1875. ] of the Burmese Flora. 131

NV. B.—It is possible that in Wallich’s Herbarium Zoddalia and Zan-

thoxylon nitidum,DC., are mixed, but the Wallichian specimens in HBC., as

well as those cultivated in this garden, all belong to DeCandolle’s species.

Glycosmis, Correa.

Conspectus of species.

* Anthers blunt, not gland-tipped.

O Berries oboval-oblong to oblong, leaden blue.

Petals longer persistent ; filaments flat, from a narrower base gradually broader towards

the triangular apex; bark pale coloured,...... coovccto voce vce G. CYMNOCUL Pie

O O Berries more or less glebular, from watery flesh-coloured to crimson.

Petals very deciduous ; filaments from a broader base attenuated upwards; nerves of

leaflets prominent above ; bark pale coloured,.........ssseee. srepeielers G. trifoliata.

Petals very deciduous, lanceolate, about 3 lin. long; filaments elongate, filiform ; bark

ROWER, coooed Babo6HOU CONDDOOO 0000 ObOUDEEE 100000 00 Ud0DEDOD CUdUOD GaN

* * Anthers gland-tipped.

Petals longer persistent, about 14 lin. long; anthers cordate; filaments flat, from a

narrower base gradually broader towards the triangular apex; bark white,

2 G. pentaphylla.

1. G. cyanocarpa, Sprens. Syst. Veo. IV/2. 161; Mig. FI. Ind.

Bat. 1/2. 521.—(Cookia cyanocarpa, Bl. Bydr. 186).

Var. a. GENUINA, flowers in peduncled terminal and axillary pani-

eles, rarely reduced to cymes.

Var. B. cymosa, (G. tetraphylla, Wall. and G. oxyphytla, Wall. ap.

Voigt. Cat. Hort. Calc. 189), flowers in short peduncled or almost sessile

quite glabrous or rarely rusty tomentose cymes axillary or axillary and ter-

minal, rarely transformed into panicles.

Haz. Var. 8. Not unfrequent in the tropical forests of the Pegu

Yomah.—Fl. Apr.

2. G. TRIFOLIATA, Spreng. Syst. Veg. IV/2 162; Mig. Fl. Ind, Bat.

T/2. 521.

VaR. a. GENUINA, leaves green or yellowish in drying; panicles or

eymes shorter, more or less rusty or tawny tomentose; ovary glabrous or

tawny pubescent.

Var.? f£. FuscEscENs, leaves fuscescent in drying ; panicles larger and

more compound, quite glabrous.

Has. Var.a. In Chittagong and Tenasserim; var. 8. frequent in

the tropical forests all over Burmah from Chittagong, Pegu, and Martaban

down to Tenasserim and the Andamans.— Fl. HS.; Fr. RS.

All the specimens of var. 8. are in young bud only, and therefore the

identification with G. trifoliata is doubtful. Those of var. a. are in young

bud only and also doubtful ; they can equally well belong to G. ensularis,

3. G. arporea, Corr. in Ann. Mus. VI. 386.; DC. Prod. I. 538.

(Limonia arborea, Roxb. Corom, Pl. I. t. 85. and Fl. Ind. II. 381).

132 S. Kurz—Contributions towards a Knowledge [ No. 3,

Var. a, GENUINA, calyx-lobes acute; ovary sessile; leaves often ser-

rate ; panicles peduncled.

Var. f. InsvLaRis, calyx-lobes bluntish ; ovary usually stalked ; leaves

entire ; cymes small, sessile, rusty-villous.

Has. - Var. 8. Common in the tropical forests of the Andamans.—Fl.

Febr.; Fr. Apr. May.

4, G. PENTAPHYLLA, Corr. in Ann. Mus. VI. 386; DC. Prod. I. 538;

WA. Prod. I. 93; Bedd. Fl. Sylv. Madr, Anal. 43. t. 6. f. 6. (Limonia pen-

taphylla, Retz. Obs. V. 24; Roxb, Corom. Pl. t. 84. and Fl. Ind. II. 381;

Limonia arborea, Bot. Mag. t. 2074).

Has. Frequent all over Burmah, in the mixed and tropical forests,

and more especially in the shade of village-bushes and bamboo-jungles.—FIl,

OS.; Fr. HS.

Chaleas, L. (1767) (Murraya, L. 1771).

Conspectus of species.

Hicaneisroitors -mpetals meanly, +n lomommer nyse) ysiels aie cle) sis\slel elslere see OC. paniculata.

ibemnilerss 10) ix AOS josreUbs) loowan 7 ibm, iene, 554455009 an0500 50 090000 00000- C. Kenigii.

1. C. panicurnata, L. Mant. 1261; F. Muell. in Contr. New Hebrid.

7.—(Murraya exotica, L. Mant. 563; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 502).

Has. Common in the tropical forests of the Pegu Yomah and Marta-

ban down to Tenasserim and the Andamans.—F Il, HS.; Fr. May, June.

2. C. Kenten, (Murraya Kenigii, Spreng. Syst. veg. II. 315; Hf.

Ind. FL. I. 503.—( Bergera Kemgi, L. Mant. 563; Roxb. Corom. Pl. IT.

t. 112. and FI. Ind. IT. 375; Wight Icon. t. 13; Griff. Not. Dicot. 497.

t. 586. f. 3; Murraya foetidissima, T. et B. in Tydsch. Ned. Ind. XXY. 25).

Has. Rather frequent along choungs in the tropical forests of the

eastern slopes of the Pegu Yomah ; also Chittagong.—Fl. March.

Doubtful species.

1. Murraya elongata, DC. ap. Hf. Ind. FI. 1. 508.

Has. Ava, Taong-dong (Wall.).

Clausena, Burm.

Conspectus of species.

* Panicle terminal.

O Ovary glabrous.

Softly villous ; leaves pinnately 5-foliolate ; flowers 4-merous, ........€. macrophylla.

Inflorescence and leaves glabrous ; petiole and rachis terete or nearly so ; leaflets usual-

ly 7 (6—9), not or hardly oblique ; flowers usually 4- rarely 5-merous,C. heptaphylia.

Inflorescence and leaves glabrous ; rachis more or less winged ; leaflets 13—17, oblique ;

HOES DAMNSPOESS 550000 900009 90000005 90000000 500050700000 060090 C. Wallichit.

O O Ovary more or less hirsute or pubescent.

Inflorescence and other parts more or less shortly hirsute or puberulous; rachis terete ;

1875. ] of the Burmese Flora. 133

leaflets 15—380, oblique ; flowers 5-merous, ...sseee ces ssvvee serves C, excavate,

Inflorescence and the tubercled petioles densely and shortly tawny tomentose ; leaflets

d—9 ; young berries densely fascicled-tomentose ; flowers 5-merous,.... 0. Wampi.

* * Panicles or racemes axillary.

All parts shortly pilose ; leaflets 5 to 17; ovary and the long red berries glabrous;

flowers 4-merous, .... 005 sielv.0ie siiafelslsisinitsie!sleil s.siclele »».C. suffruticosa.

1. C. macropuytia, Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 504.

Has. Upper Tenasserim, banks of Salween at Trogla.

2. C. HeprapHytta, WA. Prod. I. 95; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 504.--CAmy.

ris heptaphylla, Roxb. Fl. Ind. II. 248),

Has. Chittagong; Tenasserim (¢este Hf.).

3. C. Wauuicui, Oliv. in Journ. Linn. Soc. V. Suppl. II. 35; Hf.

Ind. Fl. 505.—(Cookie sp., Griff. Not. Dicot. 469. t. 587. f.2?). Var.

8. tuxuRtans, rachis leafy-winged ; leaflets only in 4—2 pairs with an odd

one, 4—8 in. long, remaining green in a dried state.

Has. Var. a. Upper Tenasserim ; var. 8. rare in the tropical forests

of the eastern slopes of the Pegu Yomah. Fl. March.; Fr. Apr.

4, ©. excavaTa, Burm. Fl. Ind. 87; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 504.—(Amyris

Sumatrana, Roxb, Fl. Ind. II. 250; Amyris punctata, Roxb. 1. c. 251.)

Has. Frequent in the tropical and moister upper mixed forests, all

over Burmah and the adjacent provinces, from the plains up to 2000 ft.

elevation. Fl. Apr. May; Fr. June, Jul.

*5. OC. Wamept, Blanco FI. Filip. 358 ; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 505.—(Cookia

punetata, Sonner. Voy. II. 130. t. 181 ; Roxb. Fl. Ind. II. 382).

Haz. Cultivated in Chittagong.

6. C. surFRuTicosA, WA. Prod. I. 96. in adn.; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 506,

—(Amyris saffruticosa, Roxb. Fl. Ind. II. 250).

Var. B. PAuctsuGA, leaflets only in 2 to 3 pairs with an odd one.

Has. Chittagong, Seetakhoond hills; var. 8. not unfrequent in the

Eng- and dry forests of the Prome district.—Fl. March.

Micromelum, Bl.

Conspectus of the species.

Tree ; petals 24 lin. long; ovary slightly appressed-pubescent ; young berries stalked

ELSIERDHE, © oo000000 900000CO C000 COD DONDE BANEG0 0006 6c0600 ODODDE IM. pubescens.

Meagre shrub up to 4 ft. high ; petals 2 lin. long ; ovary densely tawny hirsute ; young

berries sessile or nearly so, puberulous, .....000 cecevese re sssceoes MM. hirsutum.

I. M. pupescens, Bl. Bydr. 188; Hf. Ind. Fl I. 501.—(Bergera

integerrima, Roxb. Fl. Ind. III. 376.)

VaR. a. GENUINA, leaves on both sides or at least along the nerves

beneath, the petioles, and rachis puberulous.

Var. @. GLABRIUSCULA, leaves quite glabrous.

Haz. Both varieties frequent in the tropical and moister upper mixed

134 S. Kurz— Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 3,

forests all over Burma from Chittagong and Ava down to Tenasserim and

~ the Andamans.—Fl. Jan. March; Fr. Apr. June.

2. M. uresorum, Oliv.-in Linn. Proc. V. Suppl. II. 41; Hf. Ind.

Fl. I. 502.— (ML. Zeylanicum, Wight in Thw. C. P. 188).

VAR. a. GENUINUM, all parts more or less shortly hirsute or puberu-

lous ; leaflets smaller.

Var. 8. GLABRESCENS, (Awrantiacea, Wall. Cat. 8517.) the young

shoots only tawny puberulous, all other parts glabrous or nearly so; calyx

shortly 5-toothed, puberulous ; petals puberulous.

Has. Var. a. Very frequent in the open and dry forests, especially in

the Eng-forests, all over Burma from Ava and Martaban down to Tenasse-

rim; var. 8. in Tenasserim from Moulmein southwards (Helf. 535/1).—FI.

March, Apr.

Luvunga, Ham.

Conspectus of species.

Filaments elabrous, more or less|Commatey +... «++ s+00 0006 «mse ele)e selec LT. scandens.

Filaments glabrous, free; flowers much smaller, ........sss06 pabests L. eleutherandra.

1. LL. scanprns, Ham. ap. Oliv. in Linn. Proc. V. Suppl. Il. 43; Hf.

Ind. Fl. I. 509; Rot. Mag. t. 4522.—Limonia scandens, Roxb. Fl. Ind. II.

380).

Has. Burma (Ava?) ; Chittagong.

2. IL. ELEUTHERANDRA, Dalz. in Hook. Kew. Journ. Bot. II. 258 ; Hf.

Ind. Fl. I. 509, excl. syn. Bl—(Luvunga Tavoyana, Wall. Cat. 6383).

Haz. Tenasserim, ? Tavoy, (este Hf.)

Triphasia, Lour.

1. TT. rerrorrmta, DC. Prod. I. 536; Hf. Ind. FI. I. 507.

Har. ‘Tennasserim, probably wild.—Fl. Fr. «.

Limonia, L.

Conspectus of species.

Spiny tree; leaflets opposite; inflorescence puberulous; berries globose, sessile

..L. acidissima.

Unarmed shrub ; leaflets alternate; inflorescence glabrous; berries ovoid, shortly

SEMI eG area OC ROR mores 0 010.0 0. 60.0 OSM DEOR COOP OE GREE s oduocod L. alternans.

1. UL. acrpisstma, L. sp. pl. 554; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 507.—(Z. crenulata,

Roxb. Corom. Pl. I. t. 86. and Fl. Ind. II. 381).

Var. £. puBEScCENS (L. ? pubescens, Wall. Cat. 68365; Hf. Ind. Fl. I.

507), prickles on the branches short, the wings of the petiole narrow, leaflets

bluntish, the terminal one long but bluntish acuminate, the petioles and

nerves beneath softly puberulous.

1875.] of the Burmese Flora. 135

Has. Var. a. Ava, along the Irrawaddi, apparently frequent ; var. £.

Ava, Taong dong; and Prome hills.

2. L. aurernans, Wall. ap. Voigt. Hort. Cale. 189; Hf. Ind. Fl. I.

508.

Has. Not unfrequent in the upper-mixed, and sometimes in the moist,

forests of the Pegu Yomah and Arracan; also Tenasserim, Mergui.—FI.

May.

Paramignya, Wight.

Conspectus of species.

* Petals about 8 lin. long. Calyx largish, cupular, broadly lobed.

Style elongate ; calyx and pedicels tomentose, the latter as long or a little longer

HAM ine GAINS, SogdGocouodnGooed DONDOUCO ObREABEObO. /o0 0 coopdomOnRDS P. monophylla.

Style short ; calyx and the pedicels glabrous, the latter 1 in. or thereabouts long,

..L. grandifiord.

* * Petals 2—4 lin. long. Calyx small, with acute lobes.

O Berries terete,

Young shoots more or less puberulous ; style short, hirsute or villous,..P. Grifithii.

Glabrous ; style very short, like the ovary glabrous, .... ss. #616) «ele eke CHONG OW

O O Berries 3—4-angular.

Erect tree, the spies 1—1¥ in. long, straight; calyx glabrous, ...... P. angulata.

1. P. monopHyiia, Wight Ill. I. 108. t. 42; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 510.—

Has. Tenasserim, Moulmein district at 5000 feet elevation (¢este

Oliv.).

2. P. GRANDIFLORA, Oliv. in Linn. Proc. V. Suppl. II. 42; Hf, Ind.

Bie I. 510:

Haz. Tenasserim, Tavoy.—Fl. Aug.

3. P. Grrerivam, Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 510.—(Citrus seandens, Geoff. Not.

_ Dicot. 495, t. 587. f. 1).

Has. Ava, at the serpentine mines of Hookhum valley ; Pegu (¢este

Hf.).

4. WP. crrrirorra, Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 510, non Oliv.—(Limonia citrifolia,

Roxb, Fl. Ind. II. 579.; P. micrantha, Kurz in And, Rep. App. B, 4).

Has. In the tropical forests of Chittagong and the Andamans.—FI.

June, July.

5. P. ancurara (Citrus angulatus, Willd. sp. pl. III. 1426 ; DC. Prod.

I. 540; Limonellus angulosus, Rumph. Herb. Amb. 110. t. 32; Limonia

angulosa, WA. Prod.1. 91, in adn.; Mig. Fl. Ind. Bat, I. 2-521 ; Atalantia

longispina, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872. 295; Paramignya longi-

spina, Hf. Ind. Fl. 1.511; Gonocttrus angulatus, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc.

Beng, 1873. 228. t. 18).

Has. In the mangrove and tidal forests of Pegu and Tenasserim

(also Sunderbuns, Malacca, and the Moluccos).

136 S. Kurz—Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 3,

N. B.—This species has got quite an array of synonyms. I attempt-

ed to establish a new genus upon it on account of the angular fruits and

absence of pulp, but on examining the fruits of several other Paramignyas,

I find that they also seem to be pulpless.* Atalantia missionis, Oliv. (Hf.

Ind. Fl. I. 518, excl. syn. Turez.) has curiously enough retained its place in

Atalantia, although habit and generic characters place its beyond any doubt

in Paramignya, and in habit it approaches very much the above species.

Atalantia, Corr.

Conspectus of species.

x Calyx irregularly lobed, split to the base on one side.

Berries the size of a large pea or small cherry, ..... seeee eee seeee A, monophylla.

Berries the size of a wood-apple, ...... Movaie tsa) caie'e oiotet i caiiteee ete A. macrophylla.

x x Calyx regularly 4-lobed.

Flowers shortly pedicelled, im short racemes, ...s6. cesses ceceves ossee A. coudata.

1. A. MONOPHYLLA, Corr. in Ann. du Mus. VI. 883; Hf. Ind. Fl. IL.

511.—(4 floribunda, Wight. Icon. t. 1611.; Limonia monophylla, Lin.

Mant. alt. 237; Roxb. Fl. Ind. II. 378 and Corom. Pl. I, t. 82; A. pube-

rula, Miq Ann. Mus. Lugd. Bat. I. 211; Chilocalyx ellipticus, Turez, in

Bull. Natur. Mose. 1863, 588).

Has. Ava, about Segain, very frequent.—Fl. Octob.

2. A. MacropHyLia (A monophylla var. macrophylla, Oliv. in Linn.

Proc. V. Suppl. II. 24; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 512).

Has. Frequent along the beaches of the Andaman islands; also Te-

nasserim.—Fr, Apr. May. .

3. <A. caupaTa, Hf. Ind. FI. I, 513 P—

Haz. Frequent in the tropical forests of the Pegu Yomah, especially

along choungs.

The Burmese plant is a middling-sized tree of elegant appearance but

spiny. I have not met either with flowers or fruits and therefore the

identification must remain doubtful.

Citrus, L.

Conspectus of species.

x Young shoots and nerves of leaves beneath pubescent or puberulous ; flow-

ers and fruits large, ......s++0 0 50 DDOO DCO CRO TO CRCR CER R EICR CTO ceveee Cy decumamna.

x x All parts glabrous.

O Style very short.

Flowers small; stamens free ; petioles leafy and almost as long and as broad as the

lad emtyeliw ys lake nice ein’ cha eve seie salar see MRPMe A Tone e ees vareistalaustiniets stares levi tceRaerae C. hystriz.

O O Style as long as the ovary or much longer.

+ Petals 8 to 10 lin. long.

* The berries of P. littoralis, Miq., a species nearly allied to P. angulata, has pulp,

but the dried ones appear pulpless.

a

)

1875.] of the Burmese Flora. 137

Leaves acuminate or acute, the petiole often winged; berries globular, without a

ResteareTeAMOD GS COHCTING Dy S— 45) occ c ce wees ose cetfaeies cred veceeees C. Aurantiun.

Leaves blunt or nearly so, the petiole not winged; berries oblong to globose, with

a Imob, the skin usually thick; filaments free or polyadelphous, ...... 1.046. C. medica.

t+ t Petals 3—4 lin. long.

Calyx small; berries globular, sweet or acid, the skin usually thin,....., C. nobilis.

*1. C.pEcumana, L. sp. pl. 1100; Roxb. Fl. Ind. III. 3938 ; Hf. Ind.

Fl. I. 516.

Has. Often cultivated by Burmans, especially in the southern pro-

vinces.

2. C. Hysterx, DC. Prod. I. 589; Hf. Ind. FL. I. 515.

Has, Not unfrequent in the tropical forests of the Martaban hills ;

also in the adjoining Siamese province Kyouk-Koung ; often cultivated in

native gardens,

*3. C. Aurantium, L. sp. pl. 1100; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 515.

Has. Here and there cultivated in villages.

4. C. Menzica, L. sp. pl. 580; Roxb. Fl. Ind. III. 392; Hf. Ind.

Fl. I. 514, exl. var. 4.

Var. a. GeNuINA, Brandis Forest. Fl. 52.; Hf. l.c.

Var. £. Livonum, Brand. For. FI. 52.

Vaz. y. Actpa, Brand. For. Fl. 52; Hf. 1. e—(C. acida, Roxb. FI.

Ind. III. 390).

Has. Var. y. apparently wild in the Khaboung forests of the Peou

Yomah, west of Tounghoo (Brandis); the other varieties only culti-

vated.

*5. C. nopinis, Lour. Fl. Cochin. 569; DC. Prodr. I. 540.; Ker

Bot. Rep. t, 211; Andr. Bot. Rep. t. 608 (Awrantium Sinense, Rumph.

Herb. Amb. II. t. 34; C. medica var. 4 limetta, Brandis For. Fl]. 52; Hf.

Ind, Fl. I. 515). /

Var. a. SINENSE, (Awrantium Sinense, Rph. 1. ¢.), petioles simple ;

berries with a sweet or bitter pulp. Sweet lime.

Var. 6. Limonetuus, (Limonellus, Rumph.1. c. t. 29; C. limetta,

Wight Ic. t. 958), petioles short, winged ; fruits acid. Acid lime.

Has. Frequently cultivated in villages.

Feronia, Corr.

1. FE. ELEPHANTUM, Corr. Act. Soc. Linn. V. 224; Roxb. Corom. PI,

Mee and El Ind, Il. 411; Wight Icon. t. 15.; Hf. Ind. Fl. I.

516.

Has. In the dry forests of Prome District.—Fl. March, Apr.; Fr.

Octob.

18

1388 S. Kurz-—Contributions towards a Knowledge . [No. 3,

Aegle, Corr.

1. A. Marmetos, Corr. Act. Soc. Linn. V. 224; Roxb. Corom. PI.

IT. t. 143 and Fl. Ind. IT. 579; Wight Icon. t. 16; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 516;

Bedd. Fl. Sylv. t. 161.

Has. Much cultivated, especially in the Prome district, and said to

occur wild in the forests also: I found the tree in those of the Toukyeghat,

east of Tounghoo.— Fl. May; Fr. Octob. Nov.

SIMARUBE ZB.

Conspectus of genera.

Trib. I. SIMARUBEA. Ovary deeply lobed or the carpels distinct.

* Stamens twice as many as petals.

O Leaves simple.

SamapERA. Calyx 8—5-parted. Disk large. Stamens 8—10. Drupe variously winged.

O O Leaves pinnate.

ArLantHus. Calyx 5- cleft. Disk 10-lobed. Stamens 10. Fruit of 1 to 5 samaras,

* * Stamens as many as petals. Leaves pmnate. Carpels drupaceous.

O Styles free or cohering at the base only.

Brucea. Disk 4-lobed. Stamens glabrous. Flowers cymose-racemose.

O O Styles connate. Flowers in panicles.

PicrasMA. Disk thick. Stamens pilose.

Evurycoma. Disk none. Stamens glabrous.

Trib. II, PICRAUMNIEA. Ovary entire, 2—5-celled.

Harrisonra. Calyx 4—5-cleft. Stamens 4 or 10. Ovary 4—5-celled. Leaves pinnate,

or pinnately 1—3-folialate.

Bauanitres. Sepals 5. Stamens 10. Ovary 5-celled. Leaves bifoliolate.

Samadera, Gertn.

1. §S. Inptca, Geertn. Fruct. I]. t. 156. fig. inf.; Wight Ill t. 68;

Hook. Icon: Pl. t. 7; Hi. IndeWe Lr 519;

Var. a. GENUINA, peduncles about as long as the leaves ; drupes about

2 in, long, smooth or slightly net-veined ; filaments in bud erect.

Var. B. Luctpa, (Mota lucida, Wall. Pl. As. rar. Il. t. 168; Sama-

dera lucida, Benn. in Hf. Ind. Fl. 1.519; S. brevipetala, Scheff. Obs. phyt.

88), peduncles shorter than the leaves ; drupes 13

veined ; filaments in bud twisted.

Has. Var. 8. Upper Tenasserim, Moulmein.

Ailanthus, Desf.

1. A. Mazazaricus, DC. Prod. II. 89; Wight Icon. t. 1604 ; Bedd.

Fl. Sylv. t. 122; Hf. Ind. FL I. 518.

Haz. Rather rare in the tropical forests of the Khaboung valley,

eastern slopes of Pegu Yomah. Fr, Apr.

2 in. long, strongly net-

1875.] | of the Burmese Flora. 139

Brucea, Mill.

Conspectus of species.

Leaflets coarsely crenate-toothed ; drupes about 2 lin. long,........ wees B. Sumatrana.

Leaflets quite entire; drupes about 3—4 lin. long, ........ cece eee ee ee ee B. mollis.

1. B. Sumarrana, Roxb. Fl. Ind. I. 449; Hf. Ind. Fl, I. 521.

Has. Tenasserim, Mergui (Griff.)

2. B. monnis, Wall. Cat. 84838 ; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 521.

Has. In the drier and damp hill-forests of Martaban and Upper

- Tenasserim, at 3000 to 4000 ft. elevation.—FI. March.

Picrasma, Bl.

i PB: Javanica, Bl. Bydr. 248; Benn. in Horsf. Pl. Jav. rar. 197.

t. 41; Mig. FI. Ind. Bat. 1/2. 679. t. 28; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 520.—(P.

Andamanica, Kurz And. Rep. App. B. IV; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 520).

Has. Frequent in the tropical forests from Martaban down to Tenas-

serim and the Andaman islands; rare in those of the Pegu Yomah.—Fl.

March; Fr. Begin of R. 5S.

Burycoma, Jack.

1. E. tonetrori, Jack in Roxb. Fl. Ind. ed. 1. II. 807; Griff. Not.

Dicot. 435; Hf. Ind. Fl. 1.521.—(#. Merguensis, Planch. in Hook. Lond.

Journ. V. 583).

Has. Forests of Tenasserim from Tavoy southwards; Andamans

(¢este Bennet).

Harrisonia, R. Br.

I. H. Bennetn, Bth. and Hf. Gen. pl. I. 314; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 519.

—(Lasiolepis paucijuga, Benn. in Horsf. Pl. Jav. rar. 202. t. 42).

Has. Very frequent in the dry forests of the Prome district ; also in

Martaban, Yoonzeleen, 2000 ft. (Brandis).—Fl]. Apr.

Balanites, Del.

1. 8B. Roxsureut, Planch. in Ann. sc. nat. 4 ser. IJ. 258; Hf. Ind.

Fl. I. 522.—( Ximemia Aegyptiaca, Roxb. Fl. Ind. Il. 253; B. Aegyptiaca,

Wight Icon. t. 274, non Del.).

Var. 6. GRACILIS, branchlets slender and glabrous or nearly so; inflo-

rescence more glabrous than in the normal form and only puberulous, the

peduncles and pedicels all very slender.

Has. Ava; var. GB. in the Prome District.—Fl. Apr.

OCHNACE A.

Conspectus of genera.

Trib. I. OCHNEA. Ovary 2—10-celled, with a solitary ovule in each cell. Albu-

men none.

140 S. Kurz— Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 3,

Ocuna. Stamens indefinite. Drupes 3 to 10, seated on the enlarged torus. Corymbs

lateral.

Gompuia. Stamens 10. Drupes 3—5, seated on the enlarged torus. Panicles terminal.

TrETRAMERISTA. Flowers 4-merous. Stamens 4. Fruit a coriaceous 4-seeded berry.

Trib. IT. EUTHEMIDEA. Ovary half 5-celled, with 2 ovules in each cell. Seeds

with albumen.

Evurumis. Stamens 5. Racemes terminal,

Ochna, Schreb.

Conspectus of species.

* Styles free at the summit for nearly a line length.

Fruiting sepals erect-conniving ; filaments as long or longer than the anthers ;

RED, oSoa00 09000000/a400.960000 000509 9900000000000000 000000000004 0. Andamanica.

* * Styles united to the apex.

x Filaments as long or longer than the anthers.

Petals usually 5; fruiting sepals reflexed ; treé, .....+ .sss0+ cveres 0. Wallichii.

Petals 5; fruiting sepals erect-connivent ; dwarf shrub,............ O. fruticulosa.

x ™ Filaments almost 4 times shorter than the anthers.

Petals usually 7—8; fruiting sepals erect-conniving; tree,.......... O. squarrosa.

1. O. anpamanica, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872, 295.

Haz, Frequent in the tropical forests of the Andamans.—F Il. March ;

Fr. May, June.

2. O. squarRosa, Roxb. Corom. Pl. I. t. 89 and Fl. Il. 643; Wight

Ill. t. 69. (O. lucida, Lamk. Dicot. TV. 510).

Has. Ava (Mrs. Col. Burney).

3. O. Watiicui, Planch. in Hook. Lond. Journ. V. 650; Hf. Ind.

Fl. I. 524, excl. syn. Colebr. and Kurz. (O. obtusata, Wall. Cat. 28051;

O. lucida, Griff. Not. Dicot. 464).

Has. Very frequent in the tropical forests of Martaban and Tenas-

serim ; less so along the eastern and southern slopes of the Pegu Yomah.—

Fl. March ; Fr. Apr. May.

4, QO. FRUTICULOSA, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872, 295.

Haz. Frequent in the open forests, especially the eng-forests, all over

Pegu and Martaban.—Fl. Apr. May; Fr. June, July.

Doubtful species.

1. O. parviflora, Griff. Not. Dicot. 464.

Has. Forests of Moulmein.

Referred by Bennet as a variety to O. Wallichit, from which it seems

to differ by its smaller flowers. I have not seen a specimen and the reflexed

sepals seem to confirm Mr. Bennet’s conclusion.

2. O.? brevipes, Planch. in Hook. Lond. Journ. Bot. V. 652; Hf.

Ind. Fl. I. 525.

Has. Pegue

5.] of the Burmese Flora. 141

Gomphia, Schreb.

1. G. Sumarrana, Jack. Mal. Misc. V. 29; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 525.—

(G@. Sumatrensis, Planch. in Hook. Icon. t. 712; Ochna crocea, Griff. Not.

Dicot. 463).

Has. Tenasserim, Mergui, along the sea-coast of the island Madamaca,

Pator. (Griff.).

NV. B.—My. Bennet has a Tetramerista glabra var. sagittata, based

upon Ancistrocladus ? sagittatus, Wall. Cat. 1055, a plant which I have not

seen, and which on account of its sagittate-based leaves cannot be a Tetraz

merista. He gives Tenasserim as one of the localities for it.

:

|

BURSHRACEZA,

Conspectus of genera.

(In Burmese species the fruit is an indehiscent drupe.)

GaArvuGa. Torus broadly filling the urceolate calyx-tube. Calyx 5-cleft.

Bursera. Calyx small, 4—6-parted. Stamens 8—12, inserted at the base of the

annular disk.

Canartum. Calyx 3-(rarely 2—5) cleft, valvate. Petals 3—5. Stamens 6—10.

Drupes ovoid, more or less 3-angular, with a bony or hard putamen.

Garuga, Roxb.

1. G. prynata, Roxb. Corom. Pl. III. t. 208 and Fl. Ind. II. 400;

Bedd. Fl. Sylv. t. 118; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 528.

VaR. a, GENUINA, more glabrescent ; drupes glabrous.

Var. 6. Mouiis (G. mollis, Turez. in Bull. Nat. Mose. 1858, 457),

more pubescent or villous, the drupes densely villous or pubescent.

Has. Common in the mixed forests all over Burma from Chittagong

and Ava down to Tennasserim and the Andamans, up to 3000 ft. elevation ;

var. 6. with the typical form.—Fl. Febr. March; Fr. Begin. of R. S.

Bursera, L.

1. B. serrata, Wall: in Trans. Linn. Soc. XV. 362. t. 4.; Hf. Ind.

FI. 1. 530.—(Limonia pentagyna, Roxb, Fl. Ind. II. 382),

Has. Frequent in the tropical forests, especially along choungs, of the

~ eastern slopes of the Pegu Yomah and Martaban.—Fl. Apr.

Canarium, L.

Conspectus of species.

* Stipules subulate, entire, very deciduous.

Leaflets serrulate ; disk-glands smooth, 6, free, cohering by pairs, ....C. ewphyliwn.

Leaflets entire; disk-lobes 8, hairy, united into a cup, ..........- . C. Bengalense.

* * Stipules 2-cleft and pectinately cut, persistent.

Young buds covered by the crimson velvety bracts; leaflets entire and serrate,

.. O. coccineo-bracteatum.

%

142 S. Kurz— Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 38,

1. OC. nupHyituum, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872, 295 ; Hf. Ind.

FI. I. 585.

Has. Frequent in the tropical forests of South Andaman.—Fl. June.

2. C. Beneatense, Roxb. Fl. Ind. ITI. 136; Hf. Ind. FL 1. 534.

Haz. Very rare in the moister upper-mixed forests of the Pegu

Yomah.

3. C. COCCINEO-BRACTEATUM, Kurz in And. Rep. App. B. 4. and

Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872. 296; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 536.

Has. Rather rare in the tropical forests of South Andaman.—FIl.

May.

N. B.—C. nitidun, Bennet = C. patentissimum, Mig.; C. grandifio-

gum, Bennet = CO. Mahassan, Mig. Besides these Maingay’s No. 310 =

C. eupteron, Miq., and ejusd. No. 807 == C. rugoswm, Miq.

‘i MELIACEKA,

Conspectus of genera.

A. Ovary-cells 1—2 ovuled., Seeds not winged.

Trib. I. MELIEZ. Stamens united into a tube. Albumen thin, fleshy. Cotyledons

thin, leafy or plano-convex.

* Capsule loculicidally 5-valved.

Munronta. Calyx-lobes 5, almost leafy. Petals adnate to the elongate staminal tube.

Disk tubular, sheathing the ovary. Leaves pinnate or pinnately 3-foliolate.

* * Fruit a drupe.

Metra. Calyx 5—6-parted. Petals free. Disk annular. Drupes contaming a single

i—5-celled putamen. Leaves pinnate or decompound.

Crpapessa. Calyx 5-toothed. Petals free, short. Disk cupular. Drupes containing

5 horny pyrenes.

Trib. II. TRICHILIEA. Stamens united into a tube, very rarely free. Ovary-cells

with one or two, rarely more ovules. Albumen none. Cotyledons thick.

* Disk free, tubular or cylindrical. Style usually elongate.

O Leaves pinnate (leaflets 5 or more).

Dysoxyton. Calyx small, 4- or 5-toothed, opened whilein young bud. Petals yalvate,

free. Ovary 38—5-celled. Capsule pear-shaped, opening loculicidally. Arillus

none.

Dmymocuiton. Calyx small or large, consisting of 5—7 distinctly imbricate sepals.

Petals valvate, adnate to the lobed or toothed staminal tube for nearly + of their

length. Capsule globose, berry-like, opening loculicidally. Arillus none.

Scuizocuiton. Calyx usually campanulate, obscurely 4- rarely 5-toothed, open already

in bud. Petals valvate or imbricate, united for 3 to nearly 4 of their length with

the toothed or lobed staminal tube and appearing tubular. Ovary 3—4-celled. Cap-

sule usually pyriform, opening loculicidally. Arillus complete or incomplete.

O O Leaves pinnately 3-foliolate.

Sanporicum. Calyx tubular. Petals imbricate. Berry globular, indehiscent.

* * Disk none, or annular or stalk-like, or confluent with the staminal

tube. Style usually short or none.

+ Anthers included, or almost included in the staminaltube. Seeds

arillate.

1875.] of the Burmese Flora. 143

ActarA. Petals 5. Anthersas many. Ovary 1—3-celled. Berry 1—2-celled, inde-

hiscent.

Amoora. Petals 3—d5. Anthers twice as many or more than twice as many as petals.

Ovary 3—4-celled. Capsule leathery, opening loculicidally.

+ t+ Anthers exserted or the filaments upwards free.

4 Watsvra. Petals5. Berry indehiscent or follicular-dehiscing along the suture,

. Seeds arillate.

.

B. Ovary-cells 3- to many-ovuled. Seeds usually winged,

Trib. III. SWIETENIEZ. Stamens united into a tube. Albumen present or not.

Leaves pinnate.

Carapa. Petals 4 or 5. Ovary-cells with 6 to 3 ovules. Capsule usually large, thick

coriaceous, opening loculicidally. Seeds very large, with corky testa, without

arillus, not winged.

Sormma. Petals 5. Staminal tube cup-shaped, 10-lobed, the lobes 2-toothed. Disk

rather broad. Seeds winged at both ends. Albumen none.

Cuickrassta. Petals 4 or 5. Staminal tube cylindrical, 10-crenate. Disk none.

Seeds winged below. Albumen none.

Trib. IV. CHDRELEZ#. Filaments free, inserted outside of the disk. Valves of

capsule separating from the axis. Seeds many. Leaves pinnate.

Crepreta. Petals erect. Stamens 4—6. Disk raised or thin. Ovary 5-celled. Cap-

sule opening septicidally. Seeds winged.

Munronia, Wicht.

1. M. Watiicun, Wight. Ill. Ind. Bot. 147; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 543.—

(Turraea pinnata, Wall. Pl. As. var. IT. 21. t. 119; Bot. Mag. t. 1418 ;

MM, Neilgherrica, Wight Ill. I. 147. t. 54).

Has. Rare on shady moist sandstone-rocks in the tropical forests of

the central parts of the Pegu Yomah (Toung-nyo choung).— Fl. March.

Melia, L

Oonspectus of species.

* Leaves simply pinnate. Ovary 3-celled.

BREA EL SKCTNOIT CS ic Nevend a\n'or asetviare yo elelelelele dots gaa BRAIN 0 0:00 cobno0 docone oooudh, GHA,

Leaflets serrate ; drupes small, by abortion one-celled and 1. seeded, .. UM. Azadirachta.

* * Leaves twice pinnate. Ovary and drupes 5—8-celled, some of the cells in fruit

usually empty.

x Drupes about 3 in. long, oblong or elliptical.

Leaflets serrate ; staminal tube blue or dark lilac, slender, glabrous outside, about 3 lin.

Leis” pee aie Sa00ce00 se00er docdan CD COOgOb MONO’ Sco DUeDbeOOOE M. Azedarach.

x x Drupes large, 1 in. long or longer. Sienianel tube white.

Drupes ovate, hardly 3 in. thick, 5 or fewer-celled ; staminal tube about 11—2 lin. long,

glabrous outside ; leaflets crenate or sigan CHULA eee. fede M. dubia.

Drupes twice as Teen almost globose-obovoid, 5—8-celled ; staminal tube 2 lin. long,

woolly at the summit ; flowers larger, scurvy-tomentose outside, ..., MZ. Birmanica,

144 S. Kurz— Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 3,

1. M. excensa, Jack in Mal. Misc. I. 12; Griff. Not. Dicot. 499;

Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 544.

Haz. Tenasserim, Mergui, probably cultivated.—Fl. Dech.

2. M. Azaprracuta, L. sp. pl. 550; Roxb. Fl. Ind. Il. 394; Griff.

Not. Dicot. 500; Bedd. FI. Sylv. t. 14.; Hf, Ind. Fl. I. 544.—(Azadirach-

ta Indica, A. Juss. in Mem. Mus. XIX. t. 13; Wight Icon. t. 17).

Has. Not unfrequent in the dry forests of Prome District, especially

on the higher ridges of the Yomah ; also Ava.—Fl. March.

3. M. Azeparacu, L. sp. pl. 550; Roxb. Fl. Ind. II. 395; Bot.

Mag. t. 1066; Wight Icon. t. 160; Bedd. Fl. Sylv. t.18; Hf. Ind. Fl, I.

544.—(Melia sempervirens, Sw. Prod. 67; Roxb. Fl. Ind. II. 895; Bot,

Reg. t. 643 ; JL sambucina, Bl. Bydr. 162).

Haz. Prome and Ava, in and around villages, apparently only culti-

vated, wild in the adjoining Siamese provinces.—Fl. Febr. March; Fr.

March, Apr.

4, M. Brremanica, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng, 1874. 183.

Has. Frequent in the tropical forests of Martaban.—F]. March, Apr. ;

Fr. Apr. May.

Cipadessa, BI.

1. C. BaccrFera, Miq. in Ann. Mus. Lugd. Bat. [V. b.—(Melia bae-

cifera, Roth. Nov. sp. 215 ; Hhkebergia Indica, Roxb. Fl. Ind. II. 392; @.

fruticosa, Bl. Bydr. 162; Hf. Ind, Fl. I. 545 ; Mallea Hoth, A. Juss. in

Mém. Mus. XIX. 222. t. 18. f, 6).

Var. a. Rorut, leaflets coarsely serrate or serrate-toothed.

Var. £2. INTEGERRIMA, leaflets all entire.

Has. Var. 8. Ava, Taong-dong (Wall.)—Fl. Nov.

Dysoxylum, Bl.

Conspectns of species.

x Flowers in panicles.

Calyx petals and reproductive organs perfectly glabrous,.......++ ... D. binectariferum.

Calyx petals and staminal tube minutely pubescent, .....scseeee vesseuee D. procerum.

x x Flowers in spikes or racemes.

Spikes arising from the trunk or old branches, densely flowered ; leaflets opposite or

TiVeR Tb SIO, TORII APRN, Go oonoon oc on av0cogoHKOnD DO BDDONOUODUONOE D. caulifiorum.

1. D. BINECTARIFERUM, Bedd. in Linn. Trans. XXYV. 212; Hf. Ind.

FL. I. 546.—(Guarea binectarifera, Roxb. Fl. Ind. II. 240; D. macrocar-

pum, Thw. Ceyl. Pl. 60? Bedd. Fl, Sylv. t. 150 ?).

Haz. Chittagong; forests of South Andaman ? (leaves only),—FI.

June; Fr. Febr.

2. D. procerumM, Hiern in Hf. Ind. Fl. t. 547.

an ie

ee

:

1875.] of the Burmese Flora. 145

Has. Rare in the tropical forests of the southern slopes of the Pegu

Yomah ; more frequent in those of Tenasserim.—Fl. Decb.

NV. B.—D. brevipes, Hiern = D. costulatum, Miq., in spite of a

slight difference in the indument of ovary and tube.

8. D. cauLirtorumM, Hiern in Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 549.

Has. Tropical forests of South Andaman.

Sehizochiton, Bl.

Conspectus of species.

* Flowers almost sessile or very shortly and robustly pedicelled.

Leaflets quite glabrous; anthers 6,...... 0. 0c cc ce se cevenes 00.000 0% Sch. dysoxylifolius.

Leaflets softly pubescent beneath ; anthers 6—7, ........i.+600++-SCh. grandifiorus.

* * Flowers on slender pedicels.

Young parts and panicle and also the under-surface of leaves pubescent, Sch. paniculatus.

1. Sou. pysoxyrirorivs, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1871. 49.—

(Chisogeton dysoxylifolius, Hiern in Hf. Ind. Fl, I. 551).

Has. Upper Tenasserim, Thounggyeen.—Fl. March.

2. ScH. GRaANDIFLORUS, Kurz in Journ. As, Soc. Beng. 1872. 296.—

(Chisogeton grandiflorus, Hiern in Hf. Ind. FI. I. 552).

Has. Frequent in the tropical forests of Martaban and Tenasserim,—

Fl. March, Apr.

3. SCH. PANICULATUS, Hiern in Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 552.—(Guarea pani-

culata, Roxb. Fl. Ind. IT. 242).

Has. Burmah, probably Martaban (Brandis); Tenasserim, Tavoy

(geste Hiern) ; Ava, on Taong dong (Wall. Cat. 8099. pp. mixed up with

Chickrassia leaves).

N. B.—Chisocheton holocalyx, Hiern = Schizochiton patens, Spreng.

Sandoricum, Cay.

1. §S. Iyovicum, Cav. Diss. VII. t. 202. 203; Roxb. FI. Ind. II. 392.

and Corom. Pl. III. t. 261; Hf. Ind. Fl). I. 553.

Has. Indigenous in the tropical forests of the southern slopes of the

Peeu Yomah and in Tenasserim ; much cultivated in Burmese villages.—

Fl. Jan.; Fr. Apr. May.

Aglaia, Lour.

Conspectus of species.

* Inflorescence and often also the other parts more or less scaly especially while

young.

x Leaflets usually in 2 or 1 pair with an odd one, nearly glabrous.

19

146 SS. Kurz— Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 3,

Leaves pinnately 3-foliolate ; panicles short and peduncled; scales of younger parts

pale coloured, ..... CRED © 3 5 (DODO ACR DOMED Do oo ot Aabo 104h, Giiiny ong.

Leaflets in 2 pairs with an odd one; scales of younger parts pale coloured ; panicle small

SSH. Sodmoogodadod japo0ce 716 00 DRIEAIBEIa Ido 00 36.00 4 «A. Andamanica.

Leaflets in 2 pairs with an odd one; scales of younger parts rusty brown; panicles

ample, about as long to half as long as the leaves, rather long-peduncled, 4 .paniculata.

x x Leaflets usually in 8—4 pairs with an odd one, beneath densely

silvery or coppery scaly.

Panicle ample, densely silvery or coppery lepidote; flowers sessile,........A4. orgentem.

* * Calyx pedicels and usually the whole inflorescence rusty puberulous or

tomentose from short stellate hairs.

x Leaflets in 6—8 or more pairs.

Leaflets beneath minutely and indistinctly scaly-tomentose, glabrescent, the lateral

nerves all sharply prominent beneath; panicles, etc. rusty puberulous; flowers pe-

GhiGeeChS lorantss ehpeNP OAYEINT, 10075000 DAADUHOO 0000 00097000 504 WUE IT

Leaflets beneath sparingly fascicled-hairy, petiole panicle and nerves beneath densely

rusty tomentose, ......... 6000000 9000 OU0OE 506 90000006 SAOAHItD OF A. Griffithii.

x x Leaflets in 1 or 2 pairs with an odd one, rarely 1-foliolate.

Panicles slightly stellately pubescent, soon glabrous; calyx and pedicels glabrous ;

MYA TOMN GOMSHOUOUE — o000 0000000000 600000 9000 7900000500 46 A. oligophyla.

1. A. Cuirraconea, Miq. in Ann. Mus. Lugd. Bat. IV. 44.

Has. ‘Tropical forests of Chittagong and Arracan.

N. B.—Hiern apparently identifies the fruiting specimens No. 13 of

Hb. Hf. and Th. with the perfectly diiferent flowering ones collected by

Griffith (viz. Nos. 1074 and 1066 Hb. Griff.) which belong to my Amoora

lactescens.

2. A. ANDAMANTICA, Hiern in Hf, Ind. FI. 1. 555.

Has. Not unfrequent in the tropical forests of the Andamans.—Fr,

Febr.

3. A. PANICULATA, Kurz Hb. 2043.

Has. Rather rare in the tropical forests of the Pegu Yomah; Tenas-

serim (Helf, 1036—1037).

4, A. aRGENTEA, Bl. Bydr. 170; Miq. in Ann. Mus. Lugd. Bat. IV.

54.

Has. Rare in the tropical forests of the eastern slopes of the Pegu

Yomah.

5. A. crassmnervia, K Urz in Hf. Ind. Fl. 1.556.—(Cupania sp. Wall.

Cat. 8067. B).

Has. ‘Tenasserim (Helf. 1038).

6. <A. Grirrirat (A. minutiflora, B. Grifithii, Hiern in Hf. Ind. Fl.

557; Euphoria exstipulata, Griff. Not. Dicot. 547.

Haz. ‘Tenasserim (Helf. 1039); Mergui (Griff).

7. A. oLicopHyLia, Mig. Suppl. Fl. Sum. 507 and Ann. Mus, Lued.

Bat. IV. 41.—(Meliacea Singapureana, Wall, Cat. 4887).

1875.] of the Burmese Flora. 147

Haz. Tenasserim (Helf. 1046).

T have only fragments of the Wallichian plant, which so far agree.

A, Roxburghiana, as understood by Mr. Hiern, is a heterogeneous

assemblage which, besides the above, includes also the Khasyan A. wndulata,

Mig. Ann. Mus. Lugd. Bat. IV. 44 (= Milnea sp. 17. Hf. and Th.,

referred by Hiern to A. edulis).

Amoora, Roxb.

Conspectus of species.

* Petals 3. Anthers 6—8.

x Flowers sessile, spiked, the male spikes forming large panicles,

Leaflets shortly acuminate ; fertile spikes simple, many-flowered ; male flowers about

4 lin, in diameter, the staminal tube entire at the apex, ......... ...A. Rohituka.

x x Flowers pedicelled, cymose or racemose-cymose and panicled.

O Male panicles ample, as long to half as long as the leaves.

Leaflets shortly acuminate, thin coriaceous, the nerves prominent on both sides, the

TEINS GING! MARTEMEINOM ChRRUAGT, Goo5oq00 GoNNdeeD uo0v000 cveee see A. spectabilis.

Leaflets blunt, smaller, coriaceous, the nerves above hardly visible and impressed, the

veins and net-venation obsolete; fertile spikes few-flowered ; flowers about 2 lin.

in diameter, the staminal tube slightly 3-toothed, ....... 0 coonD oOo Doss COMME:

O O Panicles slender, shorter or as long as the petiole.

Leaflets green, conspicuously nerved and net-veined on both sides ; flowers long pedicel-

led ; panicle very lax, densely lepidote, ...... .1.4.. sseees ov0e ++. -A. dactescens.

* * Petals 5. Stamens 10.

Panicles shorter than the Peay like the petiole densely lepidote; leaves sparingly

lepidote beneath, . AE OI ALA SRS LO SA.O0 CIT IEC MRERS Oo) 0 0:66 COR Ie eRE A. dysoxyloides.

oe 2A. ety WA. han 119); Beddesaies Sylva to lg2 seit

Tnd. Fl. I. 559.—(Andersonia Rohituka, Roe Healind. hs 20/3": Griff

Not. Dicot. 507. t. 589. f. 3).

Haz. Frequent in the tropical forests of Se eastern slopes of the

Pegu Yomah, and from Martaban down to Tenasserim, up to 8000 feet

elevation.— Fl. Apr. May.

2. A. specTaBILis, Miq. Ann. Mus. Lugd. Bat. IV. 37 ; Hf. Ind. FI.

I. 561.

Haz. Rangoon (¢este Hiern).

J have seen no Burmese specimens ; the original Wallichian tree came

from Assam (Gwilpara) and not from Nepal.

8. A. cucuLLATA, Roxb. Corom. Pl. III. 54. t. 258; Hf. and Ind, FI.

1.560. (Andersonia cucullata, Roxb. Fl. Ind. III. 212).

Has. Forests of Lower Pegu and Tenasserim.—F]. Sept.

4. A. LAcTESCENS, Kurz MS.

Has. Rather rare in the tropical forests of Martaban, east of

Toungoo (Hb. Kz. 1881).

5. A. pysoxviorpEs, Kurz MS.

Has. Martaban, Yoonzeleen, at 900 feet elevation (Brandis).

148 S. Kurz— Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 3

Walsura, Roxb.

Conspectus of genera.

Subg. 1. HUW ALSURA. Berries indehiscent or only very slowly and incompletely

dehiscing along the sutures, usually velvety or tomentose.

* Panicles densely pubescent. Young shoots and petioles of young leaves puberulous.

Petals pubescent ; filaments flat, at the very broad base somewhat coherent,

.. W. trichostemon.

* * Panicles minutely puberulous ; leaves and petioles glabrous.

O Leaves coriaceous or firmly chartaceous.

Leaves beneath usually white-areolate within the net-venation ; filaments broadly lan-

ceolate, sprinkled with minute hairs, ........ ..6+- bile 5 ole 6levele Pelolel ye avi en ie Ezasiaaea

Leaflets uniformly glaucous beneath ; filaments linear, densely pubescent ; flowers

IGWPESIE,. 590000 o9006 5 O00000 0¢ D000 0000 DODU DODOUDIDUDIODD Doar 20000~ W. hypoleuca.

O O Leaves thin chartaceous or almost membranous, the net-venation

very thin and inconspicuous.

Leaves acuminate, uniformly glaucous beneath; young fruits acuminate, greyish

TARE 010 01090 460000 00000000 0000 0G CHRO ICT MAE aOG oo 50 tee W. OLYCOLPM.

Subg. 2. HEYNEA, Roxb. Berries dehiscing along the sutures, usually glabrous.

Glabrous or pubescent ; leaflets in 3—6 pairs ; panicles long-peduncled, .... W. trijuga.

1. W. tricnestemon, Miq. in Ann. Mus. Lued. Bat. IV. 60.—(W.

villosa, WA. Prod. I. 120. in adn., nomen nudum ; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 564.)

Has. Frequent in the eng and low forests from Pegu and Martaban

down to Tenasserim ; also Ava,—Fl. March, Apr.; Fr. May, June.

N. B.—Wall. Cat. 8113 from Sylhet, which, according to Hiern,

differs from the known species of Walsura, is W. tubulata, Hiern.

2. W. nopusta, Roxb. FI. Ind. II. 386 ; Hf. Ind. FI. I. 565.

Has. Rather rare in the tropical forests of the eastern slopes of the

Pegu Yomah, but frequent in those of Martaban down to Tenasserim and

the Andamans.—F]. May ; Fr. July.

3. W. HypoLEeucA, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872. 296 excl.

fruct.; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 564,

Ere Frequent in the tropical forests of the Andamans.—Fl. May,

June.

4, W. oxycarpa, Kurz MS.

Has. Not unfrequent in the tropical forests of the Andamans.

5. W. trisuea (Heynea trijuga, Roxb. Corom. Pl. ILI. 56. t. 260.

and Fl. Ind, II. 390 ; Bot. Mag. t. 1738 ; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 565.—(Heynea

quinquejuga, Roxb. FI]. Ind. II. 391).

VaR. a, GENUINA, all parts (also the panicle) quite glabrous, or only

the young shoots. slightly pubescent ; leaflets in 3 to 6 pairs.

Var. 6. PuBEscens, (Walsura pubescens, Kurz in Journ. As, Soe.

Beng, 1872. 397), all softer parts, inflorescence, and under surface of leaves,

softly pubescent ; leaflets usually in 4 pairs.

1875.] of the Burmese Flora. 149

Has. Var. a. Upper Tenasserim ; var. f. rather rare in the tropical

forests along the eastern slopes of the Pegu Yomah, and in the Martaban

hills, up to 2000 feet elevation.— Fl. Febr. March; Fr. Apr.

Carapa, Aubl.

Conspectus of species.

Leaflets more or less ovate ; flowers 5-merous, about 2 lin. across, ...... C. Moluccensis.

Leaflets obovate to obovate-oblong ; flowers 4-merous, about 4 lin. across, ..C. obovata.

1. C. Monuccensts, Lam. Encycl. Meth. I. 621 ; DC. Prod. I. 626.

(Granatum littoreum, Rumph. Herb. Amb. t. 61.; Xylocarpus Granatum,

Koen. Naturf. XX. 2; A. Juss. in Mém, Mus. XIX. 244 ; Mig. Ann. Mus.

Lugd. Bat.).

Has. Not unfrequent along the rocky and sandy shores of the Anda-

mans, especially along the western side.—Fr. Apr. May.

2. C. opoyata, Bl. Bydr. 179. (Xylocarpus obovatus, A. Juss. in

~ Mém. Mus. XIX. 344; Mig. in Ann. Mus. Lugd. Bat. IV. 62 ; Xylocarpus

Granatum, Roxb. FI. Ind. II. 240 ; Alonosoma littorata, Griff. Not. Dicot.

502. t. 588. f. 3. ; Gwarea oblongifolia, Griff. Not. Dicot. 503 ?).

Has. Frequent in the littoral forests, especially the tidal ones, all along

the shores, from Chittagong down to Tenasserim and the Andamans.—Fl.

June, July ; Fr. Apr. May.

Chickrassia, A. Juss.

1. Ch. Tazuraris, A. Juss. in Mém. Mus. XIX. 251. t. 22. f 27;

Wight Ill. t. 56 ; Bedd. Fl. Sylv. t.9 ; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 568.—(Swietenia

Chickrassa, Roxb. Fl. Ind. II. 399).

Var. a, GENUINA, leaves and panicles glabrous ; capsules greyish, wrin-

kled-rough.

Var. £8. VELUTINA (Chickrassia velutina, Roem. Syn. monog. I. 185 ;

Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1873. 65), all softer parts, as well as the

panicle, softly pubescent ; capsules black, almost smooth.

‘Haz. Var. a. Rather rare in the tropical forests of Chittagong and

Pegu down to Tenasserim ; also Andamans; var. 8. frequent in the dry

forests of Prome and Pegu, here entering also the upper mixed forests.—Fl.

Sept.

Soymida, A. Juss.

1, S. FEBRIFUGA, A. Juss. in Mém, Mus. XIX. 251. t. 22. f. 26; Bedd.

Fl, Sylv. t. 8; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 567.—(Swietenia febrifuga, Roxb. Corom.

Pl. I. t. 17. and Fl. Ind. II. 398).

Has. Burmah (in Hb. Brandis, without locality, probably Prome).—

Fl. March, Apr.; Fr, Jul. Aug.

150 S. Kurz— Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 3,

Cedrela, L

Conspectus of species.

* Seeds winged at both ends. Leaflets entire.

Calyx minute, the sepals rounded, hardly 4 lin. long ; leaflets usually on long slender

SMOKE, Gooovd0d 000000000009 00000000 dn 0000000090 0000000000 005 C. Toona.

Calyx large, the sepals 1} lin. long, iter acute ; leaflets usually shortly petioluled,

1 C. multijuga.

* * Seeds winged only below.

Leaflets serrate or serrulate ; calyX MINUte, .,...sscccssercssesssesesesss STMMe

1, C. Toona, Roxb. Corom. Pl. III. t. 288 and Fl. Ind. I. 635;

Wight. Icon. t. 161; Brand. Fl. Sylv. 72. t. 14, Bedd. Fl. Sylv. t. 10; WA.

Prod. I. 124.—(C. febrifuga, Bl. Bydr. 180; Miq. in Ann. Mus. Lugd.

Bat. IV. 68; C. Leysmani, Hort. Bog. 133; Mig. 1. c).

Haz. Rather rare in the tropical forests of the Pegu Yomah, frequent

in those of Martaban ; also Chittagong and Arracan.—Fl. March, Apr. ;

Fr, Oct. Nov.

2, C. munrisvea, Kurz in Journ, As. Soc. Beng. 1872. 297.

Has. Rather rare in the tropical forests of the eastern slopes of the

Pegu Yomah, west of Tounghoo.—Fl, March.

3. OC. serRata, Royle. Ill. Him. Pl. 144. t. 25.—(C. serrulata, Miq.

Suppl. Fl. Sum. 508 and Ann. Mus. Lugd. Bat. IV. 64; C. longifolia,

Wall. Cat. 1273).

Haz. Ava.

The identification of C. serrulata, Miq. (which is the same as Wallich’s

plant) with C. serrata, Royle, is open to future inquiry.

CHAILLETIACEA.

Chailletia, DC.

Conspectus of species.

x Nerves and net-venation beneath more or less conspicuous.

Cymes cluster-like and almost sessile; leaves green, cuneately narrowed into a very

MOOG DEMO, 50000000 05000000 000000 09000000 0000 0000 0000500 ... Ch. gelonioides.

Cymes spreading, peduncled?; leaves dark-brown in a dried state, .... Ch. macropetala.

x x Nerves and net-venation beneath very faint and almost impressed.

Cymes on a peduncle 2—3 lin. long; leaves brown in a dried state, shortly petioled,

.- Ch. Helferiana.

1. Cu. GELoNIoIDES, Bth. and Hf. Gen. pl. I. 341. and Hf. Ind. Fl.

I. 570 excl. syn. Mig. (Moacurra gelonioides, Roxb. Fl. Ind. II. 70; DC.

Prod. XV/2. 227).

Has. Chittagong.

N. B.—Ch. Sumatrana, Miq. has fruits only one-third or one-fourth the

size of those of Ch. gelomoides, not to mention other points of difference.

a

1875.] of the Burmese Flora. 151

2. CH. MAcRopPEraLa, Turez. in Bull. Mose. 1863. 611. (ongipetala) ;

EM Ind. Fl. I. 571.

Has. Tenasserim, Mergui.

3. Cu. Henrertana, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872. 297; Hf.

fod. Fl. I. 570.

Has. Tenasserim, Tavoy, Moulmein, etc.

OLACIN BA.

Conspectus of species.

Subord. I. Otacem. Stamens as many or twice as many (rarely fewer) as

petals and opposite to them.

Trib. I, EU-OLACEZ. Stamens anisomerous, or isomerous. Ovary 2—5-celled at

the base, 1-celled at the apex or completely 1-celled, the placenta central with 2—5

pendulous ovules.

*® Stamens twice as many as petals, or if fewer, accompanied by staminodes.

XientA. Calyx not enlarging after flowering. Stamens all perfect.

Oxrax. Calyx enlarging and enclosing the fruit. Perfect stamens 3, rarely 5; stami-

nodes 6 or fewer.

* * Stamens as many as petals. Staminodes none.

x Fruiting calyx much enlarged, adnate to the drupe.

ERYTHROPALUM. Ovary l-celled. Tendril-bearing climbers with 3-nerved leaves.

StRomsBosiaA. Ovary to near the summit 3—65-celled. Trees with penninerved leaves.

x x Calyx in fruit unchanged.

Awacotosa. Disk in fruit much enlarged, adnate to the drupe and resembling an en-

grossed adnate calyx. Petals almost. Ovary 1 or imperfectly 2-celled.

Trib. II. OPILTEAZ. Stamensisomerous. Ovary 1-celled with a single ovule. Flow-

ers hermaphrodite.

* Perianth dichlamydeous, zt. e. consisting of calyx and corolla.

CansseRA. Spikes axillary, without bracts. Calyx inconspicuous, shortly 4-lobed ; corolla

gamopefalous. Stamens 4, alternating with as many hypogynous scales or glands.

Nartsrarorsis. Spikes axillary, without conspicuous bracts. Calyx 4-lobed. Corolla

gamopetalous. Stamens 4, free. Staminodes none.

Opitta. Inflorescence while young conspicuously imbricate-bracted. Petals free.

Filaments filiform. Staminodes 5.

* * Perianth monochlamydeous.

Lepionurus. Inflorescence while young conspicuously imbricate-bracted. Flowers

4-merous. Filaments very short, complanate.

CHAMPEREYA. Inflorescence with very deciduous minute bracts. Flowers 5-merous.

Filaments slender, exserted.

Subord. II. Icactyem, Stamens as many as petals and alternating with

them.

Trib. III. HU-ICACINE4. Cotyledons small or dilated. Trees or erect shrubs.

* Calyx minutely toothed or lobed. Petals usually glabrous.

Stemonurvs. Anthers pendulous. Drupe without fleshy appendage.

Aropytrs. Anthers attached at the back above the 2-lobed base. Ovary oblique.

Drupe with a fleshy puffy sarcocarp covering only the one half of the nut.

152 S. Kurz— Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 3,

DarunepHyiiorsis. Anthers attached to the back. Drupe berry-like. Flowers sessile,

in heads.

* * Calyx 5-cleft or the sepals distinct, imbricate.

Gonocaryum. Flowers unisexual. Drupes dry, woody. Albumen many-lobed.

Trib. IV. PHYTOCRENE. Cotyledons broadly foliaceous or thick-fleshy. Flowers

dicecious. Climbers. Fruit drupaceous.

* Stamens alternating with the petals.

x Flowers in heads.

Puytocrene. Filaments longer than the anthers. Albumen deeply lobed. Drupes

villous or echinate.

x x Flowers in spikes racemes or panicles.

Sarcostiema. Flowers interruptedly spiked ; filaments longer than the anthers. Stami-

nodes none. Stigma sessile. Albumen none.

Nartstatum. Flowers racemose. Filaments very short, alternating with 5 staminodes.

Styles 2. Albumen fleshy.

* * Stamens opposite to the petals.

JopEs. Flowers cymose-panicled. Stamens 8, filaments very short. Stigma sessile.

Albumen fleshy.

Genus of doubtful position.

Carpiopteris. Sepals and petals imbricate. Fruit dry, winged. Mulk-juiced annual

twiners.

Ximenia, L.

1, X. Americana, L. sp. pl. 497; Roxb. Fl. Ind. II. 252; Lamk.

Til. t. 257. f. 1—2; Bth. Fl. Austr. I. 891; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 574.—(CX. sub-

scandens, Griff. Not. Dicot. 691).

Has. Not unfrequent along the coasts of the Andamans; also Te-

nasserim.—F 1. March, Apr.

Olax, L.

Conspectus of species.

x Enlarged calyx in fruit membranous, dry.

Branchlets terete, like the under-surface of the leaves and the racemes, puberulous,

..O. scandens.

All parts also the racemes quite glabrous; branchlets angular, .......... O. zeylanica.

x x Enlarged fruiting calyx coriaceous (fleshy in a fresh state).

Glabrous, the branchlets terete ; flowers 4—5 lin. long, .... 1... ceeeee «e O. tmbricata.

1. O. scanpENs, Roxb. Corom. Pl. II. t. 102. and Fl. Ind. I. 168 ;

Hf. Ind. Fl. 575.—(Olax obtusa, Bl. Bydr. 131 ?).

Has. Rather frequent all over Burmah, from Ava and Chittagong

down to Tenasserim, in all deciduous forests, ascending also the pine forests

up to 8500 ft. elevation, and occurring equally abundantly in the tidal

forests.—F 1. Decb.—March.

2. O. Zeytanica, L. sp. pl. 49; Hf. Ind. Pl. I. 576. (0. acuminata,

Wall. Cat. 6781; Hf. Ind. Fl. 1.576; O. sphaerocarpa, Griff. Not. Dicot.

689).

1875.] of the Burmese Flora. 153

Has. Ava, in woods at the Mogoung river (Griff. 797) ; Khakhyen

hills (J. Anderson).—Fl. March.

3. QO. mpricata, Roxb. Fl. Ind. I. 164; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 575.—

(0. Merguensis, Mast. in Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 576).

Has. Chittagong ; Tenasserim, from Moulmain to Mergui.—Fr. Febr.

Doubtful species.

1. O. loranthiformis, Griff. Not. Dicot, 691. t. 645, f. 5.

Has, Moulmein, on the coast of Madamacan (Griff.).

Erythropalum, Bl.

1. KH. scanpens, Bl. Bydr. 922; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 578.—(Decastrophia

inconspicua, Griff. Not. Dicot 736. t. 613. f. 4.; H#. populifolium, Planch.

in Ann. d. sc. nat, 4 ser. II. 260; Hf. Ind. FI. I. 578).

Has. Not unfrequent in the tropical forests of the eastern slopes of

the Pegu Yomah, and from Martaban down to Tenasserim.—F I. Apr.

Strombosia, Bl.

1. 8S, Javanica, Bl. Bydr, 1154, and Mus. Bot. I. 251. f. 47; Hf,

ind. FI, I, 579.

Has. Tenasserim (Helf. 818).

Anacolosa, Bl.

Conspectus of species.

Calyx and pedicels densely puberulous; drupe scarlet, thinly velvety, ....A. puberula.

CAlyxaandeslender pedicels clabrousy! vilee sas ss0 «20 eels se cine 6 A. Griffithit.

_ As preceding, but the fruiting pedicels very thick; drupe an inch long, glabrous,

.. A. crassipes.

i A; pupErunA, Kurz J. A. S. B. 1872. 297; Hit. Ind. FI. 1. 581.

Has. Rather frequent in the tropical forests of the Andamans.—FI.

Febr. May; Fr. Febr.

2. A. GrirrirHit, Mast. in Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 530.

Has. Tenasserim, Mergui (Griff, 821).

Probably only a glabrous form of the preceding ; the sepals and petals

are not quite glabrous.

3. A. cRassIpes, (Stemonurus ? crassipes, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc,

Beng. 1872. 298; Gomphandra? crassipes, Mast, in Hf. Ind. FI]. L. 587).

Has. Rare along choungs in the tropical forests of the eastern slopes

of the Pegu Yomah.—Fr. Cs.

Cansjera, Juss.

Conspectus of species.

x Spikes simple.

Leayes small, oval, notched or blunt, pubescent ; spikes very short, solitary, C. parvifolia.

Leaves acuminate, opaque ; spikes solitary or by pairs, ..ce veee seve sees cess G. Rhcedit.

20

154 S. Kurz—Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 3,

x ™ Spikes branched, rarely the uppermost ones almost simple.

Mueaves acute, glossy above; spikesisolitary, ........0.--++++ «sacsevs C. zizyphifolia.

J. C. parvirotta, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872. 298; Hf.

Ind. Fl. 583.

Has. Tenasserim (Helf.).

2. C. Rueepiu, Gmel. Syst. I. 280; Wight Icon. t. 1861; DC.

Prod. XIV. 519. Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 582 pp.—(C. scandens, Roxb. Corom.

Pl. If. 1. t. 103 and FI. Ind. I. 441).

Has. Not unfrequent in the tropical forests of the Andamans a

Tenasserim.—F]. May.

3. C. zizypHironiA, Griff. Not. Dicot. 360. t. 537. f. 1. (Olax?

Sumatrana, Miq. Suppl. Fl. Sum. 342).

Has. Burmah (Griff. 828, most probably Tenasserim).

Natsiatopsis, Kurz.

1. N. THUNBERGI#ZFOLIA, Kurz. MS.

Has. Ava, Khakhyen hills, Ponsee (J. Anderson).—Fl. March.

Female flowers unknown.

Opilia, Roxb.

1. O. AmentTacrs, Roxb. Corom. Pl. II. 31. t. 158 and FI. Ind. II.

87; Wight Ill. t.40; Hf. Ind. FL. I. 583.

Has. Not unfrequent in the mixed dry forests of the Prome District.

Fl. March ; Fr. Apr. May.

Lepionurus, BI.

1. L. syzvestris, Bl. Bydr. 1146; Mig. Fl. Ind. Bat. I. 784.—(Z.

oblongifolius ; Mast.in Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 583; Leptonium oblongifolium,

Griff. in Macl. Cale. Journ. LV. 236 and Not. Dicot. 368. t. 536).

Has. Ava, Khakhyen hills (J. Anderson).—Fl. May.

Champereya, Griff.

1. Cu. Grirriratana, Planch. (Ch. sp. Griff. Not. Dicot. 362. t.

Delest-co))s

Has. Not unfrequent in the tropical forests of the Andaman islands ;

also Upper Tenasserim.—Fl. Febr. ; Fr. Apr. May.

N. B.—Wherever Lepionurus may be placed, Champereya must aceom-

pany it.

Daphniphyllopsis, Kurz.

1. D. caprrara, (Ilex daphnephylloides, Kurz in Journ. As. Soe.

Beng 1870. 72).

Has. Not unfrequent in the damp hill-forests of Martaban, at 4000

to 6000 ft. elevation.—Fl. March.

1875.] of the Burmese Flora. 155

An incompletely known genus, but its position in Olacinee@ is certain.

Inflorescence is exactly that of Ilex sulcata, while the leaves resemble those

of Daphniphyllum Himalayense. It is nearest allied to Mappia.

Stemonurus, Bl.

Conspectus of species.

x All parts glabrous.

Leaves 24—5 in. long; cymes leaf-opposite, the peduncle stiff and $—1 in. long,

.. St. Penangianus.

Leaves 2—3 in. long; cymes slightly puberulous, axillary and peduncled ; drupes ellip-

ieallyioblonossiine pubamenySWICaLe, Wha «+ +.) clelstemeilels ss elele oreo St. Javanicus.

x x Younger branchlets tawny tomentose ; petioles, undersurface of leaves,

and inflorescence puberulous or tomentose.

Gyames peduncled, Jeat-opposed,... 22. 1.2... 5 eee ees wei ses sees ween St. tomentellus.

1. Sr. Penaneranus, Miers Contr. I.90.—(Gomphandra Penangiana,

Wall. Cat. 7204; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 587).

Has. Upper Tenasserim, Moulmein (Lobb) feste Masters.

2. Sa. Javanicus, Bl. Bydr. 649; Miers. Contr. Bot I. 86.—(Lasi-

anthera Javanica, Mig. Fl. Ind. Bat. I/l. 790; Gomphandra affinis,

Mast. in Hf. Ind. FI. 1. 586).

Has. Tenasserim.

8. Sr. romentEeLtvs, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872. 298.—

(Gomphandra tomentella, Mast. mht Tind. HlSaeiasi2)s

Has. Burma, probably Tenasserim (Griff. 813).

Apodytes, E. Mey.

1, A. Anpamanica, Kurzin And, Rep. App. B. 5. and Journ. As.

Soe. Beng. 1872. 298; Hf. Ind. FI. I. 588.

Has. Frequent in the tropical forests of the Andaman Islands.—FI.

Febr. to May ; Fr. May to July.

Gonocaryum, Mig.

Conspectus of species.

Leaves opaque; drupes obtusely 4—3-angular, acute, .... 1c cess eave vane G. gracile.

Leaves glossy ; drupes terete, rounded at apex, ...... cesses eens veee G. Griffithianun.

1. G. eracitE, Miq. Suppl. Fl. Sum. 343 (1860).—(Gonocaryum ?

Wallichii, Mast. in Hf. Ind. Fl: I. 590),

Haz. Tenasserim (Helf. 817).

The drupes in this species are obtusely angular, but the seeds being

all aborted, no stress can, consequently, be laid upon this character, until

perfected fruits with seeds become known,

2. G. GrirrirHianum (Platea Griffithsiana, Miers. Contr. I. 97. t.

17 ; Platea Lobbiana Miers. 1. c.; Phlebocalymna Griffithiana, Mast. in

Hf. Ind. Fl. 1. 590; Phlebocalymna Lobbiana, Mast. 1. c.).

156 S. Kurz— Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 3,

Haz. Frequent in marshes of the tropical and swamp forests, from

Southern Pegu down to Tenasserim.—F]. Decb. to March; Fr. R. 8,

Phytocrene, Wall.

Conspectus of species.

Male flower-heads usually more tawny, tomentose, on short but very thick pedunclets,

numerous in very compound racemes terminating in the young state in short thick

tomentose bract-like sterile axes) fo ...5.. c..+++-- «sse0s 9990009 0% Ph. gigantea.

Male flower-heads somewhat smaller and usually greyish, tomentose, on short but slen-

der pedunclets, few (8—5), in simple short racemes terminating in long bract-like

preyish-tomentose slender, aX€S, .....0 .csscelescece seceee wnecee so Lhe OFMCEMMs

1. Pu. eiaanrea, Wall. Pl. As. var. III. 11. t. 216 ; Griff. Not. Dicot.

t.4905% 2. Ei ind) Fl. 1. sie

Has. Not unfrequent along choungs in the tropical forests of the

eastern slopes of the Pegu Yomah ; more frequent in Tenasserim.—FI. Febr.

2. Pu. BractEata, Wall. Fl. As. var. IIJ.12; DC. Prod. XVII. 12;

1gbe Ihnel, 1b 1 ws y45

Haz. South-Tenasserim; Mergui (Griff. 830) teste Baillon.

The so-called bracts of the male inflorescences in this genus are, in my

opinion, only the sterile end-branchings of the partial racemes.

Sarcostigma, WA.

1. S. Waticut, Baill.in Adans. X. 282; DC. Prod. XVII. 16;

Hf. Ind. Fl. 1. 594.—(S. edule, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872. 298 ;

Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 594.)

Has. Frequent in the tropical forests of the Andaman islands.—Fl.

Febr. ; Fr. May to June,

Masters says that this species (S. edule) is probably only a form of

S. Kleinii, but in this he is mistaken, for the latter differs by quite glabrous

drupes and inflorescences ; and he evidently confounds two species under this

name. I would suggest to him to compare Maingay’s No. 3878 from

Malaya (of which I have seen only leaves) with S. Horsfieldi. -

Iodes, Bl.

Conspectus of species.

x Pedicels not woody, slender.

Leaves oblong, not cordate at the base, membranous, the petiole 4—? in. long ; pedicels

slender, about 4 lin. long, ............ COhoadoDIA DoOeESSO CDD0C .oe..L. Brandisii.

Leaves more or less oval, cordate at the base, coriaceous, the petiole 2—4 lin. long ; flow-

Ersvalmost Sessile: .... aries tetetrreme enemas DOC 0000000005 090000 cone Joule HOPMAN P

x ™ Pedicels thick and woody.

Drupes orange, smooth, above an inch long, ............ Gao00d00 GOK I. Hookeriana.

1. J. Branpisu, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872. 298; Hf.

Sindee 96:

1875.] of the Burmese Flora. 157

Has. Tenasserim, Thoungyeen (Brandis).—Fl. March.

2. I. romenreta, Mig. Fl. Ind. Bat. I/1. 796.—(Z. ovalis, Mast.

in Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 696, vix. Bl.).

Has. Upper Tenasserim, Moulmein (Falconer),—FIl. Febr.

3. I.? Hooxerrana, Baill. in Adans. X 268; DC. Prod. XVII. 24;

Hf, Ind. Fl. I. 596.—(LZ. Thomsoniana, Baill. 1. ec. 270; DC. 1. c. 25; HE.

ee.):

Haz. Chittagong (Hf. and Th.).

Fruits and habit of Sarcostigma. An examination of a single ovary

already engrossed shewed me a solitary erect basal ovule.

Cardiopteris, Wall.

1. C. ropara, Wall, ap. B. Br. Pl. Jav. Rar. 246. t. 49; Hf. Ind.

Fl. I. 597.—(C. hamulosa, Griff. Dicot. 542. t. 598. f. 1—3 ; C. Javanica,

Beehumph. (il. 206. t. 177. f..1. A.).

Has. Common in all leaf-shedding forests and deserted toungyas,

from Ava and Martaban down to Tenasserim.—Fr. C. S.

ILICINEA,

Conspectus of genera.

Subord. I. Iu1tcum. Petals present. Flowers hermaphrodite.

Intex. Stamens 5. Ovary 4—8-celled.

Subord. II. DaPHNIPHYLLE®. Flowers apetalous, unisexual.

DarHNipHytiuM. Stamens 5—18. Ovary 2-celled.

Ilex, L

Conspectus of species,

* Male inflorescence cymose, the female flowers clustered or solitary.

Leaves elongate-cuneate-lanceolate, 2—3} in. long, beneath very opaque and brown;

aejoalls: Gillian, oo0000 9005 0000 0000 0000000 6 o0N0 0000 900090 a000 I. gaultheriefolia.

* * Female flowers in simple or compound wmbellets or cymes.

O Cymes head-like contracted and small, on a long compressed peduncle.

Ciabrous, or thesbranchlets pubescent, ............0 «access eresee serees I. Godayam.

O O Cymes divaricately 2-cleft, on a renee ane peduncle.

Cymes once divaricately 2-cleft; leaves large, coriaceous; branchlets pale-coloured,

..L. macrophylla.

Cyme twice or thrice dichotomously branched ; leaves beneath pale-coloured or glau-

cescent ; branchlets pure white ; style stout, distinct, ..............-. I. cymosa.

AS preceding, but stigma sessile, .... 0.2. sess seee veeeees 5 0a50 coon 3000t& THO

1. J. g@auntrHEertmroria, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872. 299.

Haz. ‘Tenasserim, Mergui (Griff. 1998).

Dr. Hooker identifies this species with his I. theefolia, but in this he

is in error, his new species differing greatly not only in the texture

and polish of the leaves, but still more so in the inflorescence, doubly

158 S. Kurz —Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 3,

larger flowers, and very long pedicels (in my species they are only about 4

lin. long).

2. I. Gopayam, Coleb. in, Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 604.—(Prinos Godayan,

Ham. in Wall. Pl. As. rar. III. 88. t. 261.)

VAR. a. GENUINA, shoots, peduncles, and pedicels shortly puberulous ;

calyx more or less pubescent or densely fringed.

Var. 6. suncata, (J. suleata, Wall. Cat. 4830; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 604),

all parts quite glabrous except the puberulous pedicels ; calyx usually pube-

rulous or only minutely puberulous, the lobes sometimes ciliolate.

Has. Var. 6. Not unfrequent in the tropical forests from Martaban

down to Tenasserim.—F 1, Febr. Apr.

3. IL. MACROPHYLLA, Wall. Cat. 4331; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 604.

Has. ? Tenasserim (Helfer), and Mergui (Griff. 2012) teste Hf.

4. I. cymosa, Bl. Bydr. 1149; Hf. Ind. FI, I. 605.

Has. ‘Tenasserim (¢este Hf.).

5. I. Wauticui, Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 605.

Has. ‘Tenasserim, Tavoy (este Hf.).

Daphniphyllum, Bl.

Conspectus of species.

Calyx persistent ?; pedicels about 4 im. long, .......6 wees 500.8000 00000006 D. majus.

Calyx deciduous ; pedicels about 1—2 lin. long, ..................0- D. Himalayense.

1. D. magus, Muell. Arg. in Linn. XXXIV. 76; DC. Prod. XVI/1. 2.

Has. Upper Tenasserim, Amherst (Wall.) Fl. Febr.

2. D. Himatavense, Muell. Arg. in DC. Prod. XVI/1. 4.

Haz. Not unfrequent in the damp hill-forests of the Martaban hills,

east of Tounghoo, at about 5000 f%. elevation.

CHLASTRIN EA,

Conspectus of species.

Subord. I. Ceuastracem, Stamens inserted outside the disk. Seeds al-

buminous.

* Capsule or follicle dehiscent.

x Ovules from the axis of the cells. Leaves opposite.

Evonymus. Petals free. Disk fleshy, broad; capsules 3—45-lobed and -celled.

Microrroris. Petals united at the base. Disk none or annular. Capsule 1-celled, 2-

valved.

x x Ovules erect. Leaves alternate.

CrLastrus. Ovary free. Capsules 2—4-celled, loculicidal. Seeds arillate. Flowers

in panicles or racemes.

Gymnosporta. Ovary confluent with the disk. Capsule 2—38-lobed and -celled.

Arillus complete, incomplete or wanting. Flowers in cymes.

1875. ] of the Burmese Flora. 159

Kourrmia. Ovary free, styles 2. Capsule entire or 2-lobed, 1—2-celled, follicle-like

and slowly dehiscing into 1 or 2 valves. Flowers in cymes or racemes, or panicled.

* * Fruit an indehiscent drupe or berry.

ELZODENDRON. Ovary superior, confluent with the disk; drupe containing an 1—3-

celled putamen. Leaves opposite or nearly so.

Srpponopon. Ovary half-inferior, 5-celled. Berry large, coulis: many pyrenes.

Leaves alternate.

Subord. II, HrppocratEace®. Stamens 3, rarely 2—5, inserted within or

on the disk. Albumen none. Leaves opposite.

* Fruit an indehiscent berry, 1—many-seeded. Seeds not winged.

Satacta. Only genus. Scandent shrubs. Inflorescences axillary. Stamens 3, rarely

2 or 4, inserted within the disk.

* * Fruit capsular or samaroid, dehiscent. Seeds winged.

x Ripe carpels samaroid, 2-valved. Stamens 3, inserted within the

disk. Scandent shrubs.

Hirrocratea. Ripe carpels usually 3. Seeds usually winged at the lower end. In-

florescences terminal or terminal and axillary.

x x Fruita capsule. Erect treesor shrubs. Stamens 5, inserted on

the disk.

Lopnopreratum. Capsule 3—4-celled and -lobed, loculicidal. Seeds winged all round.

Not gland-dotted.

Koxoona. Capsule 3-celled and -lobed, loculicidal. Seed winged at the upper end

only. All herbaceous parts gland-dotted.

Evonymus, L.

Conspectus of species,

Subg. 1. Evonymus. Ovules 2 in each cell.

* Flowers solitary or clustered in the axils of the leaves.

Flowers nearly 5—6 lin. across; petals fringed ; capsules sharply angular, on }—1 in.

fone peduncles:; leaves Slossy5 CMLTC) 0.25 0.4) +.« afeleltereeaicl clclsie i-/ee o « LE. Javanicus.

Capsules globular, obtusely lobed, very shortly peduncled or almost sessile; leaves

CHEGML, OPACWS, nocoossd o6o00000 dd00006 GO00000 conDe 0 od00co aDODDE Li. calocarpus.

* * Flowers in dichotomous cymes.

x Branchlets terete or nearly so, or somewhat compressed.

~ Flowers small, usually 5-merous; petals entire; capsules angular; leaves serrulate

WIDWEHGISS Gogcbc coco o500 506 too on vo comme nos oo. obo mm MODE . oe. Li. glaber.

x x Branchlets sharply 4-cornered or almost winged.

Flowers small, in very slender cymes; capsules small, smooth, ...... ee Le Griffithii.

Subg. 2. GLYPTOPETALUM. Ovules solitary in the cells.

Bark red ; petals 4, greenish purple, concave-orbicular, without grooves ; capsules very

LOOMS MeO SCULLY MISSURES AMG) WANES, |.) +/+ «cleleelete alelen elie © sel EE. sclerocarpus.

1. HH. Javanicus, Bl. Bydr. 1146; Benn. in Horsf. Pl. Jav. var. 180.

t. 28; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 607.—(#. Bancanus, Mig. Suppl. Fl. Sum. 518).

Has. ‘Tropical forests of Tenasserim, from Moulmein southwards.—

Fl. March.

2. H. cAtocarrus, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872. 299; Hf.

Ind. Fl. I. 609.

160 S. Kurz —Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 3,

Has. ‘Tenasserim (Helfer 1973),

3. H. cuaBEer, Roxb. Fl. Ind. I. 628; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 609.—(,

garcinioides, Roxb. HBC.; H. Timorensis, Laws. in Hf. Ind. Fl, I. 610,

non Zipp.).

Has. Not unfrequent in the tropical forests of Martaban and Tenas-

serim, rare in those of the eastern slopes of the Pegu Yomah; also Chitta-

gong.—F]. March, Apr.

4. E. Grirrirau, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872, 73; Ind. Fl.

I. 611.—( Hippocratea angulata, Griff. Not. Dicot. 473. t. 581. f. 1).

VaR. a, GENUINA, petioles thick, hardly ¢ lin. long or the leaves almost

sessile and obsoletely serrate.

Var. 8. DuBIA, petioles slender, 2—3 lin. long; leaves entire or nearly

SO.

Has. Var, a, Ava, on rocks at Loonkarim and Delvi Nempean on the

North from Assam (Griff. 1977); var. 8. not unfrequent in the damp hill-

forests of the Nattoung ranges in Martaban, east of Toungoo, at 6000—7000

ft. elevation.— Fl. Apr. ?

Var. £. will prove a distinct species, but as my specimens are in very

young bud only, I am unwilling to establish the species until better mate-

rial comes to hand.

5. HH. scierocarpus, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872. 299.—

(Glyptopetalum sclerocarpum, Laws. in Hf. Ind, Fl. I. 6.8).

Haz. Lather rare in the tropical forests around the Kambala toung

of the central Pegu Yomah.—Fl. Fr. Febr.

Microtropis, Wall.

Conspectus of species.

x Cymes not much longer than the petiole, robust and crowdedly-flowered.

Leaves coriaceous, smooth ; capsules $ in. long, grey, ................d MW. garcinifolia,

x x Cymes much longer than the petiole, lax and dichotomously branched.

Leaves smooth, glossy above ; peduncle slender, 1—14 in. long, .......... IM. bivalvis.

Leaves coriaceous, wrinkled Ea above, opaque; peduncle ae in. long,

I, longifolia.

1. M. carcinironia, Wall. ap. Wight Icon. t. 761. ro:

garcinifolius, Roxb. Fl. Ind. I. 628; JL discolor, Wall. Cat. 4837: Hf.

Ind. FI. I. 614).

Has. Rather frequent in the damp ‘hill-forests of Martaban and

Tenasserim, at 5000 to 7000 ft. elevation. —FIl. March.

2. M. sBivatvis, Wall Cat. 4840; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 614.—(Celastrus

bivalvis, Jack.; Roxb. Fl. Ind. ed. 1. II. 399).

Has. ‘Tropical forests of Tenasserim, from Moulmein southwards.—

Fl. Febr. and Sept. ; Fr. Octob.

3. M. Lone@iFouia, Wall, in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1873. 65

1875.] of the Burmese Flora. 161

Has. Tenasserim, from Moulmein District (Dr. Brandis) down to

Tavoy (Wall).—Fr. Octob.

The specimens in Brandis’ herbarium have smaller and more obtuse

leaves.

Celastrus, L.

Conspectus of species.

Panicles slender, terminal ; capsules 3-celled with 3—6 seeds, ...... 000 CO. paniculatus.

Cymes robust, forming usually axillary and terminal spurious panicles ; capsule 1-celled

and 1-seeded,.........+ 0 vond00 s00000C CG Od800000 oc MeLehsveheloieielsishace C. monosperma.

i C.rantcunatTa, Willd. sp. pl. I. 1125; Roxb. Fl. Ind. I. 621;

Wight Ill. t. 72 and Icon. t. 158; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 617.—(C. multifiora,

Roxb. Fl. Ind. I. 622; C. nutans, Roxb. 1. ¢. 628).

VaR. a. GENUINA, all parts quite glabrous or nearly so.

Var. £. PUBESCENS, (C. pubescens, Wall. Cat, 4803), leaves beneath and

the petioles pubescent ; panicles densely puberulous.

Has. Not unfrequent in the leaf-shedding forests all over Pegu, espe-

cially in the drier parts; var. 6. Pegu, Prome hills.—Fl. H8.; Fr. Sept.

Octob.

2. OC. MonosPERMA, Roxb. Fl. Ind. I. 625; Hf. Ind. FI. I. 618.

Haz. Ava, Khakhyen hills, Ponsee (J. Anderson).—Fr. March.

Lawson doubtfully gives Pegu as a locality for C. stylosa, Wall., but

this is very probably a mistake.

Gymnosporia, WA.

Conspectus of species.

Unarmed ; leaves oblong-lanceolate to lanceolate, finely acuminate,...... G. acuminata.

Unarmed ; leaves obversely lanceolate, ...... 90000000 00000000 00000006 G. oblanceolata.

Armed, the spines leaf- and flower-bearing ; leaves obovate, blunt to almost notched,

»» G. monotana,

1. G. acumrvata, Hf. Ind. FI. I. 619.

Has. Ava, Khakhyen hills.—FI. Apr.

2. G. oBLANCEOLATA, Laws. in Hf. Ind. FI. I. 619.

Has. Burmah (Griff.) teste Lawson.

Barely recognisable by the meagre description given.

3. G. montana, Laws. in Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 621 excl. syn. Lamk.—

(Celastrus montanus, Roxb. Fl. Ind. I. 620 ; Wight Icon. t. 382).

Hap. Pegu, without locality (Dr. Brandis), probably Prome P

Kurrimia, Wall.

J. K. rozpusta, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1870.73. (Celustrus

robustus, Roxb. Fl. Ind. I. 626; K. pulcherrima, Wall. Cat. 48384, nomen

nudum; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 622).

Zale

162 S. Kurz— Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 3,

Has. Rare in the tropical forests along the eastern slopes of the

Pegu Yomah, but frequent in those of Martaban and Tenasserim ; also

Chittagong.— Fl. Febr. ; Fr. Apr. Aug.

Siphonodon, Griff.

1. S. cenastrInus, Griff. in Macl. Cale. Journ. IV. 247. t. 14; Hf.

in Linn. Trans. XXII. t. 26; Hf, Ind. FI. I. 629.

Has, Frequent in the tropical forests of the eastern slopes of the

Pegu Yomah and of Martaban.—Fl. Jan. to May.

Salacia, L.

Conspectus of species.

* Cymes peduncled and dichotomously branched, usually short.

Branches terete ; pedicels thick, 6—8 lin. long ; sepals not ciliate ; filaments very short,

complanate and reflexed,....0000 sesssee 4 on00 0000 O6DNd0C «ae 1s ole ot MeaLON GUI OMI

Cymes 4 in. long! divaricate, .......... sais 00 900¢ SS. Griffithit.

Branches marked by decurrent lines and more or fees nascar pedioala “about 4 lin.

long, slender, arising from the globose rusty-bracteoled ends of the cyme-branches ;

sepals fringed ; filaments nearly $ lin. long, terete and erect,..........S. tortuosd.

* *& Flowers springing from an axillary sessile tubercle or wart.

x Flowers large ; petals about 3—4 lin. long.

Pedicels 2—38 lin. thick ; leaves large, coriaceous, ..........00 eevee . S. grandifiora.

x x Flowers minute or small, the petals less than 2 lines long.

+ Leaves turning brown or dark-coloured in drying. Filaments

very short and complanate.

Branchlets dark-brown, corky-lenticellate ; ; leaves entire; sepals ciliate ; ovary cells 2-

Dyvullach 506 ono oops no doDso 4 998900 00009000 0000000000 090000000000 S. verrucosa.

Branchlets pale-coloured, sparingly jeneealiste. ; leaves serrate; berries as large as a

crab-apple, 2—3-seeded; sepals not ciliate, ........ poG000.000000 05 S. Roxburghii.

Tash TeaneS turning yellowish or pale green in drying.

O Petals clawed ; filaments terete, slender.

Petals about a line long, clawed ; pedicels as long or mie than the petiole; berries

seed edumprerieys SOOO 0060 o000 OCOuaG0G 30000 . S. prinoides.

O O Petals sessile ; filaments very sai bid dilated:

Pedicels few, short, 1—12 lin. lone siisyrmeeene a -ielelelelole 20 lols elolerers ence cee We JLQVESCENS.

Pedicels numerous, slender, longer than the petiole, ........ 2.205. 020-8. multiflora.

1. S. tonerroria, Wall. Pl. As. rar. III. 1882. 47. t. 278, non Hf.

cujus homonymum in S. Maingayanam est mutandum.—(S. floribunda,

Wight Il. 1840. I. 134; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 629)

Haz. Tenasserim, Mergui (Griff. 885/1) ; Moulmein District (Fal-

coner).—Fr. Jan.

NV. B.—Uawson has a 8. Grifithii (Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 628) to which he

ascribes divaricate cymes 4 in. long, but his brief phrase does not enable

me to form an idea of the plant. Can it be S. diandra, Miq. ?

2, S. vortuosa, Griff. Not Dicot. 471. t. 581. f. 2.

1875. ] of the Burmese Flora, 163

Has. Tenasserim, from Moulmein District down to Mergui (Griff.

899).—Fl. Jan. to March.

3. 8S. GRANDIFLORA, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872. 800; Hf.

Ind. Fl. I. 626.

Haz. Tenasserim (Helf. 898).

4, S verrucosa, Wight Ill. I. 1840. 184; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 628.—(8.

polyantha, Korth. Verh. Natuurk. Gesch. Bot. 18839—42. 182 ; S. sp. Griff.

Not. Dicot. 471).

Haz. Frequent in the tropical forests, from Martaban, east of Toun-

ghoo, down to Tenasserim as far as Mergui (Griff. 888).—Fl. Jan. to March ;

Fr. Apr.

5. 8. Roxsuren, Wall. Cat. 4217; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 627.—(Johnia

salacioides, Roxb. FI. Ind. Il. 168; S. membranacea, Laws. in Hf. Ind. FI.

I. 627).

Has. ‘Tropical forests of Tenasserim (Helf. 896).

Lawson gives Mergui, Moulmein, and the Andamans as localities for

S. viminea, Wall. Cat. 7267, while he omits Penang and Malacca (Griff.

900), the original localities. Without seeing Burmese specimens I hesitate

to adopt the species as Burmese.

7. S. prryores, DC. Prod. I. 571; Griff. Not. Dicot. 470; Wight

Teon. t. 321; Hf. Ind. Fl. Il. 626.—(Johnia Coromandeliana, Roxb. FI.

Ind. I. 169; S. latifolia, Wall. Cat. 4222; Hf. Ind. FI. I. 629. pp.)

Has. Frequent in the tidal forests, all along the coast, from Chitta-

gong and Pegu down to Tenasserim and the Andamans.—FI. Jan. ; Fr.

March to June.

This is one of those species that grow under the influence of the sea as

well as in the interior of India, where it recurs in the stony drier tracts.

8. S. FLAVESCENS, Kurz in Journ. As. Soe. Beng. 1872. 800; Hf.

Ind. Fl. I. 625.

Has. Tenasserim (Helf. 897) ; Tavoy.

9. S. mutrmtora, Wight Ill. I, 1384; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 627.—(S.

myrtifolia, Griff. Not Dicot. 470 ?)

Has. Tenasserim, Mergui (Griff.).

I have not seen this species.

Hippocratea, L.

Conspectus of species.

x Petals $—1 lin. long, imbricated in the bud.

Petals about $ lin. long ; leaves glaucous, .......0 cesses quvendcad nadeo0c HH. Indica.

Petals about a line long ; leaves turning brown in drying,.............. H, fuscescens.

x x Petals about 2 lin. long, valvate in the bud.

Flowers outside and inflorescence greyish puberous; carpels linear-oblong, 2—3} in.

Gi Goon aed 3.0000 0000 040000 0900 D000 BOD doe OcD000 Doon ODDO OG HH. macrantha.

Petals inside densely greyish hairy, ......+. OG0000 CO06. bud codndd doconoDd!& JACHAC

164 S. Kurz— Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 3,

1. H. Inpica, Willd. sp. pl. I. 198; Roxb. Corom. Pl. II. t. 130

and Bi. Ind. 1. 165); Ef. Inde awigd: 1624.

Has. Rather rare in the open forests of Martaban, east of Tounghoo ;

Tenasserim.—Fl. Apr.

2. H. ruscescens, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872. 300.

Has. Upper Tenasserim, near Moulmein (Falconer).

8. H. macrantruHa, Korth. Verh. Natuurk. Gesch. Bot. 187. t. 39;

Miq. Fl. Ind. Bat. 1/2. 599 and Ann. Mus. Lugd. Bat. IV. 153.—(A,

grandiflora, Wall. Cat. 4218).

Has. Tenasserim (Helf. 905).

The disk both in the Tenasserim and the Khasi hill plant is quite

glabrous. The species differs from H. obtusifolia greatly in the size and

shape of the ripe carpels.

4. H. Lope, Laws. in Hf, Ind. Fl. I. 624.

Has. Tenasserim, Moulmain (¢este Lawson).

Lophopetalum, Wight.

Conspectus of species.

* Petals fringedly crested or lamellate on the upperside. Disk 5-lobed.

Flowers nearly 4 in. in diameter; crest of petals fringed, ............ .. L. fimbriatum.

* * Petals naked, in a dried state often turning wrinkled or corrugate on the inner

face.

x Panicles glabrous. Disk smooth, in a dried state often conspicuously

wrinkled. Leaves elliptical to ovate.

Panicles brachiate, stiff and squarrose ; flowers about 3 lin. in diameter; disk wrinkled,

..L. Wallichii.

As preceding but panicles larger and slenderly branched ; flowers about 2 lin. across ;

disk wrinkled,........ ae eee 6-00.0:.0.0 CORE ae ER GE acicneraa MRA BiGs oOo L. littorale.

Apparently the same as the preceding, but the disk said to be entirely covered with

OS Io omllEnKe WEES, agooda0s o0000000 BPicrsve\s See hare hie PROTA Gash S000 L. celastroides.

x x Panicles while young covered with a rusty coloured or greyish to-

mentum.

Leaves lanceolate to oblong-lanceolate ; petiole 3—4 lin. long; flowers about 1—14

lin. across; disk smooth or nearly 80, .......0 eseoee sheisanetorsiere ...L. floribundum.

1. L. Frusriarum, Wight Il. 1.178; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 615.

Has. Lower Pegu, Poungleen (Dr. Brandis), and Martaban (Yoonze-

leen, &c.) down to Tenasserim, Mergui (Griff.).—Fl. March.

2. L. Wawticni, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872. 299; Hf.

Ind. Fl. I. 615.

Has. Common in the open, more especially in the eng-forests, all

over Pegu and Martaban down to Tenasserim.—Fl. Jan. Mareh; Fr.

March, Apr.

3. L. LirroraALE, (Kofoona littoralis, Laws. in Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 617).

Haz. In inundated low lands of the Pazwoondoung river of Pegu ;

1875.] of the Burmese Flora. 165

in Upper Tenasserim apparently frequent.— Fl. Febr. March ; Fr. March,

Apr.

Very close to the preceding, but differing by its smaller flowers and in

the slenderness of the peduncles and pedicels, as also in its growth in low-

lands inundated during rains. Lawson ascribes sublamellate petals to this

species, while they are simply longitudinally corrugate in the Burmese speci-

mens, and hence I suspect that he has made up his phrasule (for a descrip-

tion it cannot be called) from Malayan specimens, quite overlooking the

fact that Wallich’s No. 6520 all came from Burma. He also still ascribes

to the genus Lophopetalum “rarely winged, arillate seeds” and a “ fleshy

albumen,” all characters which are applicable to the genus if taken in the

absolute negative. Wight erroneously included the Hvonymus grandiflorus

in Lophopetaluwm and drew the characters of the seeds from it: whence the

confusion which I have already pointed out in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1870,

p. 73. On account of the dotted vegetative parts and the seeds being

winged at the upper end only, I now prefer keeping up the genus Kokoona

Thw. Lawson has also a ZL. celastroides from Upper Tenasserim and Pegu,

the description of which does not enlighten one much as to the characters

wherein it differs from the above otherwise than by the lobulate warts of

the dried disk.

4. I. ruorrpunpum, Wight Ill. I. 178; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 616.—(ip-

pocratea pentandra, Griff. Not. Dicot. 472).

Has. ‘Tenasserim, Mergui, in dense forests and along the coast of the

island Madamaca (Griff. 1977/2).—F 1. Decb.

Doubtful species.

1. L. FrmrorMe, Laws. in Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 616.

Has. Tenasserim, Mergui (Griff.) ¢este Lawson.

Not seen by me, but hardly belongs to this genus. The cupular disk

points to Hippocratea, but the number of stamens is not given.

RHAMNACEA.

Conspectus of genera.

Trib. I. ZIZYPHEA. Drupe containing a solid 1—8-celled putamen, or the fruit a

capsule or indehiscent nut. Ovary superior or half-superior. Disk filling the

calyx-tube.

* Ovary half-superior or superior. Fruit a nut, dry, coriaceous, 1-celled

and 1-seeded, or a capsule. (Ventilaginee).

VeytizAco. Nut produced into a long terminal wing, indehiscent.

SmytHzA. Capsule lanceolate or urn-shaped, 2-valved.

* * Ovary superior. Drupe fleshy or dry, with an 1—8-celled hard

putamen. (Zizyphee genuine).

Zizxpuvus. Leaves palmately 3—d-nerved.

166 S. Kurz—Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 3,

BercuemiA. Leaves penninerved.

Trib. II. RHAMNEZ. Fruit dry or drupaceous, containing 3 (rarely 2—4) indehis-

cent or 2-valved cocci. Ovary superior to inferior.

* Ovary superior or half-superior. Drupe fleshy or dry, superior. Disk

fleshy, filling the calyx-tube. (Rhamnee vera).

SaceretiA. Flowers in terminal panicles. Leaves opposite or nearly so.

Scutia. Flowers in fascicles or umbellets. Leaves opposite or nearly so.

Cotupriva. Flowers in cymes. Leaves alternate.

* * Ovary and fruit inferior, the latter crowned by the calyx-limb. (Gouaniec).

Aptrron. Styles 2. Fruit globose, not winged. Flowers clustered, in terminal

panicles.

GovaniA. Fruit dry, 3-cornered or -winged. Flowers spicate or racemose, panicled.

Ventilago, Gertn.

Conspectus of species.

x Calyx adnate to the drupe, small and basilar.

Flowers in slender simple or branched racemes; not indistinctly puberous, the wing

only 1—14 im. long. .....+00 eeaee 9 0000 o9000 0 a00e0C 90 00000 V. Madraspatana.

x x Calyx adnate to the drupe for ;—% of its length, and forming there a

prominent ring.

O Flowers and fruit more or less yellowish pubescent or tomentose.

Racemose panicles and flowers tomentose ; fruits puberulous, the wing 13—I1 in. long,

the calyx reaching the middle of the nut, ....... 9 pad0e vee csseee ee VD. Calyculati.

O O Fruits quite glabrous, even when young.

All parts glabrous; nuts about 3 lin. in diameter, the calyx reaching the middle and

forming a sharp ring there, the wing rounded at the apex, ......... . V. leiocarpa.

Glabrous?; nuts nearly 3 in. across, the calyx broad and flat, occupying only the basal

part of the nut, the wing shortly acuminate, ............++05 eeeees V» Maingayi.

1.. V. Mapraspatana, Gaertn Fruct. I. 223. t. 29; Wight Icon. t.

514; Bth. in Linn. Proc. v. 76; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 631.

Haz. Tenasserim, Moulmein to Mergui (Griff. ete.) teste Bth.

2. V. catycunaTa, Tul, in Ann. d. sc. nat. 4 ser. VIII. 124; Bth.

in Linn. Proc. V. 76 ; Hf. Ind. FI. I. 631, excl. syn. V. macrantha.—(Venti-

lago Maderaspatana, Roxb, Corom., Pl. I. 55. t. 76 and Fl. Ind. I. 629, non

Gaertn.).

Has. Not unfrequent in the open, especially the eng-forests, and in

the dry forests of Prome, Pegu, and Martaban; also Ava; Tenasserim,

teste Lawson.—F 1. Nov.; Fr. March, Apr.

8. V. Lerocarpa, Bth. in Linn. Proc. V. 77; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 6381.

Has. Tenasserim.

4. V. Marneayi, Laws. in Hf. Ind. FI I. 631. (V. sp. Griff. Not.

Dicot. 492).

Has. ‘Tenasserim (Helf.) ; Mergui (Grilf.) teste Lawson.

1875.] of the Burmese Flora. 7 167

Smythea, Seem.

1. S. canprcarpa, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872. 301; Hf. in

Ind. FI. I. 632.

Har. Tenasserim (Helf. 2026/1).

Zizyphus, Juss.

Conspectus of species.

* Flowers in axillary cymes or clusters.

O Leaves more or less tomentose or pubescent beneath, Drupes sappy,

quite glabrous.

Leaves coriaceous, densely fulvous or whitish tomentose beneath, glabrous above ; drupe

4—+ in. long, the putamen 2-celled ; erect shrub or tree, ........ ..s00e Z. jujuba.

Leaves membranous, above thinly beneath densely silky pubescent; drupe the size of

a pea, the putamen 1- rarely 2-celled; erect or scandent shrub, ........Z. oenoplia.

O O Leaves glabrous or sprinkled with a few hairs on the nerves beneath.

Leaves green, thin chartaceous; drupes while young tawny tomentose, adult woody,

4. glabra.

* * Cymes collected into leafy or leafless panicles. Drupes woody.

Leayes glabrous, rigidly chartaceous; drupes glabrous ; climber, ........ Z. funiculosa.

Leaves densely fulvous tomentose or pubescent beneath ; drupes glabrous ; leaf-sheddinge

REE) 600008 000006 doOuDE 500000000000000 00000000 6000 6000 do00d0 see cle Za UG OSH

1. Z. susupa, Lamk. Exe. Meth. III. 318; Wight Icon. t. 99 ; Roxb.

Fl. Ind. I. 608; Griff. Not. Dicot. 491; Edgew. in Linn. Proc. VI, 201;

Hook. Journ. Bot. I. t. 140; Bedd. Fl. Sylv. Madr. t. 149; Brand. For.

mise: t. 17 ; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 632.

Haz. Common in the leaf-shedding, especially the dry and savannah-

forests, of Prome and Ava, less frequent in those of the other provinces ;

also frequently cultivated in and around villages.—FIl. Aug., Sept.; Fr.

Octob. to Jan.

2. Z. oenopura, Mill. Dict. No. 3; Roxb. Fl. Ind. I. 611; Hf. Ind.

FL. 1. 634, excl. syn. Z. albens, Roxb.—(Z. Napeca, Roxb. FI. Ind. I. 618,

non L.).

VAR. a. GLABRESCENS, leaves green on both sides, shortly and thinly

pubescent. Usually a straggling shrub.

Var. 6. FERRUGINESCENS, leaves tawny villous beneath ; usually a lofty

climber.

VAR. y. PEDICELLARIS (Z. pedicellaris, Wall. Cat. 4243), as preceding,

but cymes longer peduncled and larger, pedicels about 3 lin. long.

Has. Common all over Burma and the adjacent islands, as well in

the leaf-shedding as in the evergreen forests; var. 8. is a more southern

form, frequent in Martaban, Tenasserim, the Andamans, ete.; var. y. in

Prome.—Fl. Sept. Octob. ; Fr. C. S.

168 S, Kurz—Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 3,

3. 4Z. avaBra, Roxb. Fl. Ind. I. 614.—(Z. Horsfieldii, Mig. Fl. Ind.

Bat. I. 648; Z. venulosa, Wall. Cat. 4235).

Has. Frequent in the tropical forests, all over Burmah, from Ava and

Chittagong down to Tenasserim and the Andamans.—Fr. C. S.

Prof. Lawson has created not a little confusion as regards this species.

Without taking the trouble of studying Roxburgh’s description, he based

his identification upon Wallich’s No, 4242 (doubtfully marked as Z. glabra),

which is probably a glabrescent form of Z. rugosa and has nothing what-

ever to do with Roxburgh’s plant. At the same time he makes quite a

mélange of Z. funiculosa, to which he refers not only the true Z. glabra,

but also, apparently, Z. swbquinquenervia, Miq., from Malacca (Maingay

No, 412, a variety with smaller glabrescent drupes),—both species at once

distinguishable from it by the axillary cymes.

4. Z, FuNicuLosA, Ham. in Wall, Cat. 4234; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 636 pp.

Has. Ava, Khakhyen hills.

5. Z, nucosa, Lamk. Ene, Meth. III. 319; Wight Icon. t. 339;

Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 686 pp. (4. latifolia, Roxb. FI. Ind. I. 607).

Has. Frequent in all leaf-shedding forests, more especially in the

open ones, all over Burmah, from Ava and Martaban down to Tenasserim.

Fl. March, Apr.; Fr. May.

Doubtful species.

1. Z. tomentosa, Roxb. Fl. Ind. I. 611.

Has. Chittagong, where it is used for fences.

Berchemia, Neck.

Conspectus of species.

Leaves 2—4 in. long, the petiole 3—1 in. long ; panicle ample, terminal,.. B. floribunda.

Leaves 1—1} in. long, the petiole about 3 lin. long ; racemes axillary,.... B. polyphylia.

1. B. Foorrpunpa, Wall. Cat. 4256; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 6387.—(Zizy-

phus floribunda, Wall. in Roxb, FI. Ind. IT. 868).

Haz. Ava, Khakhyen hills (J. Anderson).

2. B. ponypHyiia, Wall. Cat. 4259; Hf. Ind. FI. I. 638.

Hap. Ava, Taong dong (¢este Lawson).

Sageretia, Brong.

1. §S. THerzans, Brongn. in Ann. d. sc. nat. 1 ser. X. 360; Hf. Ind.

Fl. IL 641. Var. £8. piospyriront1a, Laws. in Hf. 1. ¢. 462.

Has. Ava.—Fl. Octob.

Scutia, Comm.

1. Sc. Myrtina, (Rhamnus myrtinus, Burm. Fl. Ind. 1768. 60;

Rhannus circumseissus, L. f. Suppl. 1781. 152; Roxb, Fl. Ind. I. 603 ;

1875.] of the Burmese Fiora. 169

Seutia Indica, Brongn. in Ann, d. se. nat. X. 868; Wight Ill. t. 73; He.

Ind. Fl. I. 640; Rhamnus lucidus, Roxb. Fl. Ind. I. 605).

VAR. a. RETUSA, leaves retuse or blunt,

Var. 8. AcuTIFOLIA, leaves acute.

Has. Var. @. Tenasserim, along the Attaran river.

Colubrina, L. C. Rich.

Conspectus of species.

LLGENGE GWG! GAMES CIHR S abodo COOODOUO Gemeaee a bd ooco DOUne s asecseee O. Asratica.

Cymes and under surface of leaves pubescent,...... .ccces ccccesee severe C. pubescens.

1. C. Astarica, Brongn. in Ann, d. se, nat. 1 ser. X. 869; Wight

Ill. ¢. 74; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 642.—(Ceanothus Asiaticus, L. sp. pl. 284;

Roxb. Fl. Ind. 1. 615; Rhamnus acuminatus, Colebr. in Roxb. FI. Ind.

I. 615).

Has. Frequent in the beach- and coast-forests along the sea-shore,

from Arracan down to Tenasserim and the Andamans.—Fl. Febr.; Fr.

March Apr.

2. OC. PuBEScENS, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872. 301; Hf.

Ind. FI. I. 642.

Has. Frequent in the open, especially the low forests, all over Pegu

and Martaban; also entering the tropical forests—Fl. March ; Fr. Apr.

May.

Apteron, Kurz.

1. A. LANcEoLATUM, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872. 801; Hf.

Ind. Fl. I. 648.

Haz, Upper Tenasserim, Moulmein District (Brandis, Falconer).—F.

Febr.

Gouania, L.

Conspectus of species.

Leaves glabrous or nearly so, crenate ; racemes puberulous, glabrescent: disk glabrous,

S-lemneel < qaposulless SlblOnODIS, Gogooo code DONDO000 0000 Gonaan o0NE G. leptostachya.

Leayes velvety above, densely tawny or rusty pubescent beneath, entire ; racemes rusty-

tomentose; capsules puberulous, .. .... .oce cece come eee eenees or nt G. Brandisii.

1. G. Leprosracuya, DC. Prod. II. 40 ; Wight, Icon. t. 974; Griff.

Not. Dicot. 493. t. 585. f. 2; Hf. Ind. Fl. 1. 643.—(G@. téliefolia, Roxb.

Corom. Pl. I. ¢. 98. and F1. Ind. I. 632).

Has. Frequent in the mixed forests and in shrubberies along streams

and around villages, all over Burma down to Tenasserim.—F'l. Close of B.S.

HrO. S.

2. G. Branpisi, Hassk. in Flora 1$71. 280, in adnot,—( G. integri-

folia, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng 1870. 49, non Lamk.),

22

170 8. Kurz—Contributions towards a Knowledge [ No. 3,

Haz. Not unfrequent in the tropical forests of Martaban and Tenas-

serim.—Fr. Febr. March.

This species may eventually turn out to be only an entire-leaved form

of G. Javanica, Miq., but the flowers are still unknown.

AMPELIDELZ.

Conspectus of species.

Vitis. Stamensfree. Ovary 2-celled, with 2 ovules in each cell. Tendril-bearing

climbers. i

Lera. Stamens and petals united with the disk. Ovary 3—6-celled, with a solitary

ovule in each cell. Hrect shrubs or trees, without tendrils.

Vitis, L.

Conspectus of species

Subg. I. Vitts (sens. extens.). Inflorescences branched in the usual way,

not dilated and confluent.

§ 1. Flowers in leaf-opposed or axillary true cymes. Flowers usually 4-me-

vous. (Cissus.)

O Leaves compound, from simple and pedately 3—9 or more foliolate

to digitate, or if simple-leaved jointed with the petiole (1—2-

foliolate).

+ Leaves pedately or pinnately foliolate, very rarely spuriously

digitate.

+ Style short, spreadingly 4-lobed, or the 4-lobed or 4-cleft

stigma sessile.

* Style short, spreadingly 4-lobed at the apex.

Flowers often unisexual.

Leaves 3-foliolate ; berries 14 in. in diameter; seed obovoid, grooved on the back, the

groove with a linear tubercle ; stem very warty...... 500 o000008 ... V. tuberculata.

Hermaphrodite ; leaves coriaceous, 3-foliolate, the leaflets very shortly petioluled,

.. V. assimilis.

Flowers unisexual ; leaves sappy membranous, 3-foliolate to pedately 5-foliolate; cymes

short ; seeds oblong, smooth,......... 500 090090 600000 Gd0000 550450 V. oxyphylla.

* * Stigma sessile, 4-lobed or cleft. Flowers often

unisexual.

All parts, also the very short cyme, glabrous; leaves 3-foliolate, sappy herbaceous ;

pedicels short, cymulose ; berries white, pea-shaped,.............. V. angustifolia.

Very much as the preceding, but cymes very slender and large, puberulous ; seeds half-

orbicular, broadly and shallowly furrowed above with a long blunt ridge in the

furrow, the sides transversely rugate,......++ seve vees SU bdbo on oC Or V. bracteolata.

Glabrous or the petioles and cyme often puberulous; leaves pedate, or the upper ones

often 3-foliolate, sappy coriaceous ; berries white, the size of a cherry or smaller ;

seeds obovoid-oblong, rugulose, broadly and shallowly furrowed on the back,

.. V. lanceolaria.

Glabrous ; leaves pedate, herbaceous-fleshy ; pedicels 2—3 lin. long, umbellulate ; berries

black, the size ofa pea, ........ SibisleloNe) cele lee\oyeioieiiel es ale v\e\ for e-elemstetete een eS Cpaener aaa

1875.] of the Burmese Flora. 171

Very much as the preceding, but young shoots and petioles rusty hirsute; leaves spur-

TOUSIN CHEMIE Gegonnlosogod coGoct ad o¢o0ee Aq no00 0000 BeGddA yoD0bT 06 Ma MnTaiare

+ + Style simple, entire.

* Leaves all 3-foliolate.

Glabrous ; cymes leaf-opposed, glabrous ; leaves glaucous beneath, ....V. semicordata.

All parts shortly puberulous rarely glabrous; cymes axillary or on axillary shoots,

PUberwlOus, cose aver vevecssoces Meveaiciete ob0d0nd latievarictels/e cieteisleiereisi) 0) ChU;OlULs

* * Leaves pedate.

x Cymes leaf-opposed and spuriously axillary, 7. ¢.

the cyme terminating an axillary leafy or leat-

less shoot.

All parts densely puberulous or pubescent, ........... tne eeee seaee ...V. Teysmanni.

All parts glabrous ; leaves sparingly pubescent along the nerves beneath, .. V. Japonica.

x x Cymes truly axillary, long-peduncled.

Leaflets cuneate-obovate, rather blunt or acute, slightly pubescent along the nerves

beneath ; seeds triangular with sharp margins, muricate on the back,.. V. tenwifolia.

All parts pubescent to almost glabrous ; leaflets finely acuminate ; seeds hemispherical,

MADTO, s5oq00 0500 coacco0u dar 5 podeee OO000 500.0000 0000900 o0an00 4000 Wo LARA

+ + Leaves truly digitate.

All parts puberulous ; cymes axillary and terminal on axillary shoots; leaflets 14}—

im. long; style simple, .......... nod coe Bie 0.8 ote ceeceese se Ve auriculata.

Leaves glabrous ; leaflets 4—6 in. long, deaby herbareatth cymes puberulous; berries

globose, style simple, bark red, .......0....cceeee sees ssseee ves Ve Crythroclada,

Leaves glabrous: leaflets 4—6 in. long, coriaceous ; cymes almost sessile, very slenderly

branched, puberulous ; flowers minute, dioecious ; stigma peltately 4-lobed, almost

sessile ; seeds curved-oblong, ...........eeeeeceeees sao poo emes V. campylocarpa.

O O Leaves simple or very rarely (in V. Anamallayana*) the upper-

most ones 3-foliolate. Cymes leaf-opposite (except in V. Wallichii).

x Branches and branchlets cornered, sometimes almost winged

and fleshy.

Branchlets very fleshy, 4-cornered, jointed; leaves small, fleshy, bluntish crenate ;

GPUNGS SHI, ono cans oo0g 000000 acDUDO 50 000d 0000N .V. quadrangwaris.

Branchlets bluntish 5-angular, thick and glossy ; “leaves remotely bristly toothed, long-

petioled, ....... o00 oC 0 S000 UHODOU00 Gee OHOR .. V. pentagonae

Branchlets sharply 6- paced? ficae ss peatly serrate, Herpeeotisi ; cymes compound,

peduncled or sessile; seeds obliquely obovate, transversely: wrinkled on the faces,

. V. discolor.

As preceding ; leaves shorter petioled, while young appressed hairy on the nerves be-

neath ; seeds smooth, obovate, ......seeseeee SO ooLOCo DODO COCK CONG ball o GANA

x x Branches and branchlets terete or nearly so.

+ Cymes axillary ; branchlets angular ?

Leaves slightly 3-lobed, glabrous, sappy membranous, large; seeds globose, smooth,

Ve Wallichit.

+ + Cymes leaf-opposed.

Branchlets terete, whitish pruinous ; all parts glabrous; seeds smooth, ......V. repens.

All parts, especially while young, rusty or tawny tomentose or pubescent, more or less

* This species is so near to V. repens that I should not wonder if it were to turn

out to be only an abnormal state of it.

on S. Kurz—Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 3,

glabrescent ; leaves sharply acuminate, never lobed; seeds obovate, shallowly

lacunose, ..... bd wdou Higigiado0t ‘cwavdd HE hh ee Mit Deeb Ro Del aene wees Ve adnate.

All younger parts rusty tomentose or pubescent, glabrescent ; leaves large, often some-

what 3-lobed, bluntish acuminate, deciduous ; seeds obovate, smooth, ..V. Linngi.

§ 2. Inflorescence a modification of the tendrils, cymose-panicled, racemose or

spiked, or more usually the one or both tendril-branches transformed

into a panicle. Flowers 4- or more usually 5-merous. (Bu-Vitis.)

* Flowers pedicelled, in loose or contracted panicles.

+ Seeds 2—4 lin. long, shallowly grooved and more or less dis-

tinctly radiately furrowed on the back.

x Glabrous or nearly so.

Cymose panicles ample, glabrous, with or without tendrils; pedicels thick, nearly a line

long ; leaves 3—5-lobed, the lobes usually acute,......... bn00b00 9007 V. latifolia.

x x All parts more or less woolly-tomentose.

Branchlets, peduncles and usually the petioles covered with a woolly tomentum inter-

mixed with black spreading stiff hairs; leaves almost glabrous,........V. barbata.

Branchlets, ete. woolly without black hairs; leaves lobed to palmately lobed ; panicles

usually tendril-bearing, short and rather compact; pedicels very short and thick,

.. V. tomentosa.

t t Seeds about a line long, longitudinally furrowed on the back,

almost smooth, glossy-black.

Branchlets, etc., woolly, without black hairs; leaves tawny woolly beneath, slightly

lobed ; panicles usually tendril-bearing, woolly, large and lax ; pedicels very slen-

der, 13 lin. long, ..... B.00006 60100 0 000 aodaen Dorau-doB bdo ab5066 . +> Ve lanata.

* * Flowers sessile, in spikes, the spikes forming elongate panicles.

Young parts thinly and fugaceously woolly ; leaves pedately 5—7-foliolate, glabrous ex-

cept on the nerves beneath; spikes in very slender panicles, ..... odo. 5 Lesher

Quite glabrous ; leaves digitately foliolate, glaucous green ; spikes puberulous, forming

1) 1h, Moraney SiON OEMBONES, 5 0000.0002000000 000000 000400 4050000 V. polystachya.

Subg. YI. Prerisantues, Bl. Rachis of inflorescence leafy expanded and

fleshy-membranous, the flowers sessile, unisexual.

Glabrous ; leaves simple ; a very slender twiner,............ ss... 900050000 V. polita.

1. V. TUBERCULATA, Laws. in Hf. Ind. FI. I. 656.

Has. Pegu (teste Lawson).

I have not seen this species, and I suspect that itis only a large-fruited,

3-foliolate form of V. lanceolaria. P

2. YV. assrmiuis, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872. 302.—(V. lan-

ceolarta var. 2, assimilis, Laws. in Hf. Ind. FI. I. 660).

Has. Not rare in the drier hill-forests of the Martaban hills, east of

Tounghoo, at 8—4000 ft. elevation.—FI. March.

3. V. OXYPHYLLA, Wall. Cat. 60385.

Haz. Frequent in the tropical forests of the eastern slopes of the

Pegu Yomah and the Martaban hills, east of Tounghoo.—Fl. March.

4. V.UANcEoLaRta, Wall. ap. WA. Prod. I. 128: Wight Icon. t.

177; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 660, excl. syn. C. feminea; Mig. Ann. Mus. Lugd.

1875.] of the Burmese Flora. 173

Bat. I. 78.—(Cissus lanceolaria, Roxb. in Wall. Fl. Ind. 1.4380; V. muri-

cata, WA. Prod. I. 128; Wight Icon. t. 740).

VAR. a. LANCEOLARTA, cymes loose and ample, densely puberulous, the

pedicels longer and slender: petioles and petiolules puberulous (Cissus lan-

ceolaria, Roxb. 1. c.; V. Hookeri, Laws. in Hf, Ind. Fl. I. 661 ?)

Var. B. TUBERCULATA (Cissus tuberculata, Bl. Bydr. 189), cymes

short and often somewhat compact, less puberulous or glabrous, the pedicels

usually shorter and thicker ; petioles, &c., all glabrous; berries and seeds

usually smaller.

Has. Both varieties, but more so var. 8., common in the tropical for-

ests all over Martaban down to Tenasserim and the Andamans ; also along

the eastern slopes of the Pegu Yomah ; Chittagong.—F I. Febr. March ; Fr.

Apr. May.

Var. a, is in my opinion the true Roxburghian plant, while var. #. is

Blume’s Cissus tuberculata.

5. V. serrunata, Wall. ap. Mig. Ann. Mus. Lugd. Bat. I. 77.

(Cissus serrulata, Roxb. Fl. Ind. 1820. I. 114; Cissus capriolata, Royle

Til. Him. Pl. t. 26; V. capriolata, Don. Prod. Nep. 188; Hf. Ind. Fl. I.

659).

VaR. a. CAPRIOLATA, all parts quite glabrous.

Var. 6. suBoBrectTa, branches and petioles rusty-pubescent like those

of V. obtecta, and forming a transition to it, the leaves partially becoming

digitate.

Has. Frequent along mountain-streams in the tropical forests of

Martaban, up to 3000 ft. elevation; Ava, Khakhyen hills; Chittagong ; var.

B. Ava, Khakhyen hills.—Fr. Febr. March.

6. V. oprecta, Wall. Cat. 6026; Hf. Ind. Fl. 1. 657.

Has. Ava, Khakhyen hills (J. Anderson).

_ 7. Y.semicorpata, Wall. in Roxb. Fl. Ind. II. 1824. 481.—(V.

Himalayana, Brand. For. Fl. 100; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 655).

VaR. a. SEMICORDATA, Laws. in Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 656.—(V. semicordata,

Wall. 1. c.) young parts, inflorescence, and leaflets beneath, shortly and spar=

ingly hairy.

Var. 6. Himatayana, (V. Himalayana, Brand. 1. c.; V. Neilgher-

rensis, Wight Icon. t. 965; Ampelopsis Himalayana, Royle Ill. Him. Pl.

149), all parts quite glabrous, leaflets glaucous beneath.

Has. Var. £. in the drier hill-forests of the Martaban hills, east of

Tounghoo, at about 3000 ft. elevation —F1. March.

8. V. rrironra, L. sp. pl. 293; Bth. Fl. Austr. I. 449.—(Cissus

carnosa, Lamk, Dict. I. 81; Roxb. Fl. Ind. I. 409; V. carnosa, WA.

Prod. I. 127 ; Wight Icon. t. 171; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 654).

VaR, a. GENUINA, all parts shortly greyish pubescent.

174 S. Kurz— Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 3,

Var. B. ataprara, all parts glabrous or nearly so.

Has. Rather frequent all over Burma, especially in rubbishy places,

in hedges, and shrubberies, becoming a powerful climber in the forests.—FI.

R. 8.

I follow Miquel in adopting Linné’s oldest name, which is evidently

given in allusion to the trefoil (Lrifoliwm).

9. V. Trysmannt, Mig. in Ann. Mus. Lugd. Bat. I. 82.—( Cissus

Teysmanni, Miq. Suppl. Fl. Sumatr. 516; V. mollis, Wall. Cat. 6025; Hf.

Ind. Fl. 1. 660).

Has. Chittagong (teste Lawson).

10. V. Japonica, Thbg. Fl. Jap. 104.—(Cissus Japonica, DC. Prod.

I. 632; Cissus leucocarpa, Bl. Bydr. 189; Mig. Fl. Ind. Bat. 1/2. 663;

V. cymosa, Roxb. in Wall. Cat. 6017).

Has. Frequent along mountain-streams and on moist rocks in the

tropical forests of the Pegu Yomah, and from Martaban down to Tenasse-

rim; also Ava, Taongdong.— Fl. R. 8.; Fr. Jan. Febr.

11. V. renvrroria, WA. Prod. J. 129; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 660 in part.

Has. In the mixed forests of the Pegu Yomah and Arracan; also in

bamboo-jungles of the Andamans.—Fl. May, June.

Possibly only a more luxuriant form of the preceding species, with more

obtuse leaflets and truly axillary cymes.

12. V. prepara, Wall. ap. WA. Prod. 1.128; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 661.

(Cissus pedata, Lamk. Dict. I. 31; Roxb. Fl. Ind. I. 418).

VAR. ao. GENUINA, leaves pedately foliolate, pubescent.

Var. f£. GLABRATA, as preceding, but pretty glabrous.

Has. Var. a. frequent in leaf-shedding forests and more especially in

hedges and shrubberies of the cultivated alluvial plains; var. 6. in tropical

forests of the Andamans.—F I. Begin of R. S.

13. V. avricunata, Wall. ap. WA. Prod. I. 129; Wight Icon. t.

145; Hf, Ind. Fl. I. 658.—( Cissus auriculata, Roxb. Fl. Ind. I. 411).

Has. In the mixed forests of the Pegu Yomah; Chittagong.—FI.

Begin of R. 8.

14. V. eryrHRocrapA, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 2872. 301.

Has. Not unfrequent in the tropical and other forests along streams

of the Pegu Yomah and Martaban east of Tounghoo.—Fl. March.

Amongst the digitate species, this comes nearest to V. saponaria, Seem.

15. V. campyntocarpa, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1872. 302;

Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 657.—(Cissus feminea, Roxb. FI]. Ind. I. 410?; Panaz

micranthum, Wall. Cat. 4938).

Has. In the tropical forests of the slopes on eastern face of Kambala

toung, Pegu Yomah, at 1000—2000 ft. elevation ; Ava, Taong Dong

(Wall.)—Fl. Nov. ; Fr. March,

1875.] of the Burmese Flora. 175

Dicecious, remarkable for its minute flowers, and in this respect resem-

bling V. pubiflora, Mig. (syn. V. peduncularis, Lawson). ‘Lawson says

that it has no tendrils, but in this he is mistaken. I believe it to be

Roxburgh’s C. feminea, but not having seen the female flowers, I hesitate

to pronounce its identity with that species. Lawson confidently reduces C.

JSeminea to a synonym of V. lanceolaria, but the digitate leaves alone forbid

a comparison with it.

16. V. quapraneuLaris, Wall. ap. WA. Prod. I. 125; Wight Icon.

t. 51; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 645.—(Cissus quadrangularis, lL. Mant. 39; Roxb.

Fl. Ind. I. 407).

Has. Frequent in wild shrubby and waste places and in the dry

forests of the Prome district ; also Ava.—F I. Nov.

17, V. pentagona, Voigt Cat. Hort. Cale. 28; Kurz in Journ. As.

Soe. Beng. 1870. 74; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 646.—(Cissus pentagona, Roxb. FI.

Ind. I. 408).

Has. Not unfrequent in the tropical forests of the eastern slopes of

the Pegu Yomah, and from Chittagong and Arracan down to the Anda-

mans.—Fl. Octob.; Fr. Apr. May.

In Journ. As. Soe. J. ¢., I stated that Cissus hastata, Miq. ( = V. has-

tata, Mig. Ann. Mus. Lugd. Bat. 1863. I. 85., a species which Lawson 12

- years later rechristens V. sagittifolia, Laws. in Hf. Ind. Fl. 1875. I. 645)

was identical with V. glaberrima, Wall. This is an error, which arose

from my having solely consulted the Wallichian specimens of V. glaber-

rima, which all happen to be V.. hastata.

18. V. piscotor, Dalz. in Hook. Kew. Mise. II1.39; Miq Ann. Mus.

Lued. Bat. I. 86; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 647, excl. syn. V. costata.—(Cissus diss

color, Bl. Bydr. 281; Bot. Mag. t. 4763; Cissus velutinus, Linden in

Bot. Mag. t. 5207).

Var. a. DISCOLOR, leaves usually spotted, purplish beneath, on very

long petioles (at least the lower ones) ; cymes peduncled.

Var. 8. sesstnis, Mig. in Ann. Mus. Lugd. Bat. I. 86, cymes sessile

and umbelately branched already from the base.

Has. Var. a. frequent in the tropical forests and moister bamboo-

jungles, from Arracan, the Pegu Yomah, and Martaban down to Tenasserim

and the Andamans ; var. f. in the Martaban hills, east of ‘Tounghoo,—FI.

oes Er: C.8.

19. V. cosrata, Wall, Cat. 6011.

Has. Not unfrequent in the open and the mixed forests of Pegu and

Arracan; also Martaban.—Fr. H. 8.

— 20. V. Wauiicuit, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc, Beng. 1872. 802, non

DC, (Leea cordata, Wall. Cat. 6819.)

Has. Ava, Irrawaddi valley at Meaong.

176 S. Kurz—Contributions towards a Knowledge [No. 3,

Very near to V. pallida, WA., as Lawson has pointed out, but the

axillary cymes distinguish it from that species.

21. V. repens, WA. Prod. I. 125; Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 646.—(Cissus

repens, Lamk. Dict. I. 81; DC. Prod. I. 628 ; Rheed. Hort. Malab. VII.

t. 48; V. glauca, WA. Prod. I. 126; Cissus glauca, Roxb. FI. Ind. I. 406;

DC. Prod. I. 628; Cissus glauca, Roxb. FI. Ind. I. 406 ; Cissus Blumeana,

Steud. Nomencl ; Miq. Fl. Ind. Bat. I/2. 605; Cissus cerifera, T. et B. in

Natuurk. Tydsch. Ned. Ind. XXIV. 324).

Has. Frequent as well in the tropical as in the moister mixed forests,

all over Burma, from Chittagong and Ava down to Tenasserim and the

Andamans.— Fl. R. 8.; Fr. C. S.

22. V. apnata, Wall. ap. WA. Prod. I. 126; Wight Icon, t. 144;

Hf. Ind. Fl. I. 649.—( Cissus adnata, Roxb. Fl. Ind. I. 405).